JP2022121716A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest in a game.

SOLUTION: A first performance for indicating a determination result of first determination means is displayed on display means by first performance execution means. The performance mode of the first performance to be executed by the first performance execution means is set by performance mode setting means, and a special performance mode is set as a performance mode of the first performance to be executed in a state where a determination result of second determination means can be a specific determination result. Therefore, performances can be switched without giving a sense of discomfort to a player, thereby increasing game amusement.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises: a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination when a first discrimination condition is satisfied; a first effect executing means for causing a display means to execute a first effect for a predetermined period; an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect to be executed by the first effect executing means; and a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means is configured to perform the second determination. A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state in which the determination result can be a specific determination result.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the acquisition information for establishing the second determination condition is at least based on the acquisition information so that the second determination condition is satisfied. storage means capable of storing up to and prior determination means capable of determining the acquired information stored in the storage means until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information; The effect mode setting means sets the special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific preliminary determination result.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein operation means that can be operated by the player; operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; a second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period; and the effect mode setting means also sets the effect mode of the second effect. the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means; The effect mode setting means sets an effect mode corresponding to the operation effect as a special effect mode of the first effect when the operation effect is set as the second effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect so that the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result. It is possible to set a first effect mode that is likely to be set in a certain case and a second effect mode that is less likely to be set than the first effect mode, and the second effect mode is a special effect mode of the first effect. is set.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied and the first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means are displayed. a first effect execution means for causing the means to execute for a predetermined period; effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means; a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination when the determination condition No. 2 is satisfied, and the effect mode setting means determines whether the determination result of the second determination means is a specific A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state that can result in a determination result.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a storage means capable of storing acquired information for satisfying the second determination condition at least until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information, and stored in the storage means. pre-determination means capable of determining the acquired information until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information, and The special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed in the case of a specific preliminary determination result.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means. a second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined period of time; the effect mode setting means can also set the effect mode of the second effect; The effect executing means is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the effect mode setting means sets the operation effect as the second effect. When set, the effect mode corresponding to the operation effect is set as the special effect mode of the first effect.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2 or 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect mode setting means sets, as the effect mode of the first effect, a first effect mode that is likely to be set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result, and A second effect mode, which is difficult to set, can be set, and the second effect mode is set as a special effect mode of the first effect.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; (b) is the third symbol in the first embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with a display apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production|presentation performed corresponding to each special design fluctuation|variation in 1st Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow which duplicate button production|presentation is performed as button production|presentation performed corresponding to each special design variation in 1st Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production|presentation period in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when button effect A is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when the button production|presentation A succeeds on the display screen of a 3rd design display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when the button production|presentation A fails on the display screen of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a button effect B is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when button production|presentation B is complete|finished on the display screen of a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the button production|presentation C which is a duplication button production|presentation is complete|finished on the display screen of the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the first embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number table set in a ROM of . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table set in the ROM, (c) shows the contents of the special figure 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table set in a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variable / time saving table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in the first embodiment FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latency determination table set in a ROM of . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a button effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a button effect hierarchy storage area set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-games update process performed by MPU in a control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing a first prefetching process executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the number of pending pitches processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a status command receiving process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing execution timing setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 button production setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing button effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing button effect start processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing button effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second frame button setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing button press processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suspension production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suspension production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the normal 8 pending effect start screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation result of the normal 8 reservation|holding production|presentation performed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a super hold effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is started, and (b) is a third symbol display in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a super pending effect displayed on the device ends; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pending effect selection table configured in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a production hierarchy storage area configured in the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the set first effect hierarchy storage area 223 in a schematic diagram. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between each hierarchical storage area and set effect information; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding pitch number process 2 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special holding effect processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the related production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing button pressing process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation level selection process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example when it wins by battle production|presentation. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case of defeat in the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a rematch in the battle effect displayed in . (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat, and (b) is the third symbol in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example when the battle production|presentation displayed with a display apparatus is complete|finished and a time saving state is alerted|reported. It is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st jackpot random number 2 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in the third embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of, (c) is a special figure 2 jackpot type set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. 13 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the battle production|presentation update process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st modification. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in the first modification, (b) is an example of the variation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first modification It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the variation effect displayed by the third pattern display device in the first modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of a ball-entering unit. (a), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the multi-reach effect|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a 3rd modification. (a), (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound ramp control apparatus in the 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit completion|finish processing 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing battle presentation update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modified example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frequency|count correction|amendment production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing 4 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a correction number corresponding process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modified example; FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation / time reduction set to ROM of the main control unit in the 4th modification.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 91. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the many ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9).

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Further, the lower tray unit 50 is provided with a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operating means that can be operated by the player. The first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22 when both frame buttons are shown) are displayed, for example, on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect to be performed or changing the content of the super ready-to-win effect. In this embodiment, the effects (button effects) are set such that the frequency of operation of the first frame button 22a is higher than that of the second frame button 22b. The first frame button 22a, which is operated more frequently, is arranged on the left side of the second frame button 22b in the front view of FIG. As a result, in the button effect executed while the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the first frame button 22a, which is likely to be operated, can be easily operated with the left hand, so that the button effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation (shooting game) of the operation handle 51 every time the game is performed, thereby preventing the operation of the game from being lowered.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is likely to be the operation target in the button effect executed when a result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big win) is announced. It is configured to be As a result, only the button performance with the second frame button 22b as the operation object is executed, that is, the player is expected to win a big prize even before the second frame button 22b is operated. be able to.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the second frame button 22b is arranged substantially at the center of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a button effect with the second frame button 22b as the operation target is executed, the player can be encouraged to operate the second frame button 22b (for example, press down with both hands). can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first frame button 22a, which is operated more frequently, is smaller than the second frame button 22b. The two-frame button 22b is formed in a cylindrical shape with a radius of 6 centimeters. This makes it possible to make the second frame button 22b, which is operated infrequently (a privilege is likely to be given to the player when operated), stand out.

In this embodiment, the size of the frame button 22 is changed so that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a. It is sufficient that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a at the timing when the frame button 22b is operated. When the button effect is executed, the second frame button 22b may be configured to project upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 1). In this case, the first frame button 22a may be configured to stand out more than the second frame button 22b when the button effect is not being executed. As a result, when the button effect is executed, the effect that the second frame button 22b suddenly appears can be executed, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball opening 63, ball entry unit 64 (first ball entry 64b1, left second ball entry 64b2), second ball entry 640, variable prize winning device 65, normal pattern starting opening (through gate) 67, variable display device It is configured by assembling the unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General ball entrance 63, ball entrance unit 64 (first ball entrance 64b1, left second ball entrance 64b2), second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, and variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with first pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the ball has entered (won) the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether the ball (winner) has been won. Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64b1, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the left second ball entrance 64b2, or When the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is activated. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, and displays the first symbol. The device 37b serves as display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the game states of the pachinko machine 10 (probability variable state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.), or indicate whether the first symbol is changed. It is indicated by the lighting state whether it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a big win that is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous. Whether a pattern corresponding to a big hit or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and the combinations of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is triggered when a ball enters (wins a prize) in the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A jackpot game that can be acquired by is executed. During this jackpot game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult to enter the ball), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period until the next round game starts (for example , 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the ball is released in accordance with the timing when each prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make preparations for firing in an arbitrary direction, it is possible to smoothly perform a big winning game. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a big win in the big win lottery, the kind of the big win is also determined. Details will be described later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is granted. 16R probability variable jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, a probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is given 4R probability variable jackpot, jackpot game round A 4R time-saving jackpot is prepared in which the number is 4 rounds and a time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is provided after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous privilege for the player (the number of prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game is the largest, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous to the player. ) is provided, followed by the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 4R short-time jackpot, in order of decreasing advantage. In this way, even when a jackpot is won in the special lottery, the degree of advantage of the privilege granted to the player can be varied according to the type of the set jackpot. Not only the presence or absence of winning the big win, but also the type of the big win set when winning the big win can be made interesting.

In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is configured to determine two types of lottery results, that is, the jackpot lottery and the loser. In a part of the cases where it is determined to be out, it is possible to determine a small win with fewer benefits given to the player than the above-described big win (for example, a privilege to open the variable prize winning device 65 for only one round). good. As a result, it is possible to diversify the amount of privilege given to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not a pachinko machine capable of judging a small win) is displayed as a stop symbol after the fluctuation. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

In this embodiment, as the game state, it is configured to be set to any of the "normal state", the "time saving state", and the "probability variable state" (see FIG. 16). The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/250) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbols: low probability state, Normal pattern: called low probability state), and in the time saving state, the special pattern jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/250), and the normal pattern hit probability is set to a high probability (232/233). It is a game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), and the probability variable state is set to a high probability (1/50) of the special symbol jackpot probability, and the normal symbol hit probability is a game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) set to high probability (232/233).

Here, the special symbol high probability state is, as described above, a state in which the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is higher than the low probability state, and in this embodiment, the special symbol high probability state is set. Then, the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery are defined to be the same high probability value (1/50). In addition, without being limited to this, for example, only the special figure 1 lottery jackpot probability is set to a high probability value, or only the special figure 2 lottery jackpot probability is set to a high probability value. , The high probability value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set may be defined differently between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, the normal design high probability state is a state in which the normal design hit probability is higher than the low probability state. When a win is won in a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery), the electric accessary 640a is opened as a winning game, and a ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of special 1 (first special pattern), and if you win a jackpot in the lottery of special 2 (second special pattern) The setting ratio of the jackpot type is set to be different between the case and the case, and if the jackpot is won in the special 2 lottery rather than the special 1 lottery, the player will be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The type (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot) is configured to be easily set. By configuring in this way, the special figure 2 lottery is executed more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery, and the game state ( A player can be made to play while expecting that a time-saving state, a variable probability state) will be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the high probability state of the normal pattern (high probability of normal pattern), during the low probability medium state of the normal pattern , a first mode that makes the probability of winning a normal symbol high, a second mode that increases the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one winning game, and a short variation time of the second symbol Although it is configured to execute the third mode in which the variable time is easily set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol rather than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is only necessary to be configured so as to be in a state in which it is easy to do so, and it is only necessary to set at least one mode among the three modes described above. Further, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol, among the above three modes Either of the modes may be configured so that the ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. A game area is formed on the surface of the game board 13 so that the shot ball can flow down, and the game area is defined by the variable display unit 80 . Specifically, it is divided into a left game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and is fired at a predetermined first firing intensity. A ball flows down the left playing area, and a ball shot with a second firing strength that is higher than the first firing strength flows down the right playing area. In addition, hereinafter, a game in which the operation handle 51 is operated so that the shot ball flows down the left game area is called a left-handed game (normal game), and the operation handle makes the shot ball flow down the right game area. A game in which 51 is operated will be referred to as a right-handed game and will be described.

The left game area is provided with a general ball entrance 63 through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the second left ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). To the third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs the variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) only for a certain period of time.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the right game area, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part (approximately 50%) of the balls flowing down the right area can pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of 4 times in total, and the number of reserved balls (normal pattern reserved number) is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). be. Four second symbol reservation lamps are provided for the maximum number of reservations.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right game area) of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side (left game area) of the variable display device unit 80. good. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, below the variable display device unit 80, a lower game area is formed in which the left game area and the right game area communicate with each other. A possible ball entry unit 64 is provided. The detailed configuration of the ball entry unit 64 will be described later, but inside the ball entry unit 64 are a first ball entry port 64b1, a left second ball entry port 64b2, and an opening through which a ball can be entered. Distributing means for alternately distributing the thrown balls to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 is provided.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when the ball enters the second left ball entrance 64b2, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, a lottery (special figure 2 lottery) for a big win is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering unit 64 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the lower game area, but a left-handed game is performed, and the ball flowing down the left game area performs a right-handed game, and a right-handed game is performed. It is configured so that it is easier for a ball to enter the opening of the ball entry unit 64 than a ball that has flowed down the game area. Specifically, the path from the left game area through the lower game area to the ball entry unit 64 by the game nail (ball guide member) implanted in the game board 13 is the path from the right game area through the lower game area. It is constructed so that the ball can flow down more easily than the path facing the incoming ball unit 64.例文帳に追加

Therefore, during the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the left-handed game is the proper game method. By stipulating an appropriate game method in this way, when it is determined that a right-handed game has been played in the normal state (the area (for example, the through gate 67) through which only the ball flowing down the right side area can pass) When it is determined that the ball has passed, the player can be notified that a game different from the proper game method is being played.

Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the right game area will be described. The above-described through gate 67 is arranged in the right game area, and a second ball entrance 640 and an electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are arranged on the downstream side thereof. . Since the right game area is an area where the ball launched by the left-handed game and flowing down the left-handed game area cannot flow down, the ball will not reach the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 640 due to the left-handed game. . As a result, the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the right game area or the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state even though the left-handed game, which is a proper game method, is being performed. It is possible to suppress the situation of entering the ball. Therefore, it is erroneously determined that an inappropriate game method (a game method in which a right-handed game is played in a normal state) is being played against a player who is playing a game with a proper game method, and the game method is changed. It is possible to solve the problem that the notification for making the game is executed and the willingness to play is lowered.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640 (part of the lower game area). This variable winning device 65 is opened during a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special lottery, and the number of balls paid out when one ball wins (number of prize balls). is configured to be 15.

Here, in this embodiment, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 than the left-handed game. In addition to the state), it is configured to execute the right-handed game even during the jackpot game. Thus, when the game during the game state advantageous to the player and the jackpot game are alternately executed, the same game method (right-handed game) may be continued, and the game method is presented to the player. It is possible to eliminate the need for complicated changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return destination addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, and when the player operates the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the third The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the player operates the first frame button 22a or the second frame button 22b, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a not-shown performance character object, or the first frame button 22b is operated. A sound output command for outputting a sound corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp is displayed in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22. It may be configured to set a lamp output command for causing the device 227 to emit light.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7(a). FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is Each pattern consists of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "0" to "9" is added.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each piece of identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed, respectively, upper, middle and lower. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display.

More specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are arranged so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. In the lower pattern row L3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed vertically and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed obliquely. In a state in which the symbol rows L1 to L3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols are stopped in a combination of the jackpot symbols (the same combination of the main symbols in the first embodiment) on the activated line. , a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), in the first embodiment, each activated line (V1 to V5) is formed to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be changed at the same time. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2, (See FIG. 9(a)) shows a situation in which the special symbols are fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 10), the lottery result of the special symbols is shown. However, without being limited to this, for example, using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, a display mode in which a figure is deformed, or a color can be changed It may be configured to indicate the lottery result of the special symbols by indicating that the special symbols are fluctuating depending on the display mode to be displayed, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbols and colors.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being selected (during variation). Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display areas (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed are displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area can be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. can be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(a) to be described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a display mode using numbers. Although it is configured to display, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow identification of the number of retained balls in the acquisition diagram.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. This small display area Dm3 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 5(b)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area Dm3), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the time saving state, during the variable probability state, and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of ``left hitting'' is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hitting game ends. there is Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of "left-handed" is detected. It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5B, the description is continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed to the left of the fourth pattern display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which a reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved information for indicating the number of memories) is displayed, and the special figure 2 reserved information for indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Although detailed description is omitted, the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a display the result (prefetch result) of preliminarily discriminating the winning information stored in reserve in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol. It is constructed so as to display a display mode in which a suggestion can be notified to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol, and to vary the corresponding reserved display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of individual reserved memories, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set a result display that easily displays the variable reserved symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a reserved ball, the third symbols are stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, the fixed display is performed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. continue until Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Although the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 A situation in which there is no entry is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. This is due to the fact that no games have been played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new ball enters any one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. , the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new incoming ball is executed.

<Regarding production content in the first embodiment>
6 to 12, description will be given of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured with a game specification (so-called simultaneous variation machine) in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 execute the special figure lottery in parallel. The incoming ball unit 64 is so that the ball enters alternately into the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the lottery of the special figure 1 and the second left ball entrance 640 that triggers the lottery of the special figure 2. is configured to In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the third symbol display device 81 provides a variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the third symbol for indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery. If the variable display performance of the symbols is executed at the same time, there is a problem that the variable display of a plurality of third symbols is mixed and the lottery result of each special symbol becomes difficult to understand. Furthermore, since it is necessary to divide the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited area, and execute the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol There is a problem that the display area of the display becomes small, and a variable display that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, if the variation display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the variation display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery are executed at the same time, for example, each variation display A performance (button performance) in which a player operates a frame button 22 (a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b) can be executed in the performance, and a variation of the third pattern indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Execution timing of button production (special figure 1 button production) executed as display production and execution of button production (special figure 2 button production) executed as fluctuation display production of the 3rd pattern showing the result of special figure 2 lottery When the timing and the overlap, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp which button performance the frame button 22 is operated for, and the performance which is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, in the simultaneous variation machine in which the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed independently (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 button effect and the special figure 2 button effect are performed in duplicate. If you try to limit it so that it will not be done, since the fluctuation start timing of each special figure is indeterminate, a period (prohibited period) that can not set (execute) the button production more than necessary is set. was difficult to execute.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the third symbol showing the lottery result of one special figure ((special figure 1) main fluctuation pattern) among the plurality of special figures on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to perform variable display (main variable display). As a result, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the main variation symbol can be variably displayed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a variable display performance that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the other special figure ((special figure 2) sub-fluctuation symbol) that is not variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the third symbol display It is configured to switch the target of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display screen of the device 81 . As a result, despite the fact that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner), the big hit game (special figure 2 lottery) is suddenly executed based on the fact that the jackpot was won. It is possible to suppress the execution of a jackpot game).

In addition, while the button effect is being executed in the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 1, if the button effect is executed as the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 2 jackpot winning, each special It is configured to execute a special button effect in which the button effects executed for the figure are combined. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of button effects are overlapped and individually executed to provide a player with a difficult-to-understand effect. In addition, by executing the special button effect, the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 can be switched to the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the sub-variation pattern that is not variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the target of the third symbol is switched from the main variation pattern to the sub-variation pattern. However, without being limited to this, part of the deviation fluctuation set when the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation pattern is out (for example, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time selected when winning the jackpot) is set), it is preferable to perform the process of switching the target of the third symbol from the main variation symbol to the sub-variation symbol. As a result, when an effect (for example, a special button effect) is executed to switch the target of the third pattern from the main variation pattern to the sub-variation pattern, the third pattern display device 81 is expected to win the jackpot. It is possible to make the user interested in the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the display until the end.

Here, with reference to FIG.6 and FIG.7, each special figure fluctuation|variation in this embodiment and the content of the production|presentation performed are demonstrated. In FIG. 6, the button production (button production A) as the variable display production of the special figure 1 (main fluctuation pattern) and the button production (button production B) as the fluctuation display production of the special figure 2 (secondary fluctuation pattern) are different. It is a timing chart showing the flow of production when it is executed at the timing, FIG. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when button effects (button effects B) and button effects (button effects B) are executed at overlapping timings as variable display effects of symbol).

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 8, a specific flow of button effects will be described. FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of button effects. As shown in FIG. 8, during an effect period (button effect period) during which a button effect is executed for the player to operate the operation means, the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) becomes valid for the player. an execution period t2 during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means) is determined to be effective (the player can operate the frame button 22); and a frame button 22 during the execution period. and a result notification period t3 during which an effect based on the operation result to is executed. Further, an operation period t4 is set in which, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the execution period, it is notified that the frame button 22 has been operated.

During the preparation period t1, a display mode for explaining the content of the effect displayed during the execution period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Specifically, for example, when the effect shown in FIG. 9A is executed during the execution period, the comment "The effect to wake up the sleeping rabbit will start" is displayed and the operation is performed. A button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a is displayed without displaying a validity period gauge 812a indicating the validity period. As a result, the player is notified of the details of the effect to be executed later, and the player is previously notified that the effect to be executed later is a button effect for operating the first frame button 22a.

By providing the preparation period t1, the player can prepare for operating the frame button 22 (operation means), and the frame button 22 (operation means) can be smoothly operated during the execution period t2. be able to.

During the execution period t2, an effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22 (operation means) (see FIG. 9A). Here, with reference to FIG. 9(a), the content of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect will be described. FIG. 9(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the execution period t2 of the button effect (button effect A) is set, a character 811 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm in a sleeping display mode, and the secondary display is performed. In the area Ds, a comment "Wake me up" is displayed for explaining the effect content (game content) of the current button effect. Then, a button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a to be operated for the current button effect and a validity period gauge 812a indicating the operation validity period t5 of the first frame button 22a are displayed.

This validity period gauge 812a indicates the overall length of the operation validity period t5 to be set by the length of the outer frame (rectangle), and the remaining period form (Fig. 9(a)) is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining period mode decreases from right to left. As a result, the display area in which the remaining period mode is not displayed (the mode shown as blank in FIG. 9A) of the valid period gauge 812a becomes the elapsed period mode for indicating the elapsed period of the operation valid period t5. can be

In this way, by displaying the length of the remaining period of the valid operation period t5 relative to the overall length of the valid operation period t5, the remaining period of the valid operation period t5 is specifically indicated in time. Even if it is not, the player can be made to grasp it. Also, even when a different operation effective period t5 is set, the length of the outer frame (rectangle) of the effective period gauge 812a is fixed, and the speed at which the remaining period mode is variably displayed can be changed. It is possible to inform the player of the operation valid period t5 in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the above-described effective period gauge 812a is used to inform the player of the operation effective period t5 in the button effect. The length of the valid period t5 and the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 may be notified by a specific numerical value (for example, number of seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is formed linearly is shown, but the valid period gauge 812a is not limited to this, and the valid period gauge 812a is formed in a circular shape, and the remaining period mode is the valid period gauge 812a. may be variably displayed in a clockwise direction, and may be configured to indicate that the operation valid period t5 ends when the valid period gauge 812a completes one cycle of the remaining period mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it relatively easy for the player to comprehend the remaining period with respect to the set operation effective period t5, and to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the starting position where the remaining period is variably displayed (for example, the position indicating 12 o'clock of the valid period gauge 812a formed in a circle) and the end position where the remaining period is variably displayed (for example, formed in a circle) position indicating 12 o'clock of the active period gauge 812a) can be made the same. By providing, it is possible to set an unexpected effect for the player.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description continues. When the player operates the first frame button 22a to be operated this time during the execution period t2 during which the effect illustrated in FIG. 9A is executed, it indicates that the first frame button 22a has been pressed. An operation period t4 is set in which an effect for the purpose is executed. During this operation period t4, the display mode of the button 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device is the post-press display mode (the thickness of the button 812 is thinner than the display mode shown in FIG. 9A). display mode).

In this way, by setting the operation period t4 and displaying the display mode after pressing, the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated for the current button effect is operated by the player. It is possible to reliably notify that the button has been (depressed). In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the player that the operation means to be operated has been operated, a configuration other than the above-described display mode after pressing may be used. For example, a voice output device may be used. 226 may output a press sound indicating that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated (depressed), or the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided with a light emitting means, which emits light. It may be configured such that whether or not the operation has been completed can be determined by the light emission mode (light emission color) of the means.

In addition to the above configuration, when an operation means (second frame button 22b) different from the operation means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the current button effect is operated during the execution period, It may be configured so as to execute an alert notification to indicate that the operated operation means is not an operation target. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of operating means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand guide to the correct operation when the player has operated the wrong operating means.

When the execution period t2 of the button effect period ends, a result notification period t3 is set in which the effect based on the operation result during the execution period is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 9(b) and FIG. 10, the content of the effect executed during the result notification period t3 will be described. FIG. 9(b) shows, as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3, an operation condition during the execution period t2 (for example, pressing the first frame button 22a twice during the execution period t2). ) is established. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the effect displayed during the notification period t3 of the result of the button effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first frame button 22a is pressed twice during a period t2 is not established.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2, the character 811 that was sleeping during the execution period t2 wakes up, and the comment "SP reach" suggesting the effect mode to be executed later is displayed. Is displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "success" indicating that the operation of the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was proper is displayed.

On the other hand, if the operation condition is not satisfied during the execution period t2, for example, if the player does not operate the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2, as shown in FIG. A character 811 is displayed, and no comment suggesting a mode of presentation to be executed later is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "sorry" indicating that the operation of the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was not appropriate is displayed.

In this way, by varying the display mode during the result notification period t3 based on the operation to the operation means during the execution period t2 of the button effect, it is possible to determine whether the operation during the current button effect was appropriate (success (whether or not the game has been played) can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect mode executed after the button effect period has elapsed (for example, the effect mode displayed during the ready-to-win period) is variable according to the effect result of the button effect. It is configured to allow Specifically, when the effect result of the button effect is "successful", it is easier to set an effect mode with a lower execution frequency than when it is "sorry". As a result, the player can actively participate in the button performance while expecting that the performance of the performance mode with a low execution frequency will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. When the execution period t2 during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means) is determined to be effective (the player can operate the frame button 22) is set in the button presentation period, the execution period t2 is set. Although an operation effective period t5 is set (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 8), when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) during the execution period t2 and the operation condition is satisfied, the operation effective period is set at that point. t5 ends (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 8). Then, during the difference period between the execution period t2 and the operation effective period t5, an operation condition satisfaction mode (for example, a comment of "operation completed") is displayed as a display mode indicating that the operation condition is satisfied.

Since the period during which the operation condition establishment mode is displayed varies depending on the timing at which the operation condition is established, for example, the operation condition establishment mode may be configured to be variably set according to the length of the display period. Also, if the display period of the operation condition fulfillment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), the display congratulates the player for quickly performing the operation, such as "operation completed, excellent". If the mode is set and it is shorter than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), the display mode is set to indicate that the player did not perform the operation quickly, such as "The operation is almost completed." In addition, only when the display period of the operation condition establishment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), information that is advantageous to the player (for example, the result of the special drawing lottery being executed , information suggesting the currently set game state, and special images that are difficult for the player to experience). As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means so that the operation condition is satisfied as soon as possible.

Further, according to the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2 (the timing at which the operation effective period t5 ends), the effect mode to be executed later (for example, the effect of the result notification effect to be executed during the result notification period t3) It may be configured such that the mode and the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect executed during the subsequent ready-to-win effect are variable.

In this embodiment, even if the operation condition is met, the result notification period t3 is not set until the predetermined execution period t2 ends (elapses). However, it is also possible to terminate the operation effective period t5 and the execution period t2 at the timing when the operation condition is established, and immediately set the result notification period t3. As a result, the button presentation can be executed quickly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 8, each period (preparation period t1, execution period t2, result notification period) set in advance as the button effect period when the transition condition is established based on the passage of time t3) is configured to transition, but a transition condition other than the passage of time may be set. It may be configured to shift to the result notification period t3 before the length of the execution period t2 elapses. As a result, it is possible to set the result notification period t3 corresponding to the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) performed by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause discomfort.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to advance only the start timing of the result notification period t3 and set the end timing to the predetermined timing. Thus, when the operation condition is quickly established during the execution period t2, the period during which the display mode of t3 is displayed during the result notification period (the period during which the result notification effect is executed) can be lengthened. Therefore, the effect result of the current button effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the end timing of the button effect period is not variable, there is no need to change the effect mode (effect period) of the effect (reach effect) executed after the button effect period ends, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to this, when the length of the execution period t2 in the button effect period is configured to be variable according to the operation content of the operation means, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button effect period) may be configured to be different from the predetermined end timing. In this case, for example, if the length of the execution period t2 is shortened, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button presentation period) will come earlier than the predetermined end timing. should be configured to By configuring in this way, the effect period after the end of the button effect period can be set long, so that it is possible to execute an effect different from usual, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the flow of execution of the button effect explained with reference to FIG. 8 will be explained. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation and the button effect (button effect B) set as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation are executed at different timings. It shows the flow when In this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly the third symbol display device It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of 81, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a jackpot, or a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a variation of 60 seconds A variation pattern in which time is set) is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a part of the case where the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the special figure 2 variation in which the lottery result is out is executed in a state where the button effect A is set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, the button effect A (with the operation target The first frame button 22a) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the button production B (the operation button to be operated is When the first frame button 22a) is set, the button effect B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect contents of the button effect B set as the variation effect of the second variation of the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when button effect B is executed, and FIG. 11(b) shows display contents displayed when button effect B ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. This button effect B, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, is a button effect that can be set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the button effect B is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 813 imitating a turtle appear in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A competition effect is displayed, and a button 812 modeled after the operating means (first frame button 22a) to be operated for the current button effect (button effect B) and an effective period gauge 812a are displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "Push the button repeatedly and aim for the GOAL" is displayed to indicate the effect content of the button effect B.例文帳に追加In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the display mode of the button 812, the current button effect (button effect B) is a continuous hit effect that requires the first frame button 22a to be operated (depressed) many times. It is displayed in a continuous hit effect mode (represented by three arrows in FIG. 11(a)).

In this way, by displaying the display mode (button 812) indicating the operating means to be operated and the operation contents during the button presentation, the player is notified of the game characteristics of the button presentation in a visually easy-to-understand manner. can be done. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, during the operation valid period of the button effect B (while the remaining period display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is being displayed), according to the operation mode of the first frame button 22a, the character 811 The display mode and the display mode of the button 812 are configured to be variable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to vary the presentation mode (display mode) of the button presentation being executed for each operation executed during the operation valid period, and to provide the player with an operational feeling. can be done.

Then, when the operation valid period of the button effect B has passed, the result of the competition effect between the character 811 and the character 813 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11(b). In the example shown in FIG. 11(b), the effect result in which the character 811 passed the goal 814 first is displayed. Then, at the goal 814, the comment "Gekiatsu" is displayed as a display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special lottery (special lottery 2) targeted for the button production B will be a big hit, and will be executed in the future. An effect is displayed in which the character 811 wins the prize with the comment "SP Reach" for suggesting the content of the effect to be given. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "GOAL" are displayed to indicate that the button effect B has ended.

Here, the relationship between each period set in the button effect period described with reference to FIG. 8 and the effect mode of the button effect B will be described. An effect in which 811 and character 813 are standing by at the start position is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a comment "Aim for GOAL" indicating the content of the button effect B is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (Fig. not shown). During this preparation period t1, the effective period of operation t5 is not set, so the effective period gauge 812a is not displayed. A button 812 is displayed in the display mode shown.

During the execution period t2, the effect shown in FIG. 11A is displayed, and during the operation period t4 set when the operation means (first frame button 22a) is operated, the first frame button 22a is displayed. An effect for changing the display mode of the character 811 and the display mode of the button 812 is displayed according to the operation mode. Finally, the effect shown in FIG. 11(b) is displayed during the result notification period t3.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. In FIG. 6 described above, the button effect A, which is a variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the button effect B, which is a variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2, are executed at different timings. While the flow of the case is explained, in FIG. 7, the button production A that is a variable production for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the button production that is a variable production for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 B and B are executed at overlapping timings.

As shown in FIG. 7, while the button production A is being executed as a variation performance of the first variation (off) of the special figure 1 variation, the second variation of the special figure 2 variation (off) is performed, When the button performance B is set as the variable performance of the second variation (disappearance) of the special figure 2 variation, the performance mode of the button performance A being executed is a duplicate performance in accordance with the start timing of the button performance B. It is executed by switching to the presentation mode of the button presentation C. Then, when the overlapping period of the button performance A and the button performance B elapses, the button performance B is executed.

In this embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). Therefore, the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are executed at the same time (in parallel). And, since the variation time of the special figure 1 variation and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation are set independently, the start timing of the special figure 1 variation and the start timing of the special figure 2 variation are related never have Therefore, the effect period of the variation effect (button effect) of the special figure 1 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation of the special figure 2 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It may overlap with the effect period of the display (button effect).

In this way, if a plurality of button effects are set so that the execution periods overlap, the player cannot determine which button effect the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22a) executed by the player corresponds to. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, in order to solve such a problem, if the button effect being executed is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed, the operation means can be positively controlled for the button effect being executed. There is a problem that the player who is operating the machine feels dissatisfied and loses his or her desire to play.

In addition, if the button effect is configured so that other button effects are not executed during execution of the button effect, for example, the button effect being executed is a button effect with a low expectation of a big win (low effect of effect), and the button effect is executed. Even if a button effect with a high expectation of a big win (high effect) is set during execution, the button effect with a high expectation of a big win (high effect) is not executed, and the effect is reduced. was there.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when button effect B is set so as to overlap with button effect A during execution of button effect A, the button which is the overlapping button effect It is configured to execute the performance C, and is configured to execute the button performance without making the player feel uncomfortable even if a plurality of button performances are set redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the button effect C, which is the overlapping button effect, will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the button effect C is executed, and FIG. 12(b) shows the display contents displayed when the button effect C ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, this button effect C is an overlapping (fusion) effect that is executed when the execution condition of the button effect B is satisfied while the button effect A is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the button effect C is set, an effect is displayed in the main display area Dm in which a character 811 resembling a rabbit is training, and the character 811 becomes an obstacle resembling a rock. A production that jumps over the correspondence is executed. In the secondary display area Ds, a comment indicating the content of the present button effect (button effect C) is also displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm, in order to indicate that the current operation target is the second frame button 22b, a button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b and the current button effect (button effect C) are displayed. A validity period gauge 818a indicating the validity period t5 and the remaining period of the operation validity period is displayed.

Here, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81b is closer than the button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a (see FIG. 11A). It is displayed in a large display mode. In this way, by varying the display mode displayed on the display screen for each operation means to be operated, it is possible to inform the player of what is the current operation target in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the button effect C ends, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the training is successful, as shown in FIG. 12(b), indicating that the button effect B is set after the button effect C. A comment "Successful in training, determined to participate in race" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Although illustration is omitted, the display mode of the end screen of the button effect C is configured to vary according to the operation content of the second frame button 22b during the effective period of operation of the button effect C. For example, Whether or not to display a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2) targeted for the button presentation C is determined according to the operation contents during the button presentation C.例文帳に追加As a result, the player who wants to grasp the result of the special drawing lottery as soon as possible can be motivated to participate in the button presentation.

As described above, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12, the button effects (button effects A to button effects C) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment have been described. As the effect mode of (button effect C), an intermediate effect mode between the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A) to be executed first and the effect mode of the button effect (button effect B) to be executed later is set. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the button effect A, an effect mode in which the character 811 is raised is set (see FIG. 9A), and in the button effect B, an effect mode in which the character 811 rails is set (see FIG. 11A). )reference). Then, in the button effect C, as an intermediate mode, an effect mode is set in which the character 811 who wakes up trains for the race (see FIG. 12(a)).

In this way, by setting the intermediate mode as the mode of performance of the overlapping button performances set when a plurality of button performances overlap, the performance mode of the button performance A can be changed to the button performance B without making the player feel uncomfortable. It can be shifted to, and the production effect can be enhanced. Note that in the flow of effects shown in FIG. 7, the remaining period of button effect B after the overlapping period of button effect A and button effect B has elapsed is the first period during which the effect mode of button effect B can be executed (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the button effect B is executed again after the button effect C is executed. When the remaining period of the button effect B after the elapse is less than the first period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed, the button effect B is not executed, and the button effect B is performed. It is preferable that the button effect C is executed during the set button effect period, and a mode suggesting the effect to be executed later is displayed as the effect result of the button effect C. - 特許庁

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the button performance B is executed only in the remaining period that is difficult for the player to identify, and that the player does not understand the performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation target (second frame button 22b) of button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is replaced with the operation target (first frame button 22b) of button effect A and button effect B, which are executed as independent button effects. 22a). As a result, the special feeling of the button presentation C can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button effect A is set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, and the button effect B is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 Set the 1st button effect as the variable effect of , set the 2nd button effect as the variable effect of the special figure 2, and set the button effect to be executed first between the 1st button effect and the 2nd button effect as the effect mode The button effect A may be set, and the button effect B may be set as the effect mode of the button effect to be executed later. By configuring in this way, even if the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed earlier than the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a plurality of Since the presentation mode of the button presentation can be set in chronological order, the presentation can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, when the button effects A and B are set in duplicate, the button effect C is set as the overlapping button effect. As an effect mode of the button effect, it is preferable that the effect mode in which the button effect A is shifted to the button effect C can be set. As a result, when the effect corresponding to the button effect C is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the current effect is a duplicate button effect, so the button effect B is executed after the button effect C. The player can play the game while anticipating that.

In addition, a button performance A is set as a variable performance of the special figure 1 variation, a button performance B is set as a variation performance of the special figure 2 variation, and a button performance C is set in the overlapping period of the button performance A and the button performance B. In the machine 10, if the timing to switch the effect mode of the button effect (the timing to shift from the button effect A to the button effect C, the timing to shift from the button effect C to the button effect B) is different from the timing to stop the special figure fluctuation It is better to set it so that

Specifically, the operation effective period of the button effect C and the operation effective period of the button effect B (see FIG. 7) are set so as to straddle the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is the target of the button effect A. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the special figure variation to be the target of the button performance is switched during the series of button performances executed in the order of button performances A, C and B. It is possible to execute a button effect without a sense of incongruity as if a predetermined button effect was executed for one special figure variation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the display in the .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the stop type of removal in special symbols, and 1st per random number counter C1 used for initial value setting 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and four reserved areas (reserved 1st to 4th areas), and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided. In the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1. Each value of CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as with the above-described special symbols, normal symbol holding corresponding to entering the ball (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. stored respectively.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each counter value (each counter value related to the special figure 2 lottery) obtained based on the ball entering the second left ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 is reserved and stored. , and each counter value acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is retained and stored. On the other hand, the function (reserved storage function) for storing the acquired counter values may not be provided.

By constructing in this manner, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player are switched as a lottery for one special pattern type according to a set game state, an advantageous lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 499, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 499. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). .

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, a judgment value for judging a big hit is defined in common for the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined corresponding to the state (low-probability state, high-probability state). As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the special symbol low probability state (normal state) is set, "0, 1" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, loss).

In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state, latent probability state) is set, "0 to 9" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, A value other than the jackpot (that is, out) is defined as a judgment value. That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined to win the jackpot with a probability of 2/500 (1/250), and the high probability state of the special symbol is specified. If set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 10/500 (1/50). Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state in which it is easier to win the jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of the symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. Also, in the present embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, ie, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but one type or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery result is determined to be either a big win or a loss, but the lottery result is not a big win (is a loss) without being limited to this. In some cases, it may be possible to win a small win with fewer benefits (for example, the number of prize balls that can be given during a winning game) than a big win. In this case, for example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 may also be referred to when determining whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol wins a small winning. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified in the small hit random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a small hit, it is determined as a small hit of a special symbol.

Furthermore, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning a big win and the value of the first random number counter C1 for winning a small win are set to be different, and one process (whether or not a win In the process of determining), it is configured to continuously (simultaneously) execute the judgment of whether the big hit is correct and the judgment of whether the small hit is correct.

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in a game machine in which a small prize is provided as a lottery result of special symbols, the probability of winning a small prize is defined differently between the lottery for the winning first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. can be As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries.

Also, as described above, the table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referenced when executing the big winning lottery and the table (small winning random number table) that is referenced when executing the small winning lottery are separated. Alternatively, one table (for example, the first winning random number table 202a) may be used to execute the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 and the type of the special symbol are determined in advance according to the predetermined determination value. However, without being limited to this, for example, the determination of the jackpot winning may be executed using a different determination value according to the set gaming state, or until a predetermined condition is established The value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is defined as the winning of the jackpot, may be varied according to the number of times of winning the jackpot within a specific period. A data table that does not define a judgment value corresponding to a big win may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in the big win lottery.

Further, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, And, based on both special symbol lotteries, control is performed so that the jackpot game is not executed at the same time (in parallel). Specifically, when the special symbols overlap and perform the jackpot variation, one jackpot winning in which the special symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the jackpot is first validated, and the other jackpot winning is validated. are configured to be discarded (deleted).

In addition, the configuration for preventing the execution of the jackpot game redundantly based on the lottery result of each special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. During the period until the big win game corresponding to the winning of the big win is executed, the judgment value corresponding to the big win is not specified so as not to win the big win in the lottery of the other special pattern, and the small win is dealt with. A special symbol lottery may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that defines only the determination value.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, or the left second ball entrance 64b2, And it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 .

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. As described above, this jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, using the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a special pattern 1 table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a second special pattern (special pattern 2 ) includes at least a special figure 2 table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery.

First, referring to FIG. 16(b), it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 table 202d1 is a table referred to in the lottery for the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16(b), this special figure 1 table 202d1 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "jackpot A" is defined. A "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "20 to 79", and a "jackpot C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Here, the release operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the opening operation (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the operation content ( (timing, number of times) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as an opening operation scenario defined in chronological order.

Then, when the jackpot is won, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out and stored in a running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 . When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). , In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

In this manner, by using an opening action scenario that defines the action contents of the movable member in time series during the jackpot game in which the movable member is moved, the action control of the movable member can be centrally managed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which one movable member (variable winning device 65) is opened as a jackpot game is used. (Variable winning device 65, second variable winning device) may be configured to perform an opening operation. In this case, as described above, by setting the opening operation scenario and centrally managing the operation control for each movable member, for example, compared to the case where the operation control is performed separately for each movable member In addition, when a malfunction occurs in one movable member, it is possible to smoothly execute the operation processing for the other movable members.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times round games are executed) is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened. This round game is a game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is continuously opened until 10 balls win or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds.

Also, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state of normal symbols is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and a high probability state of special symbols is set ( The probability variation counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot A" is executed, the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won before the variation is executed 70 times.

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four, and a jackpot game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened is executed. When the jackpot game based on the "jackpot B" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set (probability variable counter 203g set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot B" is executed, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won before the variation is executed 70 times. In addition, "jackpot B" has the same game state as "jackpot A", but the number of rounds (number of rounds played) is small, so when compared to "jackpot A", the player is It becomes a big hit game that is disadvantageous.

"Jack C" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4, and the jackpot game of the round game 1 in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed. It is a jackpot type. When a jackpot game based on "jackpot C" is executed, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and a low probability state of special symbols is set (probability variable counter 203g is set to 0). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot C" is executed, the time saving state (low high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special It is set until the jackpot is won before symbol variation is executed 70 times. Therefore, when compared with "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of which jackpot type is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. However, without being limited to this, a plurality of variable prize winning devices may be provided, and a variable prize winning device determined for each jackpot type may be configured to open for the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot, since it is configured to set the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, to the player, the jackpot It is possible not only to make the player play the game expecting to win the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of jackpot set when the player wins the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number of types is not limited to three. In addition, even if the value of the first win type counter C2 is the same, different jackpot types may be selected according to the game state at the time of winning. By configuring in this way, for example, when the game state at the time of winning is a variable probability state and a big hit, by setting a jackpot type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the winning in the variable probability state can be improved. people can expect. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first type corresponding to each jackpot type Only the range of the hit type counter C2 is configured to be different, but without being limited to this, the jackpot type selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 table 202d2 will be described. FIG.16(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the table 202d2 for special figures 2. As shown in FIG. The special figure 2 table 202d2 is a table referred to in the lottery for the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16(c), this special figure 2 table 202d2 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

The special figure 2 table 202d2 differs from the special figure 1 table 202d1 in that it is referred to in the second special symbol lottery, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot A" in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "50 to 79". However, the difference is that the "jackpot C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is configured to make it easier for the player to select the "jackpot A" that is most advantageous to the player when the special figure 2 wins the jackpot than when the special figure 1 wins the jackpot. ing. Thus, each special figure lottery is advantageous in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery in parallel and equally executing both special figure lotteries in a normal state. You can vary the degree. Therefore, when the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the special figure type of the jackpot winning is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 17) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202e is used in the normal table 202e1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, and in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set. A probability variation/potential probability table 202e2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e1. This normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol for the variation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery is longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". is defined in association with the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in the range of "51 to 100", and is defined in association with the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds in the range of "101 ~ 150" is defined in association with a super reach jackpot variation pattern B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and a range of "151 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach jackpot variation pattern C with a variation time of 60 seconds. It is

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and there are three types of fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A, B, C ). This is because when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating each type, the effect mode of the variable effect is set differently according to the variation pattern type indicated by the received command. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the special figure lottery with the same lottery result and variation time, a plurality of types of variation pattern types can be set on the main controller 110 side, and based on the set variation pattern type It is configured so that the effect mode of the variable effect is set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. As a result, since it is possible to set the performance mode of the variable performance by combining a plurality of parameters, it is possible to set a wider variety of performance modes and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, if the lottery result is "out" and the number of pending items is within the range of 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 will be in the range of "0 to 70" and the fluctuation time will be 20 seconds. A pattern is defined in correspondence, a normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "71 to 150", and a super reach deviation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in the range of "151 to 198" A variation pattern is associated and defined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "lost" and the number of pending items is 3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the short-time off fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated. Defined, the range of "71 to 130" is defined in association with a long-time off fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the range of "131 to 170" is associated with a normal reach out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. , and the range of "171 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the same value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired when the lottery result is "loss", a different variation pattern is selected. Specifically, when the number of reservations is small, compared to when the number of reservations is large, it is stipulated that fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are more likely to be selected, and when the number of reservations is large, compared to when the number of reservations is short, It is stipulated so that one with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, the number of reserved balls is quickly consumed, and the period during which the lottery is not executed increases, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. can be done. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, the number of held balls becomes less likely to reach the upper limit, and the player has more chances to shoot balls in succession, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game early. can be done.

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating another jackpot (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the table 202e2 for probability variation/time reduction provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 19, the probability variation/time reduction table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198 , that is, the normal jackpot variation pattern A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the entire range. In the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as a short-out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in the range of "0 to 79", and the fluctuation time is in the range of "80 to 198". A 180-second long deviation variation pattern is associated and defined.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 5 seconds. A short jackpot variation pattern is defined, and a super reach jackpot variation pattern B with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 198" in association with it. In the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as a short-out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time is in the range of "180 to 198". A super reach out variation pattern of 30 seconds is associated and defined.

As described above, during the variable probability state, or during the time saving state (during the right-handed game), it is easier to set a shorter variation time as the second special symbol variation time than during the normal state (during the left-handed game). It is configured. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, since it is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and it becomes a game state in which it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, during the time saving state, it becomes a game state in which it is easy to accumulate special figure 2 reservation and short variation time is easily set as the variation time of special figure 2 variation, and special figure 2 variation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the variation time which can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol is configured so as to overlap with the variation time which can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the variation time of the first special symbol. By grasping, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the variable probability state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that a variable time is set so that the player can determine which game state is set.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 15(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the normal design hit is defined in the range of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired "0 to 10", and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal figure in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general/universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 20, when the normal pattern low probability state is set, the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198" 30 seconds fluctuation time is set be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set and the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is configured to vary based on the normal symbol game state and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and is set. It is configured to vary the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 depending on the variable time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to restrict the lottery action of the second special pattern, which tends to obtain a lottery result advantageous to the player, so that the player is prevented from receiving excessive benefits. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, Second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time reduction counter 203h, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation It has a stop flag 203o, a special figure 1 variation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 variation time counter 203s, and a memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning). is a storage area for storing In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 4), the game ball enters the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 ( This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the start winning.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) along with the detection of winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are detected from the counter buffer. , and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second left ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each The values of counters C1-C2 and CS1 are obtained and stored in corresponding areas (not shown) in the same way.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (each value of counters C1 to C2, CS1), one start The data corresponding to winning a prize is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is read from the counter buffer. , Acquire the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is early among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device, the above-described normal symbol holding ball Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning is used as this normal symbol. Shift to hold ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the ball entering the ball opening 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of variable display effect) up to a maximum of 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the ball entering the second left ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). , When the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). When it is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol variation start process (not shown). 35) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f detects a ball passing through a through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ), it is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 . This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. The variable probability counter 203g is set with a value corresponding to the type of jackpot won after the jackpot ends. And the value of this probability variation counter 203g is the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) game state update process (S308 (S910 in FIG. 40) )). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variation state), and a special symbol propriety determination is performed with reference to a table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in a normal state (low probability state), and a special symbol propriety determination is performed with reference to a table for low probability.

The time-saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the high-probability state (time-saving state, probability variable state) of normal symbols. After the end of the big win, a value corresponding to the winning big win type is set in the time saving counter 203f. Then, the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by one in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 40). If the value of the short time counter 203f is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal design is performed, it is determined that the normal design is in a high probability state, and the judgment for the normal design is executed with reference to the table for the high probability. be. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the low probability table.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64b1 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S406 in FIG. 36). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S811 in FIG. 39).

With this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S805 in FIG. 39). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol is executed while the other big winning game is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second left ball opening 64b2 or the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value. This is a flag that is set to ON when the flag is set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 42). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1510 in FIG. 45).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1504 in FIG. 45). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol is executed while the other big winning game is being executed.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (the setting state of the variable probability counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, the normal state is stored, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more , the variable probability state is stored, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 1 or more, the time reduction state is stored.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game is being executed, a jackpot game state indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed are also stored. is configured to

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the information is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 52), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set. As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In addition, in this embodiment, a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit flag 203i) and a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation (special figure 2 jackpot flags 203j) are configured separately, but without being limited to this, it is possible to identify whether the jackpot variation corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern is executed. It may be composed of one flag (for example, a jackpot flag). Specifically, the flag is composed of 2 bits, "10" indicates that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, and "01" indicates the second special symbol (special figure 2). indicates that the jackpot is fluctuating, and "00" indicates that none of the special symbols are fluctuating the jackpot. It may be configured to set a 2-bit value.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols will be a big hit. In the case of winning, a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). ), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i as a big hit flag that can separately store the lottery result of the first special symbol (hit winning) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (hit winning) Although the two big win flags 203j are used, without being limited to this, a common big win flag is provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are provided. On the other hand, when a big win is won, a big win flag is set to ON, and in the other special pattern lottery executed with the big win flag set to ON, a big win may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag for indicating that the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, It is set to ON when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (Fig. 39 S801: Yes), when it is determined that it is during special figure 2 fluctuation (S802 of FIG. 39: Yes), it is set to ON (see S803). Also, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S209 in FIG. 41), it is set to OFF.

By using this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost pattern. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again.

In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, within one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), after executing the process relating to the first special symbol, the process relating to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, it is configured to execute the variation process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53) is the big win control process. (S2404 in FIG. 54) is executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 34) is such that if the current state is a jackpot (S201 in FIG. 34: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S203 to S212 in FIG. 34) is skipped. It consists of

That is, in the present embodiment, while the jackpot game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured so that no new special symbol variation (lottery) is executed. 34 (see S104 of 34)), when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot by the variation processing for the first special symbol, the special symbol variation. It is configured such that a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, that It is possible to suppress execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 37). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S204 in FIG. 38) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) is determined (see S205 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S205 in FIG. 34: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S206 in FIG. 39) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 43). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1209 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S210 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) is determined (see S211 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S211 in FIG. 34: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S212 in FIG. 45) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S806 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the resumption of the variation of the second special symbol based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 209z including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing forward is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the frame buttons 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the player presses the frame buttons 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). When operated, it controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach, and , to the display control device 114 . When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a button effect selection table 222b, as shown in FIG. 22(a).

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, a part of the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (variation time, success/failure determination result) is associated with the value of the acquired effect counter 223u. Effect content (effect pattern) of the variable effect of the third symbol to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

Specifically, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio ramp control device 113 is normal reach (30 seconds) and the win/loss determination result is hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u "Effect A" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "effect B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "effect C" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If the value of the first effect counter 223u is out of range, the value of the first effect counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 79" for "effect A", in the range of "80 to 94" in "effect B", and in the range of "95 to 99". "Production C" is defined in .

Further, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio ramp control device 113 is super reach (60 seconds) and the result of the win/loss determination is hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set to "0". ~ 29”, “super effect B” is defined in the range of “30 to 79”, and “super effect C” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. If the value of the first effect counter 223u is out of range, the value of the first effect counter 223u falls within the range of ``0 to 49'' for ``super effect A'', within the range of ``50 to 89'' for ``super effect B'', and ``90 to 99''. , 'super effect C' is defined in the range of '.

Finally, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio lamp control device 113 is long-time off, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set to the range of "0 to 89" and the "off effect A" is displayed. However, the "off effect B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As described above, the variation pattern selection table 222a, when the information indicating the variation time included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is the same, regardless of the result of the judgment, the same type are defined to be selected, and the selection ratio of each effect pattern is made different based on the result of the determination. As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot depending on the type of effect pattern selected. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to which production pattern the production contents of the variable production of the third symbol to be executed are based on, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, each effect pattern (“effect A”, “effect B”, “effect C” . The presence or absence of an operation effect (button effect) for operating the , and the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect are set in association with each other. In this embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are explained with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 222a is stipulated so that more subdivided effect patterns corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be selected, and the description thereof is omitted.

The button effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the content of the button effect according to the result of determination of whether or not this lottery is successful and the type of variation pattern. Now, with reference to FIG. 24, the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 24, the button effect selection table 222b stores button effect information indicating various button effects corresponding to effect patterns (effect types) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a. . As the button effect information, the button effective period start timing information indicating the period from the start of the special figure fluctuation until the operation valid period (button effective period) corresponding to the button effect is set, and the button effective period start timing information, which is set during the button effect. Validity period information indicating the length of the operation valid period (button valid period), priority information indicating the execution priority of the button presentation, and button presentation information indicating the content (mode) of the presentation of the button presentation. It is specified for each production type.

Specifically, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "effect A", "super effect A", or "off effect A", the button effect information is There is no button effect, and it is defined so that the button effect is not executed. When the effect type is "effect B", "10 seconds" is defined as the start timing of the button effective period, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect. It is

Here, the priority of button effects will be briefly described. As described above, this embodiment is configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), It is configured to be able to set the variation production corresponding to each special figure variation. In the gaming machine configured in this way, a plurality of button effects are set by a plurality of different triggers (the trigger for setting the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation, the trigger for setting the variation performance of the special figure 2 variation). In some cases, a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, and when the operating means (the frame button 22) is operated, it becomes difficult to understand which button effect corresponds, and the player's desire to play is reduced. There was a problem.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in order to set a plurality of button effects without overlapping the execution timing, it is necessary to centrally manage the plurality of button effects set at different timings. There is a problem that the processing load of 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, priority is given to the button effects to be executed, and when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects with higher priority are executed. is doing. Thus, even if the button performances are set so that the execution timings overlap, only the button performances with high priority are actually executed, so that the player can be provided with the performances that are easy to understand. Moreover, since there is no need to centrally manage the settings of a plurality of button effects that are set at different occasions, the problem of increased processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be solved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same priority is assigned in advance to button effects that are not problematic even if they are executed simultaneously, and a plurality of button effects with the same priority can be stored. Configure. As a result, it is possible to overlap execution timings for button effects that can be overlapped, so that it is possible to provide the player with unexpected and novel effects, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

Here, the contents of the button effects to which the same priority is assigned will be described. In the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the button effect, the display range of the button effect on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the operation target (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the operation content (one button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicately) are defined according to the type of press, repeated presses, and long presses), and the same priority is set for the button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicately). It is configured as follows.

Specifically, of the display areas of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5) is used as the display area, and the first frame button 22a is used as the operation target, and the sub-display is performed. A button effect that uses the area Ds (see FIG. 5) as a display area means that even if the display area is duplicated, the player can grasp the content of each button effect and operate the operation means ( Since it becomes possible to operate the frame button 22), it becomes possible to duplicate the button effect.

In addition, for each button effect with different display areas and the same operation target, if the operation content is the same, performing the same operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) on the operation target will display it in a different display area. Since it is possible to develop each button effect that has been performed, it becomes a button effect that can be duplicated. On the other hand, the display areas are different, the operation target is the same, and the button effects with different operation contents cannot be overlapped (difficult) because the player cannot operate the operation means for each button effect. It becomes a button production. Further, even when the display areas overlap, the effect becomes difficult for the player to grasp the effect mode (display contents) of each button effect, so that the button effect becomes impossible (difficult) to overlap.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to set the same priority for all combinations of button effects that can be duplicated as described above. The privilege of variably operating a decoration variable member that is provided and can be changed (moved) from a predetermined first position to a second position, and the privilege indicated by the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81). Accordingly, even button effects that can be duplicated may be given priority.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that a plurality of button effects set based on one opportunity (for example, the opportunity to set the variable effect of special figure 1) may overlap, and the plurality of button effects Among them, the first button effect to be executed first has a higher priority than the second button effect to be executed later. The above-described first button effect can be terminated before the start timing of the above-described second button effect by actively (early) operating the operating means by the player. ing.

By configuring in this way, at the start timing of the second button effect, if the first button effect with high priority is being executed, the second button effect is not executed, and the first button effect with high priority is executed. If it is not inside, the second button effect can be executed. Therefore, depending on the operation content of one button effect, whether or not to execute another button effect can be changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

It should be noted that, when such a configuration is used, the second button effect with a lower priority is more valuable to the player than the first button effect with a higher priority (for example, it is usually difficult to see). It is preferable to configure so that a privilege such as reproducing a privilege video that cannot be performed, notifying the current game state, or notifying the result of the special figure fluctuation during execution) can be given. In this way, by setting a privilege button presentation that can give a valuable benefit to the player as a button presentation with a low priority to be executed, the execution period of the other button presentation overlaps with that of the other button presentation. A frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated while another button performance is being executed, aiming at suppressing the privilege button performance from not being executed.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a suggestion (notification) means capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the privilege button presentation has been internally set before the execution timing of the privilege button presentation arrives. With this configuration, by suggesting (notifying) that the bonus button effect has been set by the suggesting (notifying) means, unless the execution timing of another button effect overlaps, the reward is given at a predetermined timing. It is possible to easily grasp that the button presentation is executed. Also, the frame button 22 can be positively operated so that the execution period of the other button presentation executed after being notified is shortened as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 24, the specific contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b will be described. When the effect type (effect pattern) is "effect C", a plurality of button effects are defined. "5 seconds" as the effective period, "1" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect are defined. "3 seconds" is defined as the valid period, "2" as the priority, and "C" as the button effect mode.

Here, the button effects defined corresponding to the effect type "effect C" will be described. As described above, this "effect C" defines a plurality of button effects, and the difference between the start timing of the first button effect executed first and the start timing of the second button effect executed later. is specified to be 4 seconds. Since the effective period of the first button effect is defined as "5 seconds", the frame button 22 is not operated while the first button effect is being executed, and the first button is activated after the effective period has elapsed. When the effect is terminated, the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect. That is, since the first button effect with a high priority is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, during the execution of the first button effect, by operating the frame button 22, the first button effect can be started early (for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the start timing of the button valid period, that is, 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation). If it is terminated, the high priority first button effect has ended at the start timing of the second button effect (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), so the second button effect will be executed. Become. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated in response to the first button effect while expecting the second button effect to be executed.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect B", a plurality of button effects are defined in the same manner as the above-described "effect B". The first button effect to be executed first has "10 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect. is specified, and the second button effect to be executed later has "14 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, "3 seconds" as the effective period, "1" as the priority, and "C" as the effect mode of the button effect. is stipulated.

Here, the difference between the content specified in the above-mentioned "effect B" and the content specified in the "super effect B" will be described. In the above-mentioned "effect B", it is stipulated that the second button effect to be executed later has lower priority than the first button effect to be executed first. When the first button effect is being executed, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, "super effect B" is defined so that the second button effect executed later has a higher priority than the first button effect executed earlier. Therefore, in the "super effect B", even while the first button effect is being executed, the first button effect is terminated and the second button effect is executed. The effect mode of the first button effect to be executed first is defined so that the "effect B" and the "super effect B" have the same effect mode.

In other words, when the first button effect is executed, the player determines whether the current first button effect is the first button effect set corresponding to "effect B", or whether it corresponds to "super effect B". The first button effect proceeds without being able to discriminate whether it is the first button effect set by the user. When the frame button 22 is operated so as to end the first button effect before the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is executed in both "effect B" and "super effect B". , You can experience multiple button effects, but whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B" or "super effect B" has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than "effect B". Therefore, it cannot be determined whether the second button effect is executed or not.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first button effect so that the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, in the case of "effect B", the second button If the effect is not executed and it is "super effect B", the second button effect is executed. In other words, in this case, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed, whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B" or whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than "effect B". It can be determined whether it corresponds to "super effect B", but if it is "effect B", the second button effect is not executed and it is not possible to experience a plurality of button effects. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is predicted which button effect is set corresponding to which effect type (effect pattern) the button effect to be executed this time is, and based on the prediction result, the frame during each button effect is predicted. It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the content of the button operation by himself/herself.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect C", the button effective period start timing is "10 seconds" and the effective period is "10 seconds". ", "2" as the priority, "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, "10 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, and "5 seconds" as the effective period ”, “3” as the priority, and “A” as the effect mode of the button effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, various button effects can be set according to the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a, so that the effect can be enhanced. can. In addition, even if each production type (production pattern) is selected based on a variation pattern with different jackpot expectations, the start timing of the button effective period of the button production is unified, so depending on the start timing of the button effective period, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect of the button presentation to be executed later due to the determination of what is in advance.

In addition, a plurality of button effects such as "effect B" are set at timings where the execution periods can overlap, and can be executed later according to the operation content of the button effect (first button effect) that is executed first. Since the button effect (second button effect) is configured to be variable, the player can actively participate in the button effect.

In addition, like "effect B" and "super effect B", while unifying the contents of the button effects to be executed, only by varying the priority of each button effect, button effects that can be executed later (first The presence or absence of the execution of the 2-button presentation) can be made different, and the enjoyment of making the player predict the presentation type this time can be provided.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). As shown in FIG. 22(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, pending production counter 223j, subordinate state setting area 223k, button production hierarchy storage Area 223m, button valid timer 223n, special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, special figure 2 button effect flag 223q, second frame button valid flag 223r, operated flag 223s, pressing counter 223t, first effect counter 223u, second effect At least a counter 223v and a memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. , win-win information is stored. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223b, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ( It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It's like

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by the ball entering first ball entrance 64b1, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in a special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 5(b)). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, for the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 The only difference is that they are stored in the same manner, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the fluctuation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The pending effect counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of remaining pending balls used in the pending effect. The pending effect counter 223j determines in the pending ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 63) that the number of pending balls is the upper limit value (S4503 in FIG. 63: Yes), and when it is determined to execute the pending effect (S4504: Yes), the value is set to 8 (S4506), the value is reduced by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation is started in a state where the value of the pending effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (holding storage decreases) . The suspension effect is executed until the value of the suspension effect counter 223j becomes zero.

Data corresponding to a state command output from main controller 110 is set in sub-state setting area 223k. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223k. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is a storage area for simultaneously storing a plurality of set button effects, and has a plurality of storage areas. In this button effect layer storage area 223m, button effect information such as the start time of the set button effect and the setting value of the button effect timer 223n, which will be described later, is stored in a storage area corresponding to the priority of the set button effect. be done. Details of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 25, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is formed from four storage areas (hierarchical areas). It is

Specifically, the first layer area 223m1, in which priority 1 is set to execute the effect with the highest priority, and priority 2, in which the effect is executed with priority next to the priority 1, are set. a second layer area 223m2, a third layer area 223m3, and a fourth layer area 223m4 in which the lowest priority level 3 is set.

Here, in this embodiment, when the button effect is executed, the stored information is read in order from the hierarchical area with the highest priority, and the button effect is executed. Then, when it is time to execute a button effect, it is determined whether a button effect with a priority higher than that corresponding to the button effect whose execution timing has come this time is being executed, and the button effect with a higher priority is executed. It is configured to execute a new button effect when it has not been executed. Also, when a button effect with a lower priority than the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is being executed, the button effect with a lower priority is forcibly terminated, and a new button effect is executed. is doing.

In addition, this embodiment has a second layer area 223m2 and a third layer area 223m3 as storage areas to which the same priority (priority 2) is set. The button effects stored in the third layer area 223m3 are executed at the same time even if the execution timings overlap. This embodiment is configured so that the button effects are set at different timings, and when the button effects with priority 2 are set first, the information indicating the button effects is displayed in the second layer area 223m2. When the stored button effect with priority 2 is set, the information indicating the button effect already stored in the second layer area 223m2 is shifted to the third layer area 223m3, and then Information indicating the button effects with the set priority 2 is stored in the second layer area 223m2.

Then, when a new button effect with priority 2 is set, the storage area is similarly shifted, and the information stored in the third layer area 223m3 is erased. In this manner, when a predetermined number of button effects with the same priority (priority 2) are configured to be stored, when the number of button effects with the same priority is set equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the oldest button effect is discarded. By configuring as above, the most recently set button effect can be easily executed.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of button effects with the same priority (priority 2) can be stored. is discarded, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the latest button effect may be configured not to be newly stored. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to manage the execution timing of the button effect stored in the storage area and the erasure timing, so that the control processing can be simplified.

The button validity timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b). set. Then, the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113 1 is subtracted from the value of the button valid timer 223n (S6003). Note that the button validity timer 223 is configured to be able to simultaneously measure a plurality of operation validity periods. As a result, even when button effects are executed in duplicate, it is possible to properly measure the operation effective period corresponding to each button effect.

The special figure 1 button effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set as the variation effect of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the button effect of the special figure 1 is set. It is set to ON when In this special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, the button effect is set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303 in FIG. 68), and the set button effect is executed in the execution timing setting process (S5405 in FIG. 69). It is set to ON when the timing is set (see S5509 in FIG. 69), and in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 70) for setting the button effect of special figure 2, the button of special figure 1 It is referred to when determining the effect setting status (S5602 in FIG. 70). Then, when the information indicating the corresponding button effect is erased from the button effect hierarchy storage area, that is, when the corresponding button effect is executed, or when the button effect with high priority is executed, the corresponding button effect is executed. is set to OFF (S5907 in FIG. 73).

In this embodiment, the variation display based on the special figure 1 lottery is configured to be displayed (main variation display) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second figure based on the special figure 2 lottery The variable display of the three symbols is not executed, or the variable display (secondary variable display) is performed so as to be less conspicuous than the main variable display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined result (for example, when a big hit is won, or when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected among the losers), the fluctuation display based on the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. It is configured to display by switching from the secondary fluctuation display to the main fluctuation display.

The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set in the variation effect of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the button effect of the special figure 2 is set. It is set to ON when

The second frame button valid flag 223r is a flag for indicating that an operation valid period (second operation valid period) for judging whether the operation on the second frame button 22b is valid is set. It is set to ON when a period is set.

The operated flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the operation content of the operating means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, and is set to ON when the operation content satisfies the predetermined operation condition. be. This operated flag 223s is discriminated at the timing when the execution period t2 (see FIG. 8) of the button effect has passed, and depending on the discrimination result (the setting state of the operated flag 223s), the result reporting period t3 (see FIG. 8) A middle production mode (success production, failure production) is set.

The pressing counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times the operation means (frame button 22) is operated during one operation valid period. Each time the button 22a or the second frame button 22b) is operated, the value is incremented by 1, and the value is reset to 0 when the valid operation period expires. Then, it is determined whether the value of the depression counter 223t during the valid operation period or at the end of the valid operation period satisfies a predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation completed flag 223s is set to ON. be done.

In this embodiment, the number of operations (number of presses) is counted using the press counter 223t as the operation content during the valid operation period. number of times), determines whether or not a predetermined condition is established based on the determination result, and sets the operation completion flag 223s to ON when it is determined that the predetermined condition is established. For example, if there is a means for measuring the length of a period (long-pressing period) during which the operation means (frame button 22) is continuously pressed, or if there are a plurality of operation means Alternatively, a means for measuring the order and number of times each operating means is pressed, a means for measuring the pressing force when pressing the operating means, or the like may be used.

The first effect counter 223u and the second effect counter 223v are counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. FIG. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 773) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 78) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 79(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1 is opened. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main controller 110 with a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the ball entrance 64b1b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 77).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 64b2 is displayed. When the ball entering the ball 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, as shown in FIG. 27(b). and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 28A and 28B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 28(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, for back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 29 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 28, the character ROM 234 prepares the rear images corresponding to the rear surfaces A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over a mountain changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 29(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(c) is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 29(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(a) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 28(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 29(a) and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face E, the image shown in FIGS. 29(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 29(b)-(c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 29(a) and (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after displaying the images of FIGS. 29(b)-(c) and FIGS. 29(c)-(a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 26). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, even if the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, Regardless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, main patterns imitating animal characters and predetermined marks (for example, triangular marks) are displayed as main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern (blank pattern) is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", "girl", "monster", "rabbit", and "turtle" are displayed according to various effects. , data corresponding to these are stored in the character design area 235e, so that when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the character ROM 234 outputs the corresponding data. Instead of newly reading out image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to E, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 77). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9605 in FIG. 89(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 79B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and the simple display setting process (see S8308 in FIG. 79(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S9501 in FIG. 89A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 89(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 32) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 79(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S9205 in FIG. 88) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 32), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 79(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9207 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S8002 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9713 in FIG. 90). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S9714 in FIG. 90). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9802 in FIG. 92).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S8306 in FIG. 79B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 85(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S9709 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S9710 in FIG. 90). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 85(a)). ) of S9002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S9221 in FIG. 86). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S8505 in FIG. 81(a), S8705 in FIG. 82(a), S8805 in FIG. 82(b) , S8905 in FIG. 83). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (S9214 in FIG. 86). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81(a), S8705 in FIG. 82(a), S8805 in FIG. 82(b), FIG. 83, S8905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 57. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 479, 99, 239, 232), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning) and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination based on each counter value obtained for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and determines the determination by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first pattern display device 37 to enable the variable display in the variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third pattern display device 81 are issued. Control is executed for setting and stopping display in a display mode showing the judgment result (positiveness judgment result). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 34, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (during jackpot) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning). In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is not in the jackpot (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0, that is, the first special symbol is displayed as a variation It is determined whether it is in the middle (S203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed while the variation is being displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S203: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed ( S204).

In this first special symbol variation executing process (S204), the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is varied (updated) during the period when the first special symbol is varying. process is executed. Then, when the processing of S204 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation executing processing (S204) is 0 (S205), S205 When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S205: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to S208 which will be described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stopping process (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 in the process of S205 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S203 (S203: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently changing Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S207). In this first special symbol variation start process (S207), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S207), after determining that the special figure 1 is being varied in the process of S205 (S205: No), or after performing the first special symbol variation stop process (S206) After execution, next, the variation processing (S208 to S212) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S208). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (0) in the process of S208 (S208: No), the present is not in the special figure 2 fluctuation, so the following Then, a second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S209), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), if the retention data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol retention ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection based on the retention data Processing is performed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S209), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S208, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is (S208: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S210). The contents of this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S210) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S211), and if it is determined to be 0 (S211 : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S212), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S211 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and this process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but as with the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206), it is defined in the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time has passed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). , the variation processing (S203-S207) regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing (S208-S212) regarding the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the second special symbol. 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the variation regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and the player can choose according to the set game state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types for which the lottery that is advantageous to the game is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303 ).

Then, set the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction (S304), the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the first special symbol reserved number of balls storage area 203a, the execution area A process for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) will be described later in detail. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described later in detail, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value. Then, the number-of-games update process (S308) is executed, and this process ends. The number-of-games update process (S308), which will be described later in detail, is performed to update the game state by subtracting the values of the variable probability counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the current gaming state is a high probability state of special symbols (probability variation state, latent probability state), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a value greater than 0 ( S402). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15 (a)) Based on , It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S401 matches the big winning judgment value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (judgment result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)) Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the low-probability jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S404).

When the process of S403 or S404 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405). As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big win (S407), and the big winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 ( S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the first big win flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol. This first big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-described first special symbol big win determination process (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 table 202d1 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery result is not a big hit (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process of S503 is performed.

After either processing of S501 or S502 is completed, next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state) corresponding to the information is read (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 Then, set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S506).

Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and the selected variation pattern The value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S509), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S204). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S207), the variation time and display of the first special symbol being varied are updated.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), first, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S701), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S702), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation executing process ( (see S204 in FIG. 38) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is updated (decremented by 1) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 in FIG. 38). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206). This first special symbol variation stop process (S206) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is "0", that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) This is a process that is executed when the period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S206 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 It is determined whether (S802). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S803), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o has been turned on (S804).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S805), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S806). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S806 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to ON (S807), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to ON (S807 : Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol stopped and displayed forcibly in the process of S805 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to OFF. (S808), deletes the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S809), and proceeds to the process of S810. On the other hand, in the processing of S807, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery (S807: No), the processing of S808 and S809 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S810.

In the process of S810, first, a jackpot scenario that has been won in this special symbol variation is set (S810), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, and the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are set to 0. It is set (S811), and information indicating that the current game state is during a jackpot (during a jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S812). The game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to separately store the game state (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state (during the jackpot) related to the winning game, S811. By executing the process of (1), the game state (normal state, probability variable state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S812 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S813), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner at 37 is executed (S814), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S812 is skipped, and the processing of S813 described above is performed. Go to processing.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the process (S810 to S814) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. Also, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S805). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the processing is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stop-displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a symbol indicating a loss. For example, if it is determined that one special symbol has won the jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) ( In S405 of FIG. 36: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the contents of variation control are varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is lost, the lottery When the result is discarded and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is in the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to indicate that it is a big hit, the second After the jackpot game of one special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the first special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, referring to FIG. 40, a game which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 35) and one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) to be described later. The number update process (S308) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the number-of-games update process (S308).

In the game count update process (S308), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the time saving state (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more (S851: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h subtracted in the process of S852 is 0 (S853). When it is determined that the subtracted value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S853: Yes), since it is time to end the time saving state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S854), The process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 or more (that is, 0) (S851: No), since it is not necessary to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h, S852 ˜S854 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S855.

After the processing of S851 or S854 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the variable probability state (S855). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 or more (S855: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability counter 203g (S856). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203g subtracted in the process of S856 is 0 (S857). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g that has been subtracted is 0, it is the end timing of the variable probability state, so the corresponding game state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. .

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 or more in the processing of S855 (S855: No), or if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 in the processing of S857 (S857: No) , S859. In the process of S859, a state command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the variable probability counter 203g, and the game state being set is set (S859), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the second special symbol variation start process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S209).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36) executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)) immediately before this process is performed )) to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation after forcibly stop-displaying the special symbol with the deviating symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is configured to be set to OFF Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 41) can be skipped only once.

This is the lottery of the first special symbol executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)) immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed. Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), if the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) to be executed immediately after is skipped, then the first special symbol jackpot A jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), and the jackpot game ends by the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) is not executed until it is done.

By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol, control processing executed by the main controller 110 processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. A special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol until the big winning game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. is skipped once, other configurations may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not won in the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110 to be described later, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to OFF.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S209 in FIG. 41) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, variation of the second special symbol Skip the process, that is, it is configured not to start a new variation (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but not limited to this, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on It may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to the case where it is set.

In this case, a lottery for the second special pattern is carried out using a special lottery that does not win a big hit, and the variation display of the second special pattern is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern is executed without executing the lottery of the second special pattern, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

It should be noted that the content of the variation processing for each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) which is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S910 , and terminate this process. The processing of S903-S910 is different from the processing of S301-S308 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. The value of the number of balls counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in that the target special symbol type is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S409 In the processing of S1006 to S1009 corresponding to the processing of, the difference is that the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since other processing is the same, description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 43) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) in the following points. In the process of S1201 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S506 to S507 In each process of S1206 to S1207 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210). The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204 in FIG. 38) in each of the processes of S1401-S1402 corresponding to the processes of S701-S702. The difference is that the object to be played is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and from the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s. Since other processing is the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol variation stop process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S212). In the second special symbol variation stop process (S212), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). differ. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined which one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 the ball entered (start winning), In the case of winning, each counter value obtained is increased up to the upper limit number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first entrance 64b1, up to 4 in total in the left second entrance 64b2 and the second entrance 640). It is a process of storing in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64b1, which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64b1 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (there was a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702), and the It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64b1 is less than the upper limit of 4 at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of pending balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 To set a reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first start port (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area for the number of reserved balls corresponding to 203a (S1706).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1707). This first look-ahead processing (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process for discriminating the stop type and the like is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of winning or not determination for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, It may be configured to execute a process of determining the stop type or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although it is configured to determine the contents of the lottery right (winning information) in advance, without being limited to this, when the lottery right for the first special design is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special design (winning information ) may be determined in advance.

After the processing of S1707 is executed, the processing of S1708 is executed next. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64b1 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead processing (S1707) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703 : No), that is, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed. It may be configured so that As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of balls reaches the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64b1) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance (left second ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 , each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in low probability state, jackpot only in high probability state, jackpot in both low probability state and high probability state) (S1823: Yes), jackpot type and the information indicating the variation pattern is set (S1824), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, it is out) (S1823: No), the information indicating the deviation and the variation pattern are shown. A first winning command including information is set (S1825), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first prize winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, in addition to the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the determination result of the case of the high probability state of the special design, the determination result of the case of the low probability state of the special design is determined, the result of each determination However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the determination value that is determined to be a big hit ( The value of the first winning random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a is accurately discriminated, and based on the game state It may be configured so as to execute the suitability determination. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process , but not limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a ( Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the pending memory) may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failing determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process Although the configuration that predicts the success/failure determination in advance is used, this is not the only option. In the present embodiment, new pending storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a. Due to this, information indicating the prefetch result based on all the winning information stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a may be set as the first winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this second prefetching process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 48) is based on the fact that the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47) entered the first start hole (first ball entry hole 64b1) (start winning). While it is a process of determining (pre-reading) the pending data (winning information) in advance and making various judgments, the object to be judged is the first starting point. The only difference is that the winning information is changed to that based on the start winning at the opening (left second ball opening 64b2, second ball opening 640). Description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S2001). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed at the maximum after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S2002). When it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing, that is, it is now possible to execute a new normal symbol change (lottery) (S2002: No), then the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S2004 (S2004: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S2004 (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, it is retained and stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1 → execution area, normal design reservation 2 → normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3 → normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4 → normal design reservation 4, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S2008), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined (S2008: Yes), the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 15(b)) (S2009 ), and the process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is a low probability state of normal symbols (S2008: No), the second for low probability Based on the hit determination value in the hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(b)), the hit/fail determination result is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the process of S2011, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S2012), and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (S2014). On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing (S2013), and proceeds to the processing of S2014 described above.

Here, the processing (processing of S2014) for determining the normal pattern fluctuation time will be described using the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal design fluctuation, the probability state of the set normal design (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal design reservation ball number counter 203f (normal design reservation number), It is configured to be variably set based on The easiness of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (the length of the opening period of the electric accessory 640a per unit time) is made different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. ing.

As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) defines a variation time of 30 seconds when the normal symbol low probability state is set. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, since the game per normal pattern ends before the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, the ball It is configured so that a ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Then, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67) Since the normal pattern variation (30-second variation) is being executed, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern low probability state is set. If so, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the normal game is being executed. , the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this manner, by varying the degree of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether the variation time of the normal symbol is set shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 even in a game state (for example, variable probability state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set the variation pattern of the normal design according to the game state of the normal design and the number of reserved balls of the normal design. It may be configured so that different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of changing (S2002: No), the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed. (S2015), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "○" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or S2013 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second pattern in the display mode set by the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is not a hit (no) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the processing of S2015) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing for special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), then the probability state of the current normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S2018), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, the current is normal If it is determined to be in the probability state (S2018: No), as the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening pattern "0.7 seconds × 1 time" that executes opening once for 0.7 seconds is selected. Set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S2018: Yes), as an open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening for 0.8 seconds is 1 A release pattern of "0.8 sec x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds × 1 time) is higher than the open pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds × 1 time). , to open the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a, a winning game (first 2, the period during which the ball entrance 640 is in an open state is lengthened). Next, based on the opening pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2021), and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal design propriety determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal design at the timing of performing the normal design propriety determination, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal design winning game. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set

Thus, in this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the normal symbol variation pattern is set corresponding to each game state and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol. Other than the probability variation state (probability variation: with electric sapo), there is one type of variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general figure variation type counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the through gate passage processing executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second winning This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set game state is the normal state (S2102), When it is determined that it is in the normal state (S2102: Yes), since it is a case where the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality is set (S2103) , S2104.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 detects the firing abnormality. (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the processing of S2102 (S2102: No), next, the current game state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a definite state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (S2104), and if it is determined that it is a latent definite state (S2104: Yes), the second notification indicating firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not in the variable probability state (it is in the latent probability state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds directly to S2106.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 , a second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating a firing abnormality is displayed.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game is being performed by configuring to determine that the right-handed game is being performed. (For example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display unit 80) is no longer required, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, by setting the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality differently according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is played, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes. can.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed. For example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with an intensity (manipulation amount) sufficient to shoot a ball into the right-handed area. may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. After completing the processing of S2102 to S2103, the processing of S2104 is executed next. In S2104, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S2105).

In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (3 or less) (S2105: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f Add 1 (S2106), set the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f) (S2107), and set the value of the second per random number counter C4 to normal It is stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S2108), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 52), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if not stored (S2305: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2312.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2313, S2314).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S2313, S2314).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2313, S2314) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2308). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S2311). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S2401 in FIG. 53), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 are executed (S2404).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (variable winning device 65) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (variable winning device 65). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the winning opening (variable winning device 65) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S2405). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S2021 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 49), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2406). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S206 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), according to the variation pattern Then, the variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) has ended , the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307 in FIG. 37) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39). ), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. As for the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating a loss. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2407). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2407), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), it is executed in the second symbol display device. 2012 or S2013 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2409). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2409: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described processes after S2401 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2409: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2410, S2411).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2410). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2410 (S2411). In addition, in the process of this S2411, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the processing of S2408, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, so the power-off process after S2412 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2412), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2413). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2414), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2415), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2408 is at the end of the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2401 to S2407, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2410 and S2411 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2401. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a prize winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S2501). Specifically, the process of S810 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot (jackpot Scenario) is set, it is determined that a special pattern jackpot will start. In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2503). In the processing of this S2503, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2504).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S2504 (S2504: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S2505). Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 54), will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot action setting process (S2505) is executed, first, among the opening action scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot of this time, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S2641). The opening operation of the large opening is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642), and then this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2504 in FIG. 54: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed Configure the command to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113, and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description continues. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (the 16th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 65b is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2506: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2508). It should be noted that the end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the set ending effect. In the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2509: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2509), and this processing exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S2508: No), the process is terminated.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S2512). In this jackpot ending process (S2512), a process of setting a special symbol high probability state or a normal symbol high probability state according to the type of jackpot won is executed.

When the jackpot ending process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S2701: Yes), after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable state is set as the game state, so the probability variable counter 203g The value is set to 70 (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the big win type this time is the big win C (S2701: No), the process of S2702 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2703.

In the process of S2703, 70 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the game state is set (S2704), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 57, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 58) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), it executes power-off processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then , interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If it has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. (Hereinafter, when both frame buttons are collectively referred to as the frame button 22), it is set to monitor the input whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set at the same time, a process of differentiating the button effects to be executed according to the priority is executed based on the information in the button effect layer storage area 223m. Also, when executing a plurality of button effects in duplicate, a process for validating the operations of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4110, command determination processing (S4111) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time, propriety determination result) of the first special symbol. In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4203). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), special figure 2 variation start processing provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: No), whether the number of pending balls command is received from the main controller 110 It discriminates (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the pending ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the pending ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the processing of S4207, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing ends. .

In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. A certain state) and a winning game state (during a jackpot) are set in the sub-state setting area 223k.

Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213), based on the fluctuation stop related command received from the main controller 110, a display command indicating the corresponding pattern stop is set (S4214), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the variation stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received (S4215), and it has been determined that the winning related command has been received. In that case (S4215: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. Details of the winning-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 performs processing.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

The command determination processing (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used, for example, the process of determining whether or not a state command is received, either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command The determination order may be defined so that it is executed before the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start processing of the main control device 110 (see S210 in FIG. 35) , the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state has changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 60, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 60 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for dependent variation) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) to be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of special symbols are variably displayed at the same time (parallel), the variable display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of any one of the special symbols is preferentially displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this embodiment, when the game state is set as the game state, the ball is caused to flow into the ball entry unit 64 (see FIG. 2), and the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port are opened. A left-handed game in which a ball is entered into 64b2 is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are evenly executed.

In this case, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is evenly divided, and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 2 are displayed together. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of fluctuation displays (special figure 1 fluctuation display, special figure 2 fluctuation display) are executed at the same time, and a fluctuation display (displacement fluctuation) indicating that the special figure lottery result is out There is a problem that the desire to play is lowered due to frequent display. In addition, there is a problem that a plurality of variable displays are executed at different variable speeds, and the eyes of the player watching the variable displays become tired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 is used as the main variation display, and is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to show the lottery result of the special figure 2. The variable display is a sub-variable display, and is configured to be executed in the small display area Dm4 of the 3-symbol display device 81. FIG. And, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, winning a jackpot), the special figure 2 variation display in which the secondary variation display is executed is configured to be switched to the main variation display.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are equally executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the deviation variation of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the side of the secondary variation display. Since it is possible, the number of variable display times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the total number of variable display times of special figure 1 and the number of big hit variation display times of special figure 2), the big hit It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of variable display times indicating winning (the number of times that the number of variable display times of special figure 1 and the number of times of variable display of special figure 2 are combined), so it looks higher than the actual probability of winning. It can make you think that you have won a jackpot with a probability.

Further, by emphasizing and executing the variable display corresponding to one special symbol among a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to make the player pay attention only to the variable display corresponding to one special symbol. Therefore, fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main variation display during the normal state, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the probability variation state and the time saving state. is configured to be the main fluctuation display. That is, according to the game state, it is configured to variably set the special symbol to be the main variable display. That is, when the variable probability state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by executing the right-handed game is executed, so the special figure 1 The special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the lottery, and the special figure 1 lottery is hardly executed.

Therefore, during the probability variable state and the time saving state, the variation display (special figure 2 variation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be the main variation display, so that the special figure lottery is actually executed. Regardless, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation where the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to occur, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, which is a game state in which a plurality of types of special figure lotteries (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed, variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery Although the display is set to be the main fluctuation display, it is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery may be the main fluctuation display, and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2. Different benefits (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished) that can be given when a jackpot is won in the lottery are easily given to the player. The variable display corresponding to the special symbol on the side may be set as the main variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to variably set the special figure type to be the main fluctuation display according to the set game state, but the special figure type to be the main fluctuation display is changed under another condition For example, if it is a game state in which a plurality of types of special figure lotteries (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed, the special figure lottery is not executed. It is preferable to configure so that the variable display corresponding to the special figure lottery executed earlier becomes the main variable display. As a result, even though the lottery condition of the special lottery (starting prize to the ball entrance) is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the special symbol for which the lottery was executed first is set to the secondary variable display, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player because the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, it may be configured such that the player selects which special symbol is to be the main variation display.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is set, first. Set the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e to ON (S4301), extract the variation pattern from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the variation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the normal state (S4304). In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the current state is normal (S4304: Yes), in order to display the fluctuation display of the first special symbol as the main fluctuation display, the display command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern It sets (S4305) and ends this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (time saving state, probability variable state) (S4304: No), the game where the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation display (Because it is a game state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is a sub-variation display), the command for display indicating the special figure 1 sub-variation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing ends.

Here, when the command for display indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is set, the command output processing (see S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113 Output to the display control device 114 and stored in the display control device 114 side. Display control device 114, in the state of storing the command indicating the special figure 1 main variation pattern, when receiving the display command for special figure 1 variation, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol display Image data is generated to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the device 81 . On the other hand, in the state where the display control device 114 stores the command indicating the special figure 1 follower variation pattern, when the display command for the special figure 1 variation is received, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol It is controlled so as not to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 .

In this way, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, regardless of the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display, the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to each special figure fluctuation is set, and the display control device 114 side , setting conditions of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display, and the received display command, the image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is generated based on the voice lamp control. It is possible to omit the process of determining the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display on the device 113 side and setting the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to the judgment result, and reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113. can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 61, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 61 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, the process of setting the display mode (variation pattern for primary variation, variation pattern for secondary variation) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) to be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352) , a detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4353).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the normal state (S4354). In the process of S4354, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (normal state, variable probability state), that is, (S4354: No), the second special symbol variation display is a secondary game state, Set the display command indicating the special figure 2 main fluctuation pattern (S4355), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4354, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S4354: Yes), the second special symbol variation display is a subordinate gaming state (the first special symbol variation display (Because it is the main game state), set a display command indicating a special figure 2 subordinate variation pattern (S4356), and end this process.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols While simultaneously displaying the variable effect display (variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the third symbol display device 81, according to the set game state, each special symbol (first Special pattern, second special pattern) display mode (size of display area, presence or absence of display as the third pattern) can be variably set, so that the fluctuation situation (lottery result and number of fluctuations) in the current situation It is possible to make the player easily grasp the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallelly) executes a variation (lottery), it is possible to prevent a game from being provided that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

In the stop class command reception process (S4206), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop class command is received, the special figure 1 stop class selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and the process ends.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, the content of the pending ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows the pending ball number processing (S4208) In this pending ball number processing (S4208), when the pending ball number is the upper limit value, a process for setting a pending effect is executed.

When the pending ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the current number of held balls is the upper limit (S4503). When it is determined that the number of pending balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a pending effect (S4504). Specifically, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the reservation performance, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the result of the lottery for executing the reservation performance. Then, when it is determined that the pending effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), a display command indicating the pending effect is set (S4505), and 8 is set to the value of the pending effect counter 223j (S4506). . Then, other processing related to suspension is executed (S4507), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the number of pending balls is not the upper limit value (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4504 that the pending effect is not to be executed (S4504: No), S4505- The process of S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4507.

Next, the state command reception processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of the status command reception process (S4212) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4601, if it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-status setting area 223k (S4610), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern command are set on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. It may be configured to

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether the probability variation state (S4605), and if it is determined that the gaming state is the probability variation state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the probability variation state) (S4605: Yes), it corresponds to the probability variation state Set the main display area setting command, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (S4606), set the display command indicating the variable probability mode (S4607), and process S4610 described above. Move to

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not a probability variable state (the state command received this time is not a command that indicates a probability variable state), that is, if a state command indicating a time saving state is received (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4220). In this win-related process (S4220), as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big win game to be executed when a big win is won is performed. , processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 when a jackpot is won is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (jackpot game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and based on the accumulated result A process of setting the number-of-balls-for-display command is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the jackpot related processing (S5002), which is one of the winning related processing (S4220 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4220 in FIG. 65) is a jackpot start command (S5101). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that an ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S5106), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description is continued. In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5003: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a prize ball command (S5003: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter (not shown) (S5004), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S5005), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), received during the period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command is accumulated by the number of prize balls counter. The number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game or during the latent state.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the ball acquired during the period (advantageous duration) from when the time saving state or probability variable state is set until the normal state is set again The accumulated number can be reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period within the advantageous continuation period (a period combining the jackpot game period and the time-saving state period until the next jackpot game is executed, or the probability variable state period) is accumulated. may be configured to be displayed as In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, as described above, when the configuration for cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls obtained within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times the lottery result (jackpot) in which the special pattern lottery result is advantageous to the player is displayed. Or, it may be configured to display the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win) that is advantageous to the player.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, and to play the game enthusiastically. can be done.

Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of special symbols) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided for executing condition achievement notification to indicate that fact, for example, winning a jackpot. The number of times of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of addiction) executed until now may execute condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times exceeds a predetermined number of times (100 times). Further, condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of winning balls obtained within one advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command (effect pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). And, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5305 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302). And special figure 1 button production setting processing (S5303) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 68 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 button production setting processing (S5303). In this special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), the process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as the variation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation this time, and the process for setting the effect mode of the button effect and is executed.

In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), first, information stored in the subordinate state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S5401). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (probability variable state or time saving state) (S5401: No), the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. This is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as the main variable display that is the variable display, and the button effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. Since there is no need, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5401, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is ON (S5402). This special figure 2 button effect flag 223q will be described later in detail, but it is set to ON when the button effect is set based on the special figure 2 fluctuation in the button effect mode setting process (S5303 in FIG. 71) is. In the process of S5402, the special figure 2 button production flag 223q is ON (S5402: Yes), that is, it is determined that the button production is set in the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) In this case, since the button effect of special figure 1 is not newly set, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is not ON (S5402: No), the button effect corresponding to the current special figure variation is selected by referring to the button effect selection table 222c (S5403). . Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect has been selected (the button effect can be executed) by the processing of S5403 (S5404), and when it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5404: Yes), execution timing setting Processing (S5405) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the button effect is not selected (S5404: No), the process of S5405 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, execution timing setting processing (S5405) which is one processing in special figure 1 button effect setting processing (see S5303 in FIG. 68) executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 explain. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this execution timing setting process (S5405). In this execution timing setting process, a process for correcting the execution timing of the button effect set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) is executed.

That is, as in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are configured to be executed at the same time (in parallel), for example, special figure 1 The execution timing of the button effect set based on the variation may be the timing when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit, and the button effect meaningless to the player is executed. I had a problem. Also, in order to solve this problem, during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or if the information indicating the big hit is included in the reservation storage of the special figure 2, the button production is performed with the special figure 1 fluctuation If a restriction is set so as not to execute the button effect, the frequency of execution of the button effect will decrease, which may cause a new problem that the effect of the effect will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the button production corresponding to one special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is set, the other special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) variation situation (lottery situation) is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, it is configured to be able to execute the process of varying the execution timing of the button production corresponding to one special figure fluctuation.

By constructing in this way, when a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the button presentation of the special figure 1 lottery is executed avoiding the timing of informing the player of the lottery result (the stop timing of the big winning pattern). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the execution frequency of the button presentation. In addition, when the button effect of the same mode is executed at a timing different from usual, it gives the player a sense of incompatibility, and the sense of incompatibility can remind the player of a big win (special figure 2 lottery big win). Interest can be improved.

In the execution timing setting process (S5405), first, it is determined whether or not this special figure 1 lottery is a big hit (S5501). When it is determined that this special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot (S5501: No), the winning information of the special figure 2 stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5502). Next, it is determined whether the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the special figure 2 winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b read in the process of S5502 (S5503). When it is determined that there is a jackpot in the special figure 2 winning information (S5503: Yes), the time until the fluctuation (special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation) corresponding to the winning information containing the information indicating the jackpot is started is calculated. (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

In the processing of S5505, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot variation start timing is later than the start timing of the variation (S5505). That is, in the process of S5505, the timing and the timing at which the variation time set to the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time passes, and the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started are determined, and the special figure 1 variation to be performed this time is determined. It is determined whether or not it is necessary to correct the effect mode (execution timing) of the variable effect (button effect) to be performed. In the process of S5505, the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot variation is not later than the timing when the variation time set for the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time elapses, that is, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be performed this time If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started during (S5505: No), the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started is within 15 seconds after the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time is started. (S5506).

In the processing of this S5506, when the button effect set in the special figure 1 variation is executed at normal timing (see FIG. 24), in order to determine whether it overlaps the special figure 2 jackpot variation, the normal button It is determined whether the effect period (10 to 15 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) overlaps with the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation.

In the process of S5506, if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds, even if the normal button production is executed, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is not executed during the button production, so the button production A period predetermined in the selection table 222c is set as a button effect execution period. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, when it is determined that the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is within 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S5506: Yes), the execution timing of the button effect is corrected (variable) A process (S5507) for doing so is executed.

In the process of S5507, the effect information included in the button effect is corrected so that the button effect is executed in a period before the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation start timing. Then, the effect mode (information) after correction is set in the button effect hierarchy storage area (S5507), the special figure 1 button effect flag 23 is set to ON, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not later than the special figure 2 variation (S5505: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot variation start timing is within 15 seconds (S5506: No), the variation start timing is 15 seconds If it is determined that it is not within (S5506: No), the button effect execution period is set in the period before the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation (S5507), and the corresponding area of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m Button effect information is set (S5508), then the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is set to ON (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is not within 15 seconds (S5506: Yes), it is impossible to set the button effect, so this process ends as it is do.

Also, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that this special figure 1 lottery is a big hit (S5501: Yes), or in the process of S5503, if it is determined that there is no big hit in the special figure 2 winning information ( S5503: No), to set the execution period of the button effect in the special figure 1 variation as it is (S5510), the process of S5508 described above. In addition, in the processing of S5505, also when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation start timing is after the variation (S5505: Yes), the processing of S5510 is executed and the processing of S5508 is performed.

As described above, in the execution timing correction process (S5405) in the present embodiment, at the execution timing of the special figure 1 variation, the winning information held by the special figure 2 reservation (the special figure stored in the winning information storage area 223b 2 (winning information corresponding to 2)), determination of whether there is winning information having information indicating a big hit, determination of execution (start) timing of special figure 2 variation corresponding to winning information including information indicating a big hit, Using, during this special figure 1 variation, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed, or the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot variation is determined, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 variation However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations until the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is executed (out of the special figure 2 reservations, the jackpot reservation Based on the special figure 2 pending number digested until the special figure 2 variation is executed), and based on the determination result, during this special figure 1 variation, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed You may comprise so that it may discriminate|determine whether it is.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 lottery (fluctuation) and the special figure 2 lottery (fluctuation) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Without providing a large difference in the variation time of 2, it is configured to evenly execute each special figure lottery (variation), for example, as in the case of the present embodiment, special figure 1 lottery (variation) and special Figure 2 lottery (fluctuation) and, in a gaming machine that can be executed at the same time (in parallel), according to the set game state, one special figure lottery is efficiently executed game state and the other special figure In order to provide a game state in which the lottery is efficiently executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation on the side that makes it difficult to execute the special figure lottery in each game state is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes for the deviation fluctuation, and the hit fluctuation is set to 4 minutes). If you have a configuration that allows you to set the fluctuation time, in the gaming state where the special figure 1 lottery is likely to be executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, or the special that will be executed next time Only by determining whether or not the lottery (variation) in FIG.

Also, in this case, in the gaming state in which the special figure 1 lottery is likely to be executed, the maximum time set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, which is difficult to execute, is a big hit. It is good to set the variation time of each special figure so that it is shorter than the shortest time of the variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed more reliably during the current special figure 1 variation.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. After executing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), next, based on the extracted variation pattern, set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol as the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S5304), 1 is subtracted from the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the process of S5302 to S5305 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5306.

In the processing of S5306, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5306). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5307), based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, the second special A variation pattern command for displaying a symbol is set (S5308), and then special figure 2 button effect setting processing (S5309) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 69 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 button production setting processing (S5309).

In the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (S5601). If it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (that is, the variable probability or the time-saving state) (S5601: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S5601: Yes), whether or not the special figure 1 button production flag 223s is ON, that is, the button production is executed with the variation of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (S5602). When it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is ON (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is a big hit (S5603). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a big win (S5603: No), since there is no need to preferentially execute the button performance of the second special symbol, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S5603: Yes), or in the process of S5602, it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is not ON. If it does (S5602: No), it is the timing when the button effect can be set even in the variation of the second special symbol, so the button effect corresponding to the current variation is selected from the button effect selection table 222c (S5604).

Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect can be executed (S5605). If it is determined that the button effect cannot be executed (S5605: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5605: Yes), the button effect mode setting process (S5606) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the button effect mode setting process (S5606), which is one process in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this button effect mode setting process (S5606). In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), when the button effect is set for both the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the button effect is set according to the priority of the button effect. Execute, and set the button effect if it can be set redundantly.

In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), first, the button effect information set in the button effect layer storage area 223m is read (S5701). It is determined whether or not there is effect information in the area (S5702). If it is determined that the effect information is present in the highest priority area (S5702: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation being executed is a jackpot (S5703). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation being executed is a jackpot (S5703: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot variation being performed is given priority over the button effect in the special figure 2 variation, so this processing as it is exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation being executed is not a jackpot (S5703: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the second special symbol button effect set this time is during the first special symbol button effect period (S5704). When it is determined that it is during the button production period of the first special symbol (S5704: Yes), the overlap button production is performed during the period in which the button production periods of the set first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap. Set (S5705). The overlapping button effect set here is, as described above, when the variation result of the second special symbol is a win, during the period when the button effect of the first special symbol and the button effect of the second special symbol overlap. Set the button effect C. By configuring in this way, the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the execution timing of the button effect is not during the button effect period of the special figure 1 (S5704: No), the button effect is set in the highest priority area (S5706), S5707 , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) is executed within the main processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and is processing for starting effects using the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b and processing for operations. to run. In frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107), button effect start processing (S5801) is first executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 73, the button effect start process (S5801), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this button effect start process (S5801). In this button effect start process (S5801), each button effect information stored in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is read, and when it is time to start the button effect, a process for executing the button effect is executed. be. Further, when executing the button effect with the highest priority (priority 1), a process for discarding the button effect being executed is executed. By executing such processing, it is possible to properly execute a plurality of button effects set at different occasions according to their priorities. Also, only the button effect with the highest priority (button effect with high effect) can be executed without fail even while other button effects are being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In the button effect start process (S5801), first, information is read from the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m (S5901). Next, based on the read information, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the button effect (S5902). In the process of S5902, a plurality of pieces of information stored in a plurality of storage areas (first layer area 223m1 to fourth layer area 223m4) are read out in descending order of priority. Therefore, when the execution timings of the button effects are the same, the button effect with the higher priority is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined that it is time to start the button effect when the button valid period start timing (see FIG. 24) specified in the button effect selection table 222b is reached. However, without being limited to this, for example, a range of two seconds (four seconds) before and after the start timing of the button valid period may be defined as the same timing and determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress complicated execution of button effects when the start timings of a plurality of button effects are stored to be slightly different.

In addition to the contents described above, a plurality of button effects stored at timings in which valid periods set for each button effect overlap may be determined as button effects to be executed at the same timing. good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the processing of S5902, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the button effect (S5902: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to start the button effect (S5902: Yes), the button effect to be started this time is set to priority 1 according to the information in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m read out in the process of S5901. If it is determined that the priority is 1 (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether other button effects are being executed (S5905).

In the process of S5905, if it is determined that other button effects are being executed (S5905: Yes), the button effects of priority 1 are preferentially executed, so button operations for other button effects are disabled. set (S5906), set the button effect flag corresponding to the disabled button effect this time to OFF (S5907), and then set a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the information of priority 1 this time. (S5908), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5905, if it is determined that the other button effects are not being executed (S5905: No), the processes of S5906 to S5907 are skipped because there is no need to disable the other button effects. , S5908.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, if it is determined that the current button effect is not priority 1 (S5903: No), a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the current priority is set (S5904), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description continues. After executing the button effect start process (S5801), next, the button effect update process (S5802) is executed. Now, with reference to FIG. 74, the button effect update process (S5802), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the button effect update process (S5802). In this button effect update process (S5802), a process of updating the value of the button valid timer 223n and setting a display command according to the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the button effect is executed.

In the button effect update process (S5802), first, the value of the button valid timer 223n is read out (S6001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n read in the process of S6001 is greater than 0 (S6002). If the value of the button valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (S6002: No), it means that the current operation valid period does not determine whether the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, so the operation valid period is set. The processing of S6002 to S6009, which is executed when the information is set, is skipped, and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S6002: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding button valid timer 223n (S6003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S6003 is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6004). If it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is not 0 (that is, the value is greater than 0) (S6004: No), the button effect is being executed, so the current value of the button valid timer 223n A corresponding display command is set (S6005). The display mode (remaining period display mode) of the validity period gauge 812a (see FIG. 9A) is generated by the display command set here.

Then, when the process of S6005 is finished, the process proceeds to the second frame button setting process (S6011), which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S6004, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is 0 (S6004: Yes), it is the end timing of the button effect, so the corresponding special symbol button effect flag (first The button effect flag 223p and the second button effect flag 223q) are set to OFF (S6006), and then it is determined whether the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6007). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has operated (depressed) the frame button 22 during the valid period of operation (during the valid period of the button) so as to satisfy the operation condition.

Specifically, if the operation condition of the button effect being executed this time is "perform one operation (press) on the frame button 22", the frame button 22 is pressed once during the operation valid period. When pressed, the operation completion flag 223s is set to ON, and if the operation condition is "operate (press) the frame button 22 50 times", the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 50 times during the operation valid period. ), the operated flag 223s is set to ON. The condition for turning on the operation completion flag 223s is, for example, a predetermined lottery every time the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches a predetermined number of times. A condition that is established when the lottery result is a specific result, a condition that is established when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period, or the like may be set.

In the process of S6007, if it is determined that the operation completion flag 223s is ON (S6007: Yes), a display command corresponding to operation completion (a display command indicating that the button operation during the button effect was successful). is set (S6008), the operation completion flag 223s is set to OFF (S6009), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process ends. Based on the display command set in the process of S6008, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the success screen of the button effect (for example, see FIG. 9B), and the third symbol display device 81 to display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6007, if it is determined that the operation completion flag 223s is not set to ON (S6007: No), the operation is not performed (concept including operation to the extent that the operation condition is not satisfied during the valid operation period). A corresponding display command is set (S6010), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process ends. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S6010, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the button effect failure screen (see FIG. 10) and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the second frame button setting process (S6011), which is one process in the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the second frame button setting process (S6011). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first frame button 22a is normally operated. It is configured so that a button effect is executed. Then, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the overlapping button effects are executed with the second frame button 22b as the operation target. In this second frame button setting process (S6011), various processes for the second frame button 22b relating to duplicate button effects are executed.

In the second frame button setting process (S6011), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the button effect. (S6101). Then, if it is determined that it is time to start the button effect (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start the overlapping button effect (S6102). When it is determined that it is time to start overlapping button effects (S6102: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to ON (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6101 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S6101: No), or if it is determined that it is not the start time of the overlapping button effect in the process of S6102 (S6102: No), Since it is not the timing to enable the second frame button, the process of S6103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6104.

In the processing of S6104, it is determined whether it is time to end the button effect (S6104). If it is determined that it is not the time to end the button effect (S6104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104: Yes), it is determined whether the end timing is the end timing of the overlapping button effect (S6105). If it is determined that it is time to end the overlapping button effect (S6105: Yes), the second frame button enable flag 223r is set to OFF (S6106), and a display command indicating the end of the button effect is set (S6107). ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6105 that it is not the end timing of the overlapping button effect (S6105: No), the process of S6106 is skipped because there is no need to disable the second frame button. The process of S6107 is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description continues. After the button effect update process (S5802) is executed, the button press process is executed (S5803), then other button related processes are executed (S5804), and this process ends.

Now, with reference to FIG. 76, the button depression process (S5803), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this button pressing process (S5803).

In the button pressing process (S5803), first, it is determined whether or not the second frame button valid flag 223r is ON (S6201). If it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is off (S6201: No), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is on, that is, whether the first frame button 22a has been pressed ( S6202). If it is determined that the first frame button 22a has not been pressed (S6202: No), then neither the first frame button 22a nor the second frame button 22b has been operated, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is ON (S6201), it is determined whether or not the second frame button has been pressed (S6203). If it is determined that the second frame button 22b has not been pressed (S6203: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a has been pressed (S6202: Yes) or that the second frame button 22b has been pressed (S6203: Yes), the value of the corresponding press counter 223t is incremented by 1. (S6204). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the depression counter 223t added in the process of S6205 is a predetermined value (S6205). When it is determined that the value of the button pressing counter 223t is the predetermined value (S6205: Yes), the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6206), and a display command corresponding to the post-operation effect is set (S6207). ), the value of the depression counter 223t is cleared to 0 (S6208), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223t is not the predetermined value, a display command corresponding to the counter value is set (S6209), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to win the lottery result (jackpot with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, but it is limited to this. For example, only the lottery of special figure 2, if the lottery result is not a big hit, a privilege different from the big win game may be given to the player in some cases. It may be configured, and as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, winning the jackpot with the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the special figure 1 (for example, a variable state ) may be easily set.

In this case, the types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn according to the set game state are configured to be variable, and when a specific first game state (for example, probability variable state) is set, the second special symbol is set. lottery can be easily executed, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

In addition, as a game state, in order to be able to set a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbols during the latent state, Similarly, even when a normal state, which is a low-probability state of normal patterns, is set, the lottery for the second special pattern can be executed, and in the normal state, the lottery for the second special pattern is frequently executed. In order to suppress this, a configuration may be adopted in which a long (10 minutes) fluctuation time is set.

However, in the gaming machine constructed in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, although the efficiency is low, and if a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is elected with a predetermined lottery result (big hit or small hit) in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is out of the lottery and forced to stop, or It is preferable to configure so as to temporarily stop. As a result, it is possible to set the second special symbol so that it is difficult to win the jackpot when the normal state is set.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. A ball passes through a specific area provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the jackpot game is completed, so that a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. You can

In addition, in this embodiment, three game states (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state) are configured to be settable as game states, but four game states that can be set (normal state, latent probability state, It may be a variable probability state, a time saving state, or two or less.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are simultaneously executed in the normal state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entrance 64b1 is provided in the left region, and a first ball entrance with an electric accessory 640a attached in the right region and a second ball entrance 640 with no electric accessory 640a are provided, and a variable state is provided. It may be configured so that playing a right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player when is set.

When configured in this way, during the normal state, similar to the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation is set so that the variation time shorter than the special figure 2 variation is set easily, and during the latent state is set so that it is easier to set a shorter variation time for special figure 2 variation than for special figure 1 variation, as in the first embodiment described above, and the probability variation state and time saving state are released with the electric accessory 640a. It is better to set it so that it becomes easier.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big win is performed by the drawing of the first special pattern by the left-handed game, and during the time-saving state, the drawing of the first special pattern is performed more efficiently than during the normal state by the right-handed game. A game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a game aiming at a big hit, and a game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a lottery of the first special pattern with a higher probability than a normal state and efficiently by a right-handed game during the variable probability state, and a latent probability. During the state, a right-handed game can be played aiming at a big hit by lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 91. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, the boot processing (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 76). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 78, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S8101. and the processing of S8102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 89(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9502 in FIG. 89A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and simple display setting processing (see S8309 in FIG. 79B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When the instruction to start the variable performance is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the variable pattern command for display is received, the variable image is immediately displayed during the period of the variable performance when the power is turned on. It is possible to display it on and perform a simple variation effect. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79(a). FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 79B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301). If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG.

In the display setting process (S8303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305), 32, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S8306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S8308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S8309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S8304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, the details of the command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 80, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S8403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S8405), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S8405). This variation pattern command processing (S8405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S8503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable performance in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . It should be noted that, for example, when the player operates the operation means or during the variable display of the special symbols, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed (rewritten) based on the effect mode set at another opportunity. When the display rewriting command for display is output, the timing counter 233h to which the time data is set by the processing of S8503 is used to measure the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table, and the corresponding fluctuation A rewriting process is executed to rewrite data subsequent to the display data. In addition, the image data based on the rewritten rendering mode is generated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display rewrite command was received. Thereby, after securing the time required for the rewriting process, it is possible to reliably execute the effect after the rewriting. Also, without being limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, all of the effects that can be executed during the variation (predetermined number), that is, the game In the case where the effect mode in which the player operates the operation means is executed, the effect executed when the player properly operates the operation means and the effect executed when the player does not properly operate the operation means are executed. In addition, information indicating the effect to be executed when the number of special reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the change is included, and it is necessary in the variable display data table corresponding to each effect information Such sprite image data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. may be configured to determine the image data to be displayed. Furthermore, in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of variation of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the effect that can be performed during the variation is performed in different layers (layers), and each layer By setting and controlling a visible state in which the player can visually recognize and a non-visible state in which the player cannot visually recognize, it may be possible to make it appear that only a specific effect is being executed.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a stop type command for display (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S8601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S8602 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to ON (S8603) and returns to command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S8602. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S8601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S8602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If there is an opening command (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the opening command processing (S8409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 82(b). FIG. 82(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8412). If there is an ending command (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the ending command process (S8413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S8414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to independently (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. , When one of the special symbols is stopped (fixed) in a pattern indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during fluctuation is displayed at the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of , it is configured to forcibly stop display with a symbol indicating the disconnection.

And, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) is executed. , a display command (forced stop command).

In this embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute a stop indication based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the display fluctuation stop command includes a display command indicating temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113. When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S8931). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S8932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the display notification If there is a command (S8416: Yes), the notification command process for display is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the notification command process (S8415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 84(b). FIG. 84(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S8951). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the processing of S8416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the back image change command process (S8419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S9002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S9001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S9002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S9002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S8418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8420). If (S8420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8421), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the error command processing (S8421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S9102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8416 that there is no error command (S8420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8422), and the process returns to the process of S8401. In addition, in the processing of S8422, command processing for various display commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. For example, when a display command for varying the timing of execution of a specific effect is received, processing for varying the execution timing of a specific effect already defined in the variable display data table based on the clock data. is executed. Also, the variation display of the 3rd pattern regarding the special figure 1 variation and the variation display of the 3rd pattern regarding the special figure 2 variation, which is the main variation display and which is the sub-variation display for display When a command is received, determine the received command, determine whether it is different from the setting status (association) currently being executed, and if it is determined to be different, set based on the variation pattern command of each special figure variation A process of switching the display data table to be used for the main fluctuation display and for the subordinate fluctuation display is executed.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), and the processing of S8402 to S8422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S8401 to S8422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 81(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S9202 to S9204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S9205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S9201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S9202), S9203-S9204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S9203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S9203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S9301).

In the task processing (S8304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S9301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S9204), or if it is determined in the process of S9203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S9203: No), the process proceeds to S9205.

In S9205, pointer update processing is executed (S9205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S9402). As a result, if it is End information (S9402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S9403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9206). In the task processing (S8304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S9206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like. , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S9209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S9210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S9215, the stop design of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S9209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S9216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S9216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S9216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S9216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, details of the transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 89(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S9501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S9502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S9501, that is, if it is turned off (S9501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S9502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S9601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9602). In the process of S9602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S9602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S9602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9602: Yes), the process proceeds to S9603. Also, as a result of the processing of S9601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9601: No), the process proceeds to S9603.

In the process of S9603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S9603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S9603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 79B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is carried out to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 90) (see S9501: No in FIG. 89A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S9503), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9205) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9703), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S9704), and the process proceeds to S9705.

Also, in the process of S9702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S9702: No), the process of S9703 and S9704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9705. In the process of S9705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9706).

In the process of S9706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9706 that the transfer process has not ended (S9706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9706: Yes), the process proceeds to S9707. Also, as a result of the process of S9705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9705: No), the process proceeds to S9707.

In the processing of S9707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9707). is turned off (S9708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S9713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S9707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S9709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on, but off (S9709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S9709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S9712), and the process proceeds to S9713.

In the process of S9713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713). The determination in the process of S9713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9713 (S9713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9713 (S9713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S9714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9715), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of the drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), a drawing list (FIG. 32) is generated (S9801). That is, in the process of S9801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S9802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is done each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 109. FIG. Compared to the first embodiment, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the storage area for storing the priority of the effect to be executed is changed, and the priority is also given to effects other than button effects (for example, display effects). , adding a pending effect that is executed when a new pending pattern is acquired, adding a function that allows the player to select restrictions on the effect to be executed, , and the electrical configuration and processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 are different in order to deal with the above-described differences.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the fluctuation of each special symbol It was configured so that button effects can be set as effects. Then, in order to suppress the overlapping execution of the button effects set by another opportunity (the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1 and the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 2), A priority for executing the button performance is given to the button performance, and the button performance is executed based on the given priority. As a result, even if the button performances are set at overlapping timings, the button performance having a high priority can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with a performance that is easy to understand.

In addition to this, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the button effect when the held ball is acquired. As a result, the opportunities for setting the button effects are increased, so that more button effects can be provided to the player.

Also, in the above-described first embodiment, during the execution of the button effect (first button effect) set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a specific button effect (second button effect) as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed, a redundant button effect (special button effect) combining the first button effect and the second button effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure and the execution timing of the button effect set based on the acquisition of the reserved ball overlapped. Also in this case, the overlapping button effects (special button effects) are configured to be executed. As a result, even during the execution of the variable performance for showing the lottery result of the special figure, the player can be motivated to play the game to acquire a new reserved ball.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it is configured to give priority to effects other than button effects (for example, notice effects executed during variation effects of special symbols). As a result, it is possible to manage the presence or absence of execution of the button effect and the notice effect for which the execution timing is set to be the same.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the number of storage areas for storing information related to each effect to which priority is given is increased, and the player can select the range of the storage area used for executing the effect. It consists of By configuring in this way, the quality (priority) and amount of the effect to be executed can be adjusted, so that the effect desired by each individual player can be provided.

<Regarding the flow of production in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95, the content of the characteristic presentation performed in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a button effect (8-piece pending effect) is executed when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit number (8), and FIG. During the execution of the button effect (button effect A) as a variable effect, a duplicate button effect (super 8 pending effect) is executed based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaching a predetermined number. It is a timing chart. FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are schematic diagrams showing the effect contents of the button effect (reserved effect) executed based on the acquisition of the reserved ball of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is configured to be able to hold and store up to 4 pieces of winning information, and the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be held and stored up to 4 pieces. Configure. Then, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged at the lower position of the game area, and the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 is the first ball entrance where the winning information of the special figure 1 can be obtained. 64b1 and the left second entrance 64b2 that can acquire the prize information of the special figure 2 are configured to be alternately distributed.

Therefore, in the normal state where the game (left-handed game) aiming at the entering ball unit 64 is performed, the maximum number of reserved balls with special symbols (retained balls that are the sum of the reserved balls of special figure 1 and the reserved balls of special figure 2) A game in which 8 can be obtained is played. Then, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches eight, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the eight reserved balls (see FIG. 94(a) ) is configured to execute a button effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to acquire eight reserved memories of special symbols.

As shown in Figure 92, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed, and the number of special figure reserved balls (the sum of the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls ) is "6" (the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "3" and the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "3"), the ball flows into the ball entering unit 64 and enters the first ball entering port 64b1. When the ball enters the ball, the number of special figure reserved balls becomes "7" (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3"). After that, if the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 enters the second left ball entrance 64b2 before a new special figure variation (lottery) is executed, the number of special figure pending balls will be "8" (special figure The number of 1 reserved balls is "4", and the number of special 2 reserved balls is "4").

In this embodiment, when the number of special figure pending balls reaches the upper limit value (8), the result of prefetching each prize information that is reserved and stored (for the acquired prize information, the special figure lottery using that prize information 94) is executed to suggest to the player the result of the preliminary determination performed before the execution of the first frame button 22a. A button effect (usually 8 pending effects) for operating is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the normal 8-holding effect executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the normal 8-piece pending effect is executed, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed after operating a first frame button 22a;

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the normal 8 reserved effect is executed, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As in the first embodiment described above, the number of special figure reserved balls (the sum of the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is a predetermined number (in this embodiment, the upper limit number "8 ”) is displayed in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a of the main display area Dm. Then, when the special figure pending number reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 94(a), it is displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds. The reserved patterns h1 to h8 are displayed in order of the oldest reserved memory, and although not shown, the reserved pattern displayed is the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, or the reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation The symbol is displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify whether it is a symbol or not.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the ball that has flowed into the ball unit 64 can acquire the winning information of the special figure 1 and the winning information of the special figure 2 from the first ball entrance 64b1. Since it is configured to be alternately distributed to the left second entrance 64b2, when the game state is the normal state, basically, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special The pending symbols corresponding to FIG. 2 pending are alternately displayed. However, both the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls are set with the upper limit number to be stored and stored, and the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are different fluctuation times configured to be executed.

Therefore, for example, in the state of 3 special figure 1 pending, 3 special figure 2 pending, long time (for example, 90 seconds) variation time is set as special figure 1 variation, the long variation By the end of the Toku-zu 2 variation multiple times (eg, 3 times) may occur. In such a situation, the number of special figures pending stored will be greatly different between special figures 1 and 2, and according to the above example, special figures 1 pending "2", special figures FIG. 2 Pending '0' situations occur. Then, in this situation, if the ball continues to flow into the entering ball unit 64 and the number of special figure reserved balls is increased, when the special figure 1 reservation reaches the upper limit number (4), the value of the special figure 2 reservation is " 2” occurs. In this case, if the ball is continuously entered into the ball entry unit 64, even if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 reaches the upper limit, A new special figure 1 reserved ball cannot be acquired, and special figure 2 reserved balls will be acquired continuously. As a result, in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third design display device 81, the reserved design indicating the special figure 2 reservation is displayed continuously.

In this way, a pachinko machine having a configuration in which it is possible to alternately acquire (hold and store) the special figure 1 reservation (winning information corresponding to the special figure 1) and the special figure 2 reservation (winning information corresponding to the special figure 2) 10, depending on the number of retained balls acquired and the variation time of the special figure variation to be executed, the retained symbols displayed in the order of retention storage alternately display special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension. Even if it becomes a state where it is not held, the player can easily grasp the type of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern by looking at the display mode of the reservation pattern, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to execute the production (holding production) using the reserved pattern indicating the number of special figure reserved balls, but the reservation production Another condition may be provided as an execution condition of, for example, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of reserved symbols indicating special figure reservation of the same type are displayed side by side, the reserved effect is executed. Alternatively, the reservation performance may be executed based on the combination of the order of the special figure types indicated by each reserved design and the number of displayed reserved designs (special figure reserved storage number).

By configuring in this way, when either the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 or the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the shooting of the balls is stopped, and the operation of the game is lowered. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 94(a), the description is continued. Suspended patterns h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds are formed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds each time the special figure variation is started, to the running display area Ds1a. The special figure is displayed so that the player can grasp the display form of the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation currently being executed (the display form changed by the reserved performance until the special figure fluctuation is executed). Variation is performed. By constructing in this way, the performance result of the reserved performance and the performance result of the variation performance executed corresponding to the special figure variation are analyzed in a complex manner, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is predicted to the player. can be made easier.

When the normal 8 reserved effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds is a preparation display prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a. It is displayed in a variable manner (a display mode imitating the first frame button 22a). Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a eight times is displayed, and the first frame button 22a, which is the operation target in the normal eight-hold effect, is displayed. A simulated button 812 is displayed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed during the normal 8-piece pending effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the player presses the first frame button 22a during this normal 8 reserved effect, the display mode of the reserved pattern h1 is first changed from the preparation display mode to the suggestive display mode (see FIG. 94(b)). Then, the display mode is variably displayed in the order of reserved symbols h2 to h8. Next, with reference to FIG. 94(b), the effect result contents of the normal 8 pending effect will be described.

In the normal 8-piece pending effect, when the player operates the first frame button 22a, a suggestive display mode is displayed that can suggest to the player the look-ahead result of each winning information corresponding to each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8. . This suggestive display mode suggests that the information indicating the big win is included in the target winning information, and a plurality of displays with different easiness of selection when the information indicating the big win is included. The mode (color) is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, a display mode of "white→blue→green→red" is defined in order of difficulty of selection when information indicating a big win is included (the degree of expectation for a big win is low). In other words, the reserved pattern displayed in the "white" display mode as the production result of the normal 8 reserved production is displayed in the "red" display mode because it is difficult to win a big hit in the special drawing lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern. The held design is constituted so as to easily win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery corresponding to the reserved design.

As a result, by grasping the effect result of the normal 8 pending effects before the special figure fluctuation is actually executed, a specific reserved pattern (for example, the display mode of "red" is displayed even before the special figure lottery is executed. A game can be played with expectation for a big hit with respect to the reserved symbols displayed in . Therefore, it is possible to keep the player looking forward to the big win for a longer period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal 8 reserved effect of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a) is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved symbols h1 to h8. However, the number of times to operate the first frame button 22a is not limited to this, and may be set to a number less than or greater than the number of reserved symbols. Here, when the number of operations less than the number of displayed pending symbols is set, a suggestive display mode of suggesting the result of prefetching of the winning information held and stored is a suggestive display with a high expectation for a big win. The reserved patterns h1 to h8 may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of operations in the order in which the mode is set, or the reserved patterns h1 to h8 may be operated in the order in which the suggestive display mode with the low expectation of the big hit is set. It is also possible to variably display only the number corresponding to the number of times.

Further, when the number of times of operation is set to be larger than the number of reserved symbols being displayed, the suggestive display mode of one reserved symbol may be variably displayed a plurality of times. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94(a), all the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are configured to be displayed in the same display mode as the preparation display mode for the normal 8 reserved effect. By making it difficult to predict the content of the suggestive display mode until the player presses the first frame button 22a, an effect is executed to force the player to actively press the first frame button 22a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that allows the player to predict the display mode of the suggestive display mode by the display mode of the preparation display mode may be used, and a plurality of display colors of the preparation display mode may be used. It may be configured to be settable so that the display color of the displayed preparation display mode suggests the display mode of the suggested display mode. For example, when the display color of the preparation display mode is "green", it is preferable to configure so that the suggestive display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed when the first frame button 22a is pressed. With such a configuration, the player can press the first frame button 22a in a state of anticipation of a big win, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is configured to be variably displayed based on the result of prefetching of the corresponding winning information. It is also possible to variably display the display mode of the entire reserved symbols h1 to h8 based on the result of pre-reading of all winning information. In this case, for example, among the reserved patterns h1 to h8, using the display mode of the reserved patterns h1 to h4, the jackpot type when winning the jackpot (game state set after the jackpot game ends and the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is suggested, and the display modes of the remaining reserved symbols h5 to h8 are used to set the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 so as to suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display one suggestion target content by combining the display modes of a plurality of reserved symbols, so that more detailed suggestion information can be provided to the player. In addition, by variably displaying the display modes of all reserved patterns, the player is notified of the effect result of the reserved effect, so that the player can be motivated to operate the first frame button 22a until the end.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which only one operation means (first frame button 22a) is used as the operation means for the player to operate in the normal 8-piece pending effect. , As a preparation display mode corresponding to a reserved symbol in which a suggestive display mode (red) indicating a high expectation of a big hit is displayed, a preparation display mode indicating that an operating means (second frame button 22b) different from usual is operated is displayed. However, the second frame button 22b may be operated when the display mode of the reserved symbol is variably displayed. As a result, a plurality of types of operation means can be operated in one performance (usually, 8 pending performances), so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win can be varied according to the type of operation means, it is possible to make the player interested in which operation means to operate the effect will be executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of operation means, the operation means capable of accepting the operation of variably displaying the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are set so that the player cannot easily identify them. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not to variably display the reserved symbols h1 to h8 according to the operating means operated by the player. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of allowing the player to select the operating means for performing the operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the button effect executed based on the special figure variation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure reserved balls (8 pending effects) are executed in duplicate. The flow of game contents in this case will be explained. FIG. 93 shows the flow of the effect when the button effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure pending balls (8 pending effects) are executed in duplicate. It is a timing chart shown. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 1st control example mentioned above about the content of the button production|presentation performed based on a special figure fluctuation|variation, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, when the number of special pending balls reaches 8, a button effect using the pending patterns h1 to h8 (usually 8 pending effects) is executed. It consists of In addition to this, while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the reserved patterns h1 to h8 are used under looser conditions (the number of special figure reserved balls reaches 7) than the normal 8 reserved effect. It is configured so that the button effect that has been used is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game even while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure variation.

As shown in FIG. 93, while the button effect (button effect A (operation target is the first frame button 22a)) is being executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of special figure pending balls (special figure 1 pending When the value obtained by adding the number of pending memories and the number of pending memories of special figure 2 pending) reaches 7 (see FIG. 93 (a)), instead of button effect A, super pending effect is executed (Fig. 95(a)). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the effect contents of the super suspension effect will be described. There is, and FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect result of the super hold effect.

This super pending effect is a pending effect executed by taking over the effect mode of the button effect A (see FIG. 9A) being executed, and as shown in FIG. A sleeping character 811 is displayed in the same manner as in the button effect A, and an effect is executed in which the operation means (the second frame button 22b) is hit repeatedly in order to wake up the character 811.例文帳に追加Suggestive modes 811a to 811d appear from the character 811 each time the second frame button 22b is pressed. The suggestion modes 811a to 811d are set based on the result of prefetching of the prize information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds in the same manner as the above-described normal eight reserved effects. It is a suggestive mode that suggests a suggestive display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Then, when the second frame button 22b is repeatedly hit and the character 811 stands up, as shown in FIG. It is displayed as a suggestive display mode showing the degree of expectation for the big hit of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. In this way, in the super pending effect, since the suggesting modes 811a to 811d are configured to be displayed for the normal eight pending effects described above, it is not possible to know which pending pattern corresponds to which suggesting mode. , the display mode (color) that can be displayed as the suggestive display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 can be notified in advance to the player.

Therefore, when information (for example, red) indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is displayed as a suggestive mode, the player is eagerly expecting that the suggested display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 will be displayed in red. The 2-frame button 22b can be operated. In this embodiment, all modes displayed as suggested modes 811a to 811d are configured so as not to shift to suggested display modes of reserved symbols h1 to h7. As a result, for example, even if a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is not selected as the suggestive display mode of the reserved symbols set based on the result of the look-ahead of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7, Since the display mode (red) in which the degree of expectation for a big win is simulated can be displayed as the suggestive mode 811, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to let the player know that the super pending effect has been executed by switching to the button effect A, the operation means (the first frame button 22a) to be operated for the button effect A and the super The operation means (the second frame button 22b) to be operated in the pending effect are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same operation means is operated in all button effects. can be configured to

In this way, when one button effect is being executed and another button effect (a button effect that is executed with priority (higher priority) than the button effect being executed) is executed, By constructing so as to execute overlapping (fusion) performance (super suspension performance) that takes over the performance contents of the button performance being executed, the performance contents of the button performance are suddenly switched and the performance is difficult for the player to understand. can be suppressed.

Also, even if a button effect with a higher priority than the button effect being executed is realized with a different trigger (a trigger that is not fulfilled at the start timing of the button effect being executed), the button with the higher priority Since the performance can be reliably executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96-99. The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the second embodiment, when setting the presence or absence of the execution of the holding effect using the reserved design and the effect mode of the holding effect, as compared with the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a referenced pending effect selection table 223aa and a simultaneous effect enable/disable setting area 223ab referred to when determining whether or not to simultaneously execute respective effects given the same priority are added. ing. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the second embodiment, priority is given to various advance notice effect contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 223a. Thus, in the above-described first embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects to be executed are determined based on the priority given to each button effect. In the second embodiment, in addition to the button effect, various notice effects set based on the special figure fluctuation (for example, comment effects, mini character effects, etc.) It is configured such that priority is given to performances that are executed so as to be completed in a specific period (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

By configuring in this way, the button effect and the notice effect are executed in duplicate, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand (for example, when the effect of the button effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win is displayed). At approximately the same timing, a production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed as a result of the announcement production, or the same character that appears in the button production appears in the announcement production, and the character that appeared It is possible to further suppress the execution of an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether it is for the effect.

The reserved effect selection table 223aa is a data table referred to when setting whether or not to execute a reserved effect using a reserved symbol and the effect mode of the reserved effect. It is referred to in the special pending effect processing (see S4523 in FIG. 104) of the pending ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 103) executed when the command is received (S6309 in FIG. 104). Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the pending effect selection table 223aa will be described.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending effect selection table 223aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97, the pending effect selection table 223aa is included in the current number of pending balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) and winning information to be produced. Based on the success/failure determination information and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223v, an effect pattern to be executed (an effect mode of the pending effect) and a priority are defined.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "1 to 3" and the hit/fail judgment information indicates "hit", The acquired value of the second effect counter 223v is specified in the range of "0 to 39" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "40 to 99" , effect pattern “suspension A”, and priority “2” are defined. On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 94". Display)” is defined, and the effect pattern “Hold A” and priority “3” are defined in the range of “94 to 99”.

Next, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "4 to 5" and the hit/fail judgment information indicates "hit", the acquired The value of the second effect counter 223v is defined in the range of "0 to 59" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "60 to 84", the effect A pattern "hold B" and a priority "2" are defined, and an effect pattern "button hold A" and a priority "1" are defined in the range of "85 to 99". On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v within the range of "0 to 89" indicates "do not execute pending effect" ("-" in FIG. 97). Display)” is defined, the effect pattern “hold B” and priority “2” are defined in the range “90 to 94”, and the effect pattern “button hold A” is defined in the range “95 to 99”. , priority "3" is defined.

Finally, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "6, 7" and the win/loss determination information indicates "hit", the acquired The value of the second effect counter 223v is defined in the range of "0 to 29" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "30 to 69", the effect The pattern "hold C" and priority "1" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and priority "3" are defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v within the range of "0 to 79" is set to "do not execute pending effect" ("-" in FIG. 97). Display)” is defined, the effect pattern “hold C” and priority “2” are defined in the range “80 to 97”, and the effect pattern “button hold A” is defined in the range “98 to 99”. , priority "1" is defined.

The simultaneous production permission/inhibition setting area 223ab is a storage area that is referred to when determining whether or not to simultaneously execute each production given the same priority, and a special operation ( When the effect switching operation) is performed, information indicating whether or not simultaneous effect execution is possible is stored. Here, if information indicating that the simultaneous effect is not executed is stored, it is stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab1 (see FIG. 99(a)) of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, which will be described later. Control is performed so that an effect referring to only the effect information that is present is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the second embodiment, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is replaced with the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. is provided, a production level storage area 223ae is provided, and a simultaneous production prohibition flag 223f is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect layer storage area group 223aa is a storage area for temporarily storing effect information set in various processes of the sound lamp control device 113 according to assigned priority. Here, the contents of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 98(b) shows each memory defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is a schematic diagram which showed an area typically. Also, FIGS. 99(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams for explaining the flow of storing the set effect information.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is composed of a first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. . Each storage area (223ab to 223ad) has a storage area (area) capable of storing performance information of different priorities (priority 1 to priority 4) (see FIG. 98(b)). .

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is provided as a storage area for storing effect information for indicating effects set in each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the priority was configured to be able to store one performance information with a priority of "1", two performance information with a priority of "2", and one performance information with a priority of "3". The embodiment is different in that it is possible to store up to three pieces of performance information with priorities of "1" to "4".

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the flow of processing for storing effect information in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99(a) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, FIG. 99(b) shows the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99c) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ad of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. ing.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a total of 12 areas for storing set effect information (see FIGS. 99(a) to (c)). , at least four processes for setting performance information with priority (FIG. 99(d)). Then, the effects (effects with priority) set in each process shown in FIG. be.

The set effect information is stored (stored) in storage areas indicating corresponding priorities in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. That is, for example, when an effect with a priority level of "2" is set, first, it is determined whether or not effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect level storage area 223ab. , the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab. On the other hand, if the effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect level storage area 223ab, then it is checked whether effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ac2 of the second effect level storage area 223ac. After that, the same processing is executed for the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad.

When the performance information is already stored in the storage area of the corresponding priority level of the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad (when the number of performance information is set exceeding the storable number), the performance set this time Configured to discard information. In addition, without being limited to this, the oldest effect information may be determined and the effect information to be discarded may be determined based on the determination result, or the effect may be stored in a storage area with a lower priority than the set priority. It may be configured to store information. In this case, for example, the priority of the set effect information may be changed to the priority corresponding to the stored storage area, or the original priority of the effect information stored in the different priority storage areas may be changed. may be temporarily stored, and when the storage area corresponding to the original priority becomes empty, the effect information may be stored in a predetermined storage area.

As shown in FIG. 99(d), in the second embodiment, as a production that can be given priority, a button production can be set based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery. , Special figure 2 variation button effect, special figure variation display effect, holding change effect (various effects selected by holding effect selection table 222aa), and in each process, set The storage areas capable of storing the performance information are made different. Specifically, the effect information indicating the button effect set as the special figure 1 variable button effect is stored in the priority 1 area to the priority 3 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab1, and the special figure 2 Effect information indicating the button effect set as the variable button effect is an area that can store the priority 1 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab and the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac.

In addition, effect information indicating various advance notice effects set as display effects for special figure fluctuation can be stored in the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. Effect information indicating the pending effect (display effect, button effect) set as the effect for pending change is the priority 2 area to priority 4 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. The area becomes a memorizable area.

In this way, by varying the range of the storage area (storage area) in which the performance information indicating the performance is stored according to the setting trigger of various performances to which the priority is assigned, a predetermined regularity is provided. It is possible to execute a production.

The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is a flag for indicating a state in which the effects given with the same priority are not to be executed redundantly, and is a state in which the effects with the same priority are not to be executed redundantly. It is set to ON when This simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be arbitrarily changed by the player. ), the setting is variably set based on the contents of the player's operation on the operating means (S6605, S6606 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the effects with the same priority are executed in duplicate. Therefore, a player who wants to experience various effects sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae to OFF, and a player who wants to experience a simple effect sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae to ON. Since a desired effect is executed only by playing the game, a game suitable for the player can be easily provided.

In the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is used to enable selection of the execution mode of the effect from two types. , in the effect level storage area group 223aa, the effect level (effect level 1) at which the effect using only the effect information stored in the first effect level storage area 223ab is executed, and the first effect level storage area 223ab. , a performance level (performance level 2) at which a performance using only the performance information stored in the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac is executed, and stored in the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac and the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad. The effect level (effect level 4) at which the effect using the specified effect information is executed, and the priority 1 area and the priority 2 area among the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. A performance level (performance level 5) at which performance using stored performance information is executed, and a priority 3 area and a priority 4 area among the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad. A player may select an arbitrary performance level from among a plurality of performance levels, such as a performance level (performance level 6) at which performance is executed using performance information stored in the .

When configured in this manner, for example, when the performance level 6 is selected, it is possible to easily execute a performance that is normally difficult to be executed by a performance with a high priority, so that a performance different from the usual is played. It can be easily provided to a person, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is divided into a plurality of storage areas (first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad) and priority levels 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect based on the above-described effect level simply by limiting the range of the storage area to be read when executing the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the content of restrictions on the effect to be executed, when setting the effect, the same processing (processing for setting the effect mode) is configured to be executed, and after setting the effect mode , Even if the range (performance level) of the performance to be executed by the player is variably set, the performance corresponding to the performance range (performance level) after the variable setting can be executed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that when setting the performance mode of various performances, the range of performance to be executed (performance level) is discriminated, and whether or not to set the performance mode is determined based on the determination result. This makes it possible to reduce the processing for setting the effect mode.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a special effect mode is set as a high-priority effect (for example, a priority level 1 effect), a low-priority effect related to the special effect mode When a performance (for example, a special related performance with a priority of 4) is set in a storage area, the special related performance is executed with priority over performances stored in other priority 1 to 3 areas. configured so that it is possible.

In this way, an effect with a low execution frequency (a low-priority effect) can be executed in association with a high-priority effect, thereby providing the player with an effect that is difficult to execute independently , can enhance the performance effect. Further, by correcting the execution timing of the special-related performance with a low priority before the execution timing of the special-related performance with a high priority, when the special-related performance is executed, the special performance is executed after this. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In this case, as the setting (execution) condition of the special effect, a low-priority effect is executed for the player by stipulating a condition that is satisfied when (or will) win a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols. It is possible to enhance the performance effect at the time of

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 109, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. In the second embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the RAM initial value setting process (see S4010 in FIG. 57) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 57) of the audio ramp control device 113, Button effect initial setting processing (see S4012 in FIG. 100) is added and executed, and instead of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 60), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252 in FIG. 101 See) is replaced with the special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61), and the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (see S4254 in FIG. 102) is replaced with the number of pending balls process (see S4208 in FIG. 63) 63) is replaced with variable display setting processing (see S4112 in FIG. 67), and variable display setting processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 105) is replaced with button pressing processing (see S4112 in FIG. 67). 76), button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108) is executed. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the content of the button effect initial setting process (S4012) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the button effect initialization process (S4012). In the second embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an operating means (effect setting switch) at a position (for example, the back of the pachinko machine 10) that can be operated by the hall clerk but not by the player. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the effect setting switch is turned on, setting information indicating prohibition of simultaneous effect is stored in the simultaneous effect permission/inhibition setting area 222aa. Then, in this button effect initial setting process (S4012), when the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the simultaneous effect is executed based on the setting information stored in the simultaneous effect permission/inhibition setting area 222aa. is executed.

Specifically, when the button effect initial setting process (S4012) is executed, the setting information of the simultaneous effect enable/disable setting area 222aa is read (S4031), and if the read setting information is the setting information indicating simultaneous effect prohibition, The simultaneous effect prohibition flag is set to ON, and if the setting information does not prohibit the simultaneous effect, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag is set to OFF (S4032). By configuring in this way, the initial setting state regarding the simultaneous effect in the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hall staff is configured to be able to operate the effect setting switch provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, A performance setting switch is arranged at a position (for example, inside a sealed base case) where the hall staff cannot operate it, and whether or not to execute simultaneous performance for each type of pachinko machine 10 can be set without varying it. may be configured. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the same performance mode, and having different special symbol jackpot probabilities and jackpot types (so-called pachinko machines 10 with different specifications) can perform a large number of performances. A pachinko machine 10 desired to be executed (for example, a pachinko machine 10 with a low jackpot probability) is set to enable simultaneous performance, and a pachinko machine 10 that is not desired to execute many performances (for example, a jackpot probability is high). In the pachinko machine 10) that is set, it is preferable to set the simultaneous effect to be unexecutable.

By configuring in this way, without changing the contents of processing for setting various effects of the sound lamp control device 113, the amount of effects executed according to the length of the special symbol jackpot interval on the design value can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted to Further, by operating the effect setting switch, it is possible to set not only the presence or absence of execution of the simultaneous effect, but also the range to be read when various effects are executed out of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to easily adjust the amount of performance to be executed according to the length of the jackpot interval between the special symbols on the design value.

In addition, as described above, when the effect setting switch is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and the effect amount executed by the pachinko machine 10 is limited, an operation for selecting the effect amount by the player, which will be described later, is performed. (See FIG. 109) may be constructed so as to be executed within the limited effect amount.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 101 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (Figure 4252). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) is different from the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). ), the effect modes to which priority is given are stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, but the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) is executed, first, the same S4301 to S4302 processing as the above-described special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is performed, then variation By referring to the pattern selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (announcement effect, etc.) is selected (S4321). Here, in the process of S4321, the information indicating the result of the determination, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (the value is periodically updated) included in the received variation pattern command. Based on the value of random number), various effects (details of the advance notice effect, presence/absence of button effects), execution timings, and priorities are set.

When the processing of S4321 is completed, the effect mode (notice effect, etc.) with priority is extracted from the effect mode selected this time (S4322), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is sent to the corresponding mode. The priority level 2 area to priority level 4 area are set (stored) in the effect layer storage areas (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) (S4323). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the process of S4322 is the display effect for the special figure variation (see FIG. 99(d)), the effect information is stored within the storage range as shown in FIG. are the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4323 is finished, the same processing of S4304 to S4306 as the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S4254) will be described. Figure 102 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S4254) is different from the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61). etc.), the difference is that the processing for storing the effect mode to which the priority is given in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) is executed, first, the same S4351 to S4352 processing as the above-described special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) is performed, and then the variation pattern By referring to the selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (announcement effect, etc.) is selected (S4371). Here, in the process of S4371, the information indicating the result of the judgment contained in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (the value is periodically updated) Based on the value of random number), various effects (details of the advance notice effect, presence/absence of button effects), execution timings, and priorities are set.

When the process of S4371 is completed, the effect mode (notice effect, etc.) with priority is extracted from the effect mode selected this time (S4372). The priority level 2 area to priority level 4 area are set (stored) in the effect layer storage areas (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) (S4373). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the processing of S4372 is the display effect for the special figure variation (see FIG. 99(d)), the effect information is stored within the storage range as shown in FIG. are the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4373 is finished, the same processing of S4354 to S4356 as the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 61) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the pending ball count process 2 (S4258) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count process 2 (S4258). This pending ball number processing 2 (S4258) is different from the above-described pending ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. The difference is that the process of selecting the pending effect is executed when the upper limit value is not reached. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processing of S4501 to S4504 as the above-described reserved ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. 63) is executed. Here, in the processing of S4503, if it is determined that the number of pending balls (the number of special pending balls) is not the upper limit value (8) (S4503: No), special pending effect processing is executed (S4523), and S4507 , and terminate this process. Details of the special holding effect processing executed in S4523 will be described later with reference to FIG. A holding effect selection process in the case is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the pending effect in the processing of S4504 (S4504: Yes), then the effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending effect is set using the pending effect selection table 223aa (S4521) and set. Information (effect information) indicating the effect mode of the pending effect is set (stored) in the corresponding storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 222aa (S4522), the process proceeds to S4507, and this process ends.

Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the effect mode set in the process of S4521 is the effect for change to hold (see FIG. 99(d)), as shown in FIG. 99(d), the effect information is the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the special holding effect processing (S4523) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special holding effect processing (S4523). This special pending effect process (S4523) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the number of pending balls is not the upper limit (8) in the number of pending balls process 2 (S4258 in FIG. 103). This is a process for setting a pending effect. That is, it is a process for setting the pending effect when the number of special figure pending balls is not the upper limit value.

When the special holding effect processing (Fig. 4523) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect is being executed (S6301), and if it is determined that it is being executed (S6301: Yes), then , It is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect being executed is the button effect stored in the priority 1 area (S6302). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is priority 1 (S6302: Yes), it is not possible to execute a new pending effect during that period, so this process ends as it is do.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is not priority 1 (S6302: No), (S6303), and if it is determined to be "7" (S6303: Yes), the priority level 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is stored. It is determined whether the effect information is already stored (S6304), and if it is determined that the effect information is not stored (S6304: No), the information (effect information) indicating the special pending effect (super pending effect) is It is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S6304, if it is determined that the effect information is already stored in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab (S6304: Yes), the effect information to be preferentially executed is set. Since it is in the state of being held, this process is terminated without executing this suspension effect (super suspension effect). Also, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect is not being executed in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), or if it is determined that the number of pending balls is not 7 in the process of S6303 (S6303: No) , S6306, and selects (determines) whether or not to execute a pending effect and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the pending effect based on the pending effect selection table 223aa.

Then, as a result of the process of S6306, when the pending effect is selected (S6307), the information (effect information) indicating the determined pending effect is set in the corresponding storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6308). ), the process ends. Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the pending effect set (determined) in the process of S6306 is the effect for the pending change (see FIG. 99(d)), as shown in FIG. 99(d), The storage range of the performance information is the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad.

As described above, in the second embodiment, regardless of the presence or content of various effects set at other opportunities, various effects are set at each trigger, and selection ( Various effects set) are set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and among a plurality of effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, only effects that satisfy execution conditions are selected. configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute determination processing when setting various effects (processing for determining the setting state of effects in other occasions), so the processing load can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). This variable display setting process 2 (S4162) is, for the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), an effect for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation The difference is that mode setting processing (S5321 (S5322)) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 106, the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S5321) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process (S5321). This production mode setting process (S5321) is, in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 105), when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S5301: Yes), When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S5306: Yes), it corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation A process that is executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance to be performed, and at the timing of starting the variation of each special figure, the performance that satisfies the execution condition among the various performance information stored in the performance hierarchy storage area group 223aa. This is a process for setting an effect mode based on information (high-priority effect information).

When the effect mode setting process (S5321) is executed, first, the effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is read (S6401), and the related effect setting process is executed (S6402). Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the related effect setting process (S6402) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the contents of the related effect setting process (S6402). In this related effect setting process (S6402), the effect information of low priority (priority 1 to 4) to be executed in association with the effect information set to high priority (priority 1) is determined. and a process for determining non-priority effect information to be discarded in association with the effect information set to high priority (priority 1).

When the related effect setting process (S6402) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is effect information indicating a specific effect having a related effect in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is determined (S6501). In other words, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed with the highest priority is a specific effect that defines a related effect (other effects that are associated and executed, or other effects that are associated and discarded). In the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the effect information indicating the specific effect is not stored (S6501: No), since there is no need to perform the processing related to the related effect, this process is terminated as it is, and the effect mode setting process ( Return to S5321) in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the effect information indicating the specific effect is stored (S6501: Yes), then the effect information associated with the specific effect is stored in any of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (S6502), and if it is determined that it is not stored (S6503: No), there is no need to perform processing related to related effects. Return to the mode setting process (S5321 in FIG. 106).

In the process of S6502, if it is determined that the effect information associated with the specific effect is stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6502: Yes), then the related effect is associated It is determined whether it is a tied effect executed by (S6503), and if it is determined that it is a tied effect (S6503: Yes), the execution timing of the tied effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap. (S6504).

Here, if it is determined that the execution timing of the tied effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap (S6504: Yes), the execution timing of the tied effect is different from the already stored execution timing. As a process for correcting to a different execution timing, the execution timing of the tied effect is rewritten (5 seconds before) the execution timing of the specific effect (S6505), and the priority of the tied effect is set to 1.5. (S6506), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6504, if it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect do not overlap (S6504), since there is no need to correct the execution timing of each effect, Skip the process and end this process.

In other words, if the performance information corresponding to the linked performance is stored among the related performances stipulated in the specific performance, the execution timing of the linked performance included in the performance information is set to the execution timing of the specific performance. Prior to the timing (timing to the extent that the specific effect is executed after the end of the tied effect), the priority included in the effect information corresponding to the tied effect is set to the specific effect A process of rewriting and setting to a special priority (1.5 in this embodiment), which is the next highest priority, is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a low-priority production (linked production) independently with a high-priority specific production, so that only high-priority production is executed, It is possible to solve the problem of getting bored with the game early. Furthermore, by correcting the execution timing so that the tied performance with a low priority is executed before the specific performance, when the tied performance is executed, the specific performance is executed after this. It is possible to make the player think that it might be, and to enjoy playing the game while predicting the content of the performance to be executed in the future.

In addition, for a player who has experience of executing a low-priority tie effect alone, the execution timing of the tie effect is corrected by grasping that the execution timing of the tie effect is different from before. Since it is possible to determine in advance that the player is in the game, a sense of superiority can be given to the player who has been playing the game for a long time. In order to make this effect stronger, it is preferable to execute the correction process so that the execution timing corrected by the process of S6505 becomes an execution timing that cannot be set when executed alone. Also, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the execution timing has been corrected.

In the present embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect after the end of the tied effect, the process of correcting the execution timing of the tied effect is executed. The timing may be corrected (delayed), or a specific performance may be executed after the end of the tied performance by performing correction for shortening the performance period of the tied performance. Moreover, it is sufficient that the tied effect is executed before the specific effect is executed, and the execution timing and the effect period may be corrected so that the specific effect is executed during the execution of the tied effect.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description continues. In the processing of S6503, when it is determined that the performance is not linked (S6503: No), that is, it is determined that the related performance stored in any one of the storage areas of the performance hierarchy storage area group 223aa is not the linked performance. Then, it is determined whether the related effect is an exclusion effect (S6507), and if it is determined that it is an exclusion effect (S6507: Yes), the effect information corresponding to the exclusion effect is stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group. 223aa is cleared (discarded) from the storage area, and this processing ends. In the process of S6507, when it is determined that the effect is not the elimination effect (S6507: No), the process of S6508 is skipped and the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different opportunities (momentum to set the variable effect of the special figure 1, opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 2, opportunity to set the pending effect when the number of pending balls is variable), namely Since various effects (button effects, display effects) are set at different timings, the execution timings of the various effects set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are variously set according to the establishment timing of each opportunity. By discriminating the performance mode, priority, and execution timing of various performances set irregularly in this way and determining the performance to be actually executed, the performance setting processing at each opportunity can be simplified.

In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode (execution timing of each effect) that is executed only when the timing at which specific effects are executed coincidentally overlaps, separate and independent setting triggers can be used in a composite manner. It is possible to execute the production that was used. Therefore, various patterns of effects that cannot be easily predicted by the player can be executed, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a combination of effects that are not desired to be executed during one variable effect is defined in advance, and when one effect is executed, the other effect is excluded. Since it is configured to execute processing, it is possible to suppress the execution of a combination of effects that gives the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description continues. After the processing of S6402 is completed, it is next determined whether the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403). When the processing of S6404 to S6406 for setting the effect mode is executed for the effect information stored in all the storage areas of the group 223aa, and it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403: Yes), out of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223a, the processing of S6407 and S6408 for setting the effect mode is executed only for the effect information stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and S6409 to process.

Here, in the processing of S6404, the effect execution period of each effect is determined from each effect information set (stored) in the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad. (S6404), the storage areas in which the performance information is set in the priority 1 area are specified in the order of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ad, and the performance An effect mode corresponding to the effect information of each priority 1 area is set so that the execution periods do not overlap (S6405).

That is, in the present embodiment, priority is also defined for a plurality of storage areas, and priority is given in the order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. is stipulated. Therefore, when performance information with overlapping execution periods is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab and the priority 1 area 233ac1 of the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac, , an effect mode corresponding to the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is set.

On the other hand, when the performance information set (stored) in the priority 1 area of each storage area defines a different execution period, a performance mode corresponding to all the performance information is set. Thereby, in the variation performance corresponding to one special figure variation, first, only the performance mode with the highest priority is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with an effect that should be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, priority is defined in order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When setting, the priority may be configured to be set at random. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presentation mode to be preferentially executed, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

When the processing of S6405 is finished, next, the effect information to be executed is selected from the stored effect information in the order of the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area so that the effect execution period does not overlap, and the selected effect information (S6406). It should be noted that, at this time point, the tying effect set in the process of S6402 is set prior to other effect information. Also, the effect information excluded (cleared) in the process of S6402 is excluded from the selection targets. Then, a display command indicating a variable effect corresponding to each effect mode set in the processes of S6405 and S6406 is set (S6409), and this process ends.

Next, in the process of S6407, the effect execution period included in the information set in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is extracted (S6407), and the effect information in which the effect execution period does not overlap is selected in descending order of priority. , the effect mode corresponding to the selected effect information is set (S6408), the process proceeds to the process of S6409 described above, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853). This button pressing process 2 (S5853) is configured such that effect level selection processing (S6221) is added to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) of the first embodiment described above and executed. different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the button pressing process 2 (S5853) is executed, first, the effect level selection process (S6221) is performed, and then the same processes of S6201 to S6209 as the above-described button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) are performed. and terminate this process. Here, the contents of the effect level selection process executed in the process of S6221 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect level selection process (S6221). In this effect level selection process (S6221), a process is executed for the player to select the amount (level) of effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set (store) effect information indicating various effects in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and to what extent of the set (stored) effect information is set (stored) the effect information. It is configured so that the player can select whether to use it to determine the effect to be actually executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, by executing a plurality of effects at various timings (including overlapping), a player who prefers lively effects can set (store) in more storage areas. ) is used as a target for determining the effect to be executed, and a player who prefers a simple effect to be executed executes the effect information set (stored) in a small storage area. It can be used as a target when determining the effect, and the amount of effect desired by each player can be executed.

When the production level selection process (S6221) is executed, first, the current is in the demo screen (a state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed and the standby condition (for example, the state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed continues for 3 seconds or more (S6601), and if it is determined that the demo screen is displayed (S6601: Yes), next, whether the first frame button 22a is ON. (Whether it is pressed) is determined (S6602).

In the process of S6602, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a is on (S6602: Yes), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22b is on (depressed) (S6603). When it is determined that it is (S6603: Yes), it is determined whether the current simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6604). In the process of S6604, when it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6604: Yes), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to OFF (S6605), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S6604: No), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6606), and this processing is executed. finish.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the predetermined state (in the demo screen), a special operation (an operation of simultaneously pressing the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is executed on the operating means. By doing so, the setting of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be switched. This allows the player to easily set a desired level (amount) of effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the setting status of the current simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, that is, the effect amount to be executed is displayed in an area where the player can easily visually recognize such as the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Effect level information for indicating (effect level) is displayed. As a result, the player can variably set the effect level based on the amount and content of the effect actually executed and the displayed effect level information. In addition, as a display mode displayed on the demonstration screen, a method for variably setting the effect level is displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the information of various effects to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set with various setting triggers, and the sound lamp A display command corresponding to the effect to be actually executed is displayed based on the information stored in the storage means (effect level storage area group 223aa) of the control device 113, and based on the information stored in the storage means at the execution timing of each effect. Although a configuration for outputting to the control device 114 is used, without being limited to this, a command indicating information of various effects set at various setting opportunities is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 The storage means (storage means corresponding to the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa) possessed by the side is stored, and the effect to be executed in accordance with the execution timing of the effect is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. Also good.

Further, in this case, information indicating the content of the execution effect set on the display control device 114 side is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the information received from the display control device 114 It is preferable to configure so as to set a new effect. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a new effect according to the situation of the effect that is actually being executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is shown in which the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as operation means that can be operated by the player. A touch sensor whose detection range is set at a position facing the display screen of the display device 81 (position in front of the display screen) may be used. The touch sensor is a non-contact type detection means, and is an operation means for determining that an operation has been performed by detecting that the player's hand has entered the detection range.

When such a touch sensor is used, the detection range of the touch sensor is provided at a position facing the display screen. By displaying a comment and a character and setting the display position of the character to a position that overlaps the detection range of the touch sensor, the player can actively operate the operation means (touch sensor). .

Furthermore, when the game machine provided with the touch sensor described above is provided with a decorative variable member that can be changed to a position that covers the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, that is, at least a predetermined first position (initial position ) and a second position (operating position). , the decorative variable member moved to the second position enters the detection range of the touch sensor, and the button effect using the first frame button 22a (the decorative variable member There is a problem that the button effect using the touch sensor cannot be executed during the execution of the effect to cause the button to be activated.

In such a case, it is preferable to rewrite part of the information of the effect content of each button effect that is set redundantly so as to execute the duplicate button effect. Specifically, at the timing of executing each button effect, the position of the decorative variable member and the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are determined, and based on the determination result, It is preferable to rewrite the operation means to be operated and the information indicating the operation contents of the operation means among the effects modes of the determined button effects. As a result, the button effects can be overlapped and executed without changing the display mode of the button effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect mode (effect content, execution timing, execution period, priority, etc.) of each effect is set independently at each setting trigger, and the effect based on the information indicating the set effect mode However, it is preferable to perform the execution timing correction process for correcting the execution timing of the performance mode independently set at each setting opportunity, and then execute the execution timing correction process. By configuring in this way, for example, when button effects are set in a plurality of setting triggers and the plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation effective period set corresponding to each button effect is 0. If there is a 0.1 second deviation, the 0.1 second deviation can be corrected, and at the same time, an effect can be executed in which the operation effective period is set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. Further, instead of correcting the effect mode of each effect actually set, only the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is corrected, and for example, the operation effective period is notified to the player. The timing of displaying the display mode (gauge 817a) for the purpose may be synchronized.

In addition, in the case where the effect mode of the button effect is to variably operate the above-described decorative variable member, before the button effect is executed, the decorative variable member is positioned in advance at the initial position. It is necessary to execute processing (preparation processing) and processing (origin confirmation processing) for determining whether or not the decorative variable member is positioned at the initial position. Also, if the button effect is switched to another button effect (higher priority button effect) while the decorative variable member is in a variable state (positioned at the operating position), the player may In addition, if the variable member for decoration is located at a position covering the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it interferes with other performances, and the whole pachinko machine 10. There is a possibility that the directing effect as is remarkably deteriorated.

Therefore, a high priority (priority 1) is set for the button effect in which the effect mode of varying the decorative variable member is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is remarkably lowered due to the execution of another button performance. In addition, without being limited to the above-described configuration, only various effects for moving the decorative variable member are stored in separate storage areas (variable effect storage areas) having a plurality of different priorities, and are stored in the variable effect storage areas. It is also possible to preferentially discriminate the existing effect information and determine whether or not to execute various effects stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa based on the result of the determination. As a result, the variable performance for varying the decorative variable member can be executed with priority over other performances, and the execution priority can be given among the variable performances.

In addition, in the above-described first and second embodiments, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the player is informed of the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. In addition to this, a special button effect executed based on the player's operation of the operating means may be provided. Specifically, when the operation means is operated during a part of the period during which the button effect is not executed without informing the player of the operation valid period, the display screen of the 3 symbol display device 81 A special button effect may be provided in which an effect (lively effect) is executed to change the various effect modes being executed.

In this case, a special timer other than the button valid timer set based on the execution of the above-mentioned button effect is provided, and it is determined that the predetermined button operation is executed while the predetermined period is set by the special timer. In this case, the special button effect may be executed, or the special button effect may be duplicated for each button effect. As described above, since the special button effect does not notify the player of the operation effective period, even if it is executed in duplicate with other button effects, the overlapping effect will not give the player a sense of incongruity. can be executed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 124. FIG. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of game state set according to the special symbol lottery result, the configuration of the main controller 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

In the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are simultaneously (parallel ) was configured to run. On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, the difference is that the special figure 2 lottery is preferentially executed with respect to the special figure 1 lottery.

Then, in the third embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable state (until the next jackpot is won) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win. and time-saving state (until the special figure variation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won) is set.

That is, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next big hit is won, so the variable probability state is set. And the possibility of being able to win many prize balls was remarkably increased. Here, the recent pachinko machine 10 is configured to continue the variable probability state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning many prize balls, the gambling property of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, measures to reduce the probability that the probability variable state continues (for example, the rate of the probability variable state continuing to 65% or less) are being considered.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not make the player have excessive expectations for prize balls. Among the performances used in the pachinko machine 10 that continue with a probability (for example, 80%) (performance for showing the lottery result of special symbols), the performance effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is lowered.

Specifically, during the jackpot game, if your character battles with the enemy character and wins the battle, in the battle production that notifies that the variable probability state is set after the end of this jackpot game. , If the rate at which the probability variable state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle production executed during the jackpot game will decrease, and the player's expectation when the battle production is executed (the probability variable state is set There is a problem that the sense of anticipation for the game is weakened and the desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, a continuous battle effect that continues the battle effect until a predetermined end condition (for example, special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times) is established after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot is won during a period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined termination condition, the performance of winning the battle is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle presentation, and to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot (a jackpot in which a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a battle production is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot A continuous battle effect is executed only when winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the game. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, it is configured so that the production result of the continuous battle will be different according to the type of the winning jackpot. It is constructed so as to execute the battle rematch production when winning the time-saving jackpot during the continuous battle production. As a result, execution of a defeat performance in which the player loses the battle is suppressed when the time-saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the defeat effect is executed after the battle effect is executed, so that the proportion of battle wins can be relatively increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is positioned below the game area with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that instead of the ball entry unit 64, a first ball entry port 164 is arranged. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 164 by a left-handed game is performed, and a special figure 1 lottery is performed. A game aiming for a big win is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won and the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state, a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game is performed.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111 to FIG. 114, the characteristic performance contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects executed during the special figure variation after the jackpot game is finished. As shown in FIG. 111, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, a battle effect (probability-variable suggestion effect) for suggesting to the player the game state after the jackpot game ends is executed, and according to the type of the jackpot , the execution period of the battle performance is made different to increase the performance success rate (battle winning rate) in the battle performance, and to increase the expectations of the players for the battle performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(a), if the probability variable jackpot is won, the battle is performed during the jackpot game (see FIG. 111(A)) to win the battle. (See FIG. 111(B)) is executed. Here, the contents of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the battle effect is executed, and FIG. 112(b) is a display displayed when the battle is won in the battle effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the content. Note that FIGS. 112A and 112B are schematic diagrams showing display examples executed during the time saving state, so the display modes of the small regions Dm1 and Dm2 show the time saving state. 112(a) and (b), the mode of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm is the same as the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. Further, among the elements of the display screen shown in FIG. 112(a), the elements that are the same as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the battle effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a battle effect is executed between a friendly character 817 imitating a hero and an enemy character 818 imitating a monster. Then, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 and the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 are displayed, and an effect is executed in which the character whose physical strength gauge reaches 0 first loses.

On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a victory notification mode Dm7, a rematch notification mode Dm8, and a defeat notification mode Dm9 are displayed as result notification modes for reporting the result of the battle effect. These notification modes Dm7 to Dm9 are all displayed as shown in FIG. is configured such that the corresponding notification mode is hidden. Thereby, the player can predict the effect result of the battle effect before the effect result of the battle effect (victory of the battle) is notified.

In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a prize ball display area Dm5 in which prize ball number information for indicating the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game is displayed, and a value of "1000" is displayed. ing. Further, a round number display area Dm6 for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is formed on the right side thereof, and a value of "8" is displayed. In addition, as described above, FIG. 112(a) shows the display contents of the battle production (continuous battle production) during the time saving state, and therefore, the game state in which the jackpot game is actually finished.

In such a game state, by displaying the prize ball display area Dm5 and the number of rounds display area Dm6, it is possible to inform the player that the player is currently playing a jackpot game (for example, during the interval period between round games or during the ending period). The player can be made to think that the battle effect being executed is the effect being executed during the jackpot game. In addition, in FIG. 112(a), the small areas Dm1 and Dm2 are displayed large in order to explain the current game state in an easy-to-understand manner. It is displayed in a size that is difficult to identify.

At the time of FIG. 111(B), the effect of winning the battle shown in FIG. 112(b) is executed. In FIG. 112(b), the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 becomes 0, an effect that the character 818 is defeated is displayed, and only the victory notification mode Dm7 is displayed. By executing this battle victory effect, the player is notified that a variable probability state is set as the game state.

Returning to FIG. 111, the description continues. After winning the battle, the production in the variable probability state is executed, and if the jackpot is won again during the variable probability state (short-time jackpot), the battle production (continuous battle production) is executed until 30 times the short-time after the jackpot game ends. (See FIG. 112(a)). Then, when the special figure variation is executed 30 times after the time-saving state is set, the production of losing the battle (defeat production) is executed (see FIG. 111(C)). Here, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the contents of the effect when the player is defeated in the battle effect will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the battle is defeated.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 becomes 0, an effect that the character 817 is defeated is displayed, and only the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By executing this battle defeat effect, it is notified that the time saving state is set as the game state. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, of the 100 time reductions set as the time reduction state at the time the battle defeat production is executed, since 30 times have passed, after FIG. 113 (a) is displayed , as a display during the time saving state (see FIG. 111 (D)), as shown in FIG. value is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period from when the time saving state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, since it is configured to execute the battle production, the probability that the victory production is executed in the battle production can be increased (increased by the probability of winning a certain variable jackpot within 30 times of the time saving state), and the number of time saving times executed after the defeat effect is executed in the battle effect can be reduced, so the special pattern is low. It is possible to shorten the period of the time-saving game performed in the state that the probability state is set, and to suppress the player's willingness to play.

Returning to FIG. 111, the description continues. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), during the continuous battle production (in the special drawing lottery of the 25th turn after the time saving state is set), if you win the probability variable jackpot, the battle wins during the probability variable jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 112(b)). As a result, internally, after moving to a time-saving state once (in the past, after the defeat effect was executed in the battle effect), the battle Only the victory presentation can be executed without executing the defeat presentation of the presentation. Therefore, it is possible to relatively increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), since it shows an example of winning a small number of rounds as a probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot (2R)), the effect result of the continuous battle production is displayed during the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in the case of winning a definite variable jackpot with a large number of rounds (16R), if it is determined that the 16 round definite variable jackpot is won by the result of the look-ahead, It may be configured such that the victory presentation of the continuation battle presentation and the jackpot presentation are executed, and then the victory presentation is executed again in the battle presentation executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, the interval period set after the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game is completed is set longer than other interval periods (for example, 1 minute), and the effect result of the continuous battle effect is displayed by the 8th round of the first half. After that, in the interval period of the 8th round, a performance result indicating that a jackpot is won is displayed in a pseudo performance of pseudo-executing a special figure variation, and the jackpot game is played using the latter 8 rounds. may be configured to execute the battle production. By configuring in this way, more winning effects can be executed.

In this case, the interval period after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game may be configured to vary according to the game state. In the non-working state), an interval period of the same length as the other interval periods is set, and only in the state in which the time saving state is set, a long interval period is preferably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an unnecessarily long interval period is set in the 16-round probability variable jackpot won during the probability variable state and the game efficiency is lowered.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, only the 16-round probability variable jackpot won within 30 special figure fluctuations after the time-saving state is set is preferably configured so that a long interval period is set. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when winning the time-saving jackpot (2R) during the continuous battle production (20th special figure fluctuation after the time-saving state is set), the rematch production as the production result of the continuous battle production is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 113(b), the content of the rematch presentation will be described. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the effect result of the battle effect is a rematch. As shown in FIG. 113(b), the character 817 is displayed in a fighting posture once more, and a "one more game" command 816 indicating that the battle effect will be executed again is displayed with the physical strength gauge 817a remaining. and the rematch notification mode Dm8 is displayed. In this case, the small display area Dm2 displays the display mode of "222" indicating that the jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the above-described continuous battle production, when the special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, the defeat production is configured to be executed, so during the continuous battle production , an effect is executed in which the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 decreases according to the number of executions of the special figure variation. Then, when the time reduction number of times of 30, which is the end condition of the continuous battle effect, approaches, the display contents shown in FIG. 114(a) are displayed. FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of time reductions reaches the 30th time during continuous battle production.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), during the continuous battle production, the physical strength gauge 817a decreases according to the number of special figure fluctuations executed, suggesting defeat of the battle (in FIG. 114 (a), shaking mode), the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By configuring in this way, the 30th time-saving variation can be executed in a state in which the physical strength gauge 817a is low, so that the player can execute the defeat performance of the battle without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the continuous battle production (battle production performed during the time saving state), the number of times of time saving is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 30 times). Although the case is set as the end condition, it may be configured to variably set the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is established by the effect lottery means without being limited to this. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle performance is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle performance.

In addition, as a guaranteed period notification effect for notifying the player of a period in which the continuous battle effect will not end (battle effect guaranteed period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, the character 817 does not lose. It is also possible to construct an effect indicating the invincible mode so that it can be executed, and to notify the period during which the invincible mode continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set the end condition of the continuous battle production based on the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win a small win that can give the player a privilege less than the big win game (a privilege different from the big win game), based on the small win winning (executing the small winning game During), it is preferable to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as a small winning game to be executed when winning a small winning, it is preferable to execute a small winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big winning game is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is being opened, so that the player can experience the defeat effect as if during the jackpot game. I can make you think.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle production is terminated based on the condition that is established first, whether the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or the small winning is won. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle effect indefinite.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are changed.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPI 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, the ROM 202 of the third embodiment replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the table 202d, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 203ba. As shown in FIG. 116, the first winning random number 3 table 203ba is the same except for the values defined for the above-described first winning random number table 203a. Specifically, when the gaming state is low probability (low probability state of special symbols), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as a big hit in the range of "0, 1", and the gaming state is In the case of high accuracy (high probability state of special symbols), the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is specified in the range of "2 to 11".

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb will be described. Figure 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb, Figure 117 (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb has It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the selection table 202bb1, and FIG. 117(c) shows the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb has. It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is a special figure 1 jackpot type for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202bb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2), and the jackpot is selected. It is configured so that different jackpot types are selected according to the types of special symbols that have been won.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202bb1 is, as shown in FIG. Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A", "50 to 64", "jackpot B", and "65 to 99" A "jackpot C" is defined.

Here, the jackpot type "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type “jackpot B” is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to “10000”. ” is the jackpot type that is set. The jackpot type "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "100". ” is the jackpot type that is set.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends with a probability of 65%, and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35%. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle performance executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is 65% at the maximum.

The special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 is, as shown in FIG. Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot D", "25 to 34", "jackpot E", and "35 to 64" A "jackpot F" is defined, a "jackpot G" is defined in the range of "65 to 89", and a "jackpot H" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the jackpot type "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which two rounds of the jackpot game are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "jackpot E" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-described "jackpot A", and the "jackpot F" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-described "jackpot B".

"Jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which 2 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the variable probability flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "100". It is a jackpot type to be set, and "jackpot H" is the same jackpot type as the above-described "jackpot C".

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the probability is 65%, which is the same as when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1. The time saving state is set with . Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle performance executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is 65% at the maximum.

In addition, the ratio (30%) of selecting the "jackpot F", which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, is the "jackpot B" (jackpot type with the same contents as the "jackpot F") in the special figure 1. It is set higher than the ratio (15%) Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 203 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM203 in the third embodiment differs from the RAM203 in the first embodiment described above in that a probability variation flag 203ba is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. This probability variation flag 203ba is a big hit ("jackets A, B, D, E, F"), it is set to ON, and it is set to OFF when a big win is won and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the big win (when a big win game is started).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, this embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a battle in-progress flag 223ca is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The in-battle flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that a battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed, and is set to ON when the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed. . This in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON when a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot won in a state where the battle effect is not being executed is started (see S6704 in FIG. 128), and the sound lamp control device 113 When setting various effects in , it is referenced to determine whether the current battle effect is in progress. Then, in the battle production update process (see S4651 in FIG. 126) of the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125), the condition for ending the battle production is satisfied (the number of remaining time reductions reaches 70 times (special in the time reduction state When the figure fluctuation count reaches 30), it is set to OFF (see S6657 in FIG. 126).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124, the details of the control process executed by main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are not executed at the same time (in parallel), The control process of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment is greatly different in that the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 is preferentially executed. Other contents are the same. Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the content of the control processing related to the above-described differences will be described, and the description of the other content will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S131) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is being changed, the special figure 1, and the process of updating the game state (updating the value of the counter 223h during time saving) is performed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. It is different in that it is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol instead of the timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 120, special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 3, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting a big hit (S251). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S251: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S252: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (The number N2 of holding the variable display in the second special symbol) is acquired (S253). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S254), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e must be 0. If (S254: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S255), and the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation A command is set (S256). The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2401) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 58), It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S256, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S257). In the process of S257, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S257 is executed, the second special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S258), and this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S254, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S254: No), then the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S259). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S259: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S259, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S259: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S260), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S261). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S261, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S262). In the process of S262, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the first special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S263). The first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed is determined (S264). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S264: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S264, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S264: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). The stop symbols are set in advance by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) and the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) which will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) is executed, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common with 203b, a special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S266 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). Then, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the second special symbol variation start processing 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start processing 3 (S263) It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S267). If the current lottery result is a special pattern jackpot (S267: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set, the variable probability flag 203ba is set to OFF, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S268), and a jackpot middle flag is set. 203m is set to ON (S269). Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S267, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S267: No), game state update process 3 (S271) is executed. The game state update process 3 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258). This second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a second special symbol reserved ball. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 81 .

In the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258), first, various data (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter Each value of CS1) is acquired (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S1602). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203ba is ON. This variable probability counter flag 203aa is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpots A, B, D, E, and F. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the odds are changing (S1602: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state, so the process proceeds to S1603. In the process of S1603, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S1601 and the special symbol big winning random number table (first winning random number table) 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained. (S1603). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first winning random number table) 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the special symbol jackpot in the variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 15(a)). When the value of the random number counter C1 per one coincides with the random number value to be the winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols (S1602: No), the processing of S1604 is executed. In the process of S1604, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S1601 and the special symbol big winning random number table (first winning random number table) 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (S1604). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first winning random number table) 202a. Two random numbers of "0, 1" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these winnings. When the random number value matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the process of S1605, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S1603 or S1604 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table ( 1st per random number table) 202a match with the judgment value set) is determined (S1605), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S1605: Yes), acquired by the processing of S1601 Based on the value of the big hit type counter C2, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S1606). More specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1601 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2, and the jackpot type (DH) is what. determine whether

In the process of S1606, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type. Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S1607). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1607, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "short failure", "long failure", various types of "missing normal reach", and various types of "missing super reach" are defined. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S1605: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S1608). In the process of S1608, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Based on the value, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1609). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S1608, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach.

When the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1610). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1611). When the processing of S1611 ends, the process returns to special symbol variation processing 3 (S131).

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S263). In this first special symbol variation start process (S263), the type of special symbol to be processed is changed from special figure 1 to special figure 2 with respect to the above-described second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258). It is different in points, and according to the difference, it is different in that various counters, tables, etc. for special figure 2 are changed to various counters, tables, etc. for special figure 1. Since other contents are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, the game state update process 3 (S271) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the game state update process 3 (S271). This gaming state update process 3 (S271) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h. is executed, the game state is updated based on the subtracted value, and a state command indicating the updated game state is set.

When the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of normal symbols. (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S851: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S852), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0. (S853).

Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S853 (S853: Yes), the game state corresponding to the game state storage area is set (S854), and the current game state (the time saving counter 203h value, the setting state of the variable probability flag 203ba) is set (S871), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S851: No), or in the process of S853, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 ( greater than 0) (S853: No), the process proceeds directly to S871.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in which the probability variation flag 203ba is set to ON after the jackpot game ends, "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variation flag 203ba is set. When a jackpot that is not set to ON is won, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in which the variable probability flag 203ba is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability for normal symbols) until the next jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game. state) is set, and if you win a jackpot where the probability variation flag 203ba is not set to ON after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state (special symbol low probability state) until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends , High probability state of normal design) will be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the contents of the jackpot ending process 3 (S2551) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 3 (S2551). In this jackpot end processing 3 (S2551), according to the jackpot type won, the setting of the probability variation flag 203ba and the value of the time saving counter 203h are set when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of this time is "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751), "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: Yes), set the variable probability flag 203ba to ON (S2752), set the value of the time saving counter 203h to "10000" (S2753), turn off the jackpot flag (S2754), sets a command indicating a change in the game state (command indicating the current game state) (S2704), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that this jackpot type is not "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: No), set "100" to the value of the time saving counter 203h ( S2755), the process proceeds to S2754.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, state command reception processing 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125) is performed in place of the state command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 64) in the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) Instead of the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4291 in FIG. 127), the point of executing The difference is that the jackpot start process (see S4212 in FIG. 128) is executed as a subroutine of the jackpot related process (see S5002 in FIG. 66). Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 125, the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process 3 (S4252). This state command reception process 3 (S4252) is different from the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above in that a battle effect update process (S4651) is added and executed. do. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 3 (S4252) is executed, first, the battle effect update process is executed (S4651), and then the same processes of S4601 to S4604 as the state command reception process described above (see S4212 in FIG. 64). to run. Here, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the game state has changed to a state other than the normal state (S4602: No), then it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4652), (S4652: Yes), since the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being displayed, the change processing of the display contents accompanying the game state transition is not executed, and S4610 is performed. and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4652, if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4652: No), the process of S4605 to S4610, which is the same as the above-described status command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the details of the battle effect update process (S4651). In this battle effect update process (S4651), in the battle effect (continuous battle effect) during the time saving state, the process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the update of the number of times of time saving is executed.

When the battle effect update process (S4651) is executed, first, it is determined whether the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6651), and it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). In this case, since there is no need to update the battle effect, this processing ends. On the other hand, the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON. That is, if it is determined that the battle is currently being produced (S6651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is in the time saving state (S6652).

The process of S6652 is executed by reading information indicating the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k. In the process of S6652, if it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (S6652: No), since the current jackpot game is in progress, there is no need to execute the process of updating the battle effect, so this process ends as it is. do. If it is determined that the current is in the time saving state (S6652: Yes), then information indicating the remaining period of the time saving state included in the state command received this time (information indicating the number of remaining time saving) Based on The value of the remaining time reduction count is updated and set in the sub-state setting area 223k.

When the processing of S6653 is finished, as a result of updating the value of the number of times of remaining time reduction, it is determined whether the number of times of remaining time reduction has reached 70 times (S6654). If so (S6654: No), a display command indicating a physical strength gauge value corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions set this time is set (S6655), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S6655, as shown in FIG. The image data of the display mode is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S6654, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reduction has reached 70 times (S6654: Yes), based on the completion conditions of the battle production (continuous battle production) to be executed during the time reduction state Then, a display command indicating battle defeat is set (S6656), the in-battle flag 223ca is set to OFF (S6657), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S6656, as shown in FIG. 113(a), a defeat effect is executed in which the character 817 is defeated in the battle effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) will be described. Figure 127 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing (S4291). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) is executed instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above. It is what is done. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so for each special figure While each was configured to execute the variation start process, in the third embodiment, each special figure lottery (variation) is configured not to be executed at the same time (in parallel), so the start of the special figure variation The processing to be executed at the timing is made common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

When the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) is executed, first, the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S4371), then the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) Same as The processing of S4352 and S4353 is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the special figure variation (lottery) of this time has been elected to the jackpot (S4381). In this process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the process of S4381, when it is determined that the special figure variation (lottery) of this time has not won the jackpot (S4381: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that this special figure variation (lottery) has won a jackpot (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4382). In other words, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation executed during the execution of the battle production is the winning of the jackpot.

In the process of S4382, if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4382: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4382: Yes), then, it is determined whether the jackpot won this time is a time-saving jackpot (S4383). (S4384), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4383, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving jackpot (it is a variable probability jackpot) (S4383: No), the processing of S4384 is skipped and this processing ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4384, image data corresponding to the rematch effect shown in FIG. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212). In this jackpot start processing (S4212), various settings are performed based on the production situation (whether or not the battle is being produced) at the timing of the start of the jackpot game and the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time.

When the jackpot start process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701). When it is determined that a jackpot game has been executed (S6701: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S6702). In the process of S6702, determination is made based on the jackpot type stored in the secondary state setting area 223k.

In the process of S6702, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is determined (S6703: Yes), a display command indicating battle victory is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (S6703), and a flag during battle is set. 223ca is turned on (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6709. On the other hand, in the processing of S6702, if it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is not (the time-saving jackpot) (S6702: No), a display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. (S6705), the above-described processes of S6704 and S6709 are executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S6701, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot (S6706), and it is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined (S6706; Yes), set a display command indicating battle victory (S6707), proceed to the processing of S6709, and if it is determined that it is not a probability variation jackpot in the processing of S6706 (S6706: No), A display command indicating battle continuation is set, and in the process of S6709, a display jackpot start command is set, and this process ends.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable state (next jackpot (until a jackpot is won) or a time-saving state (until a special figure variation is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot, or until a jackpot is won) is set.

That is, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next big hit is won, so the variable probability state is set. And the possibility of being able to win many prize balls was remarkably increased. Here, the recent pachinko machine 10 is configured to continue the variable probability state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning many prize balls, the gambling property of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, measures to reduce the probability that the probability variable state continues (for example, the rate of the probability variable state continuing to 65% or less) are being considered.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not make the player have excessive expectations for prize balls. Among the performances used in the pachinko machine 10 that continue with a probability (for example, 80%) (performance for showing the lottery result of special symbols), the performance effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is lowered.

Specifically, during the jackpot game, if your character battles with the enemy character and wins the battle, in the battle production that notifies that the variable probability state is set after the end of this jackpot game. , If the rate at which the probability variable state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle production executed during the jackpot game will decrease, and the player's expectation when the battle production is executed (the probability variable state is set There is a problem that the sense of anticipation for the game is weakened and the desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, a continuous battle effect that continues the battle effect until a predetermined end condition (for example, special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times) is established after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot is won during a period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined termination condition, the performance of winning the battle is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle presentation, and to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot (a jackpot in which a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a battle production is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot A continuous battle effect is executed only when winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the game. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, it is configured so that the production result of the continuous battle will be different according to the type of the winning jackpot. It is constructed so as to execute the battle rematch production when winning the time-saving jackpot during the continuous battle production. As a result, execution of a defeat performance in which the player loses the battle is suppressed when the time-saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the defeat effect is executed after the battle effect is executed, so that the proportion of battle wins can be relatively increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the continuous battle production (battle production performed during the time saving state), the number of times of time saving is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 30 times). Although the case is set as the end condition, it may be configured to variably set the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is established by the effect lottery means without being limited to this. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle performance is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle performance.

In addition, as a guaranteed period notification effect for notifying the player of a period in which the continuous battle effect will not end (battle effect guaranteed period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, the character 817 does not lose. It is also possible to construct an effect indicating the invincible mode so that it can be executed, and to notify the period during which the invincible mode continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set the end condition of the continuous battle production based on the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win a small win that can give the player a privilege less than the big win game (a privilege different from the big win game), based on the small win winning (executing the small winning game During), it is preferable to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as a small winning game to be executed when winning a small winning, it is preferable to execute a small winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big winning game is opened. With this configuration, the defeat effect of losing the battle can be executed while the variable prize winning device 65 is open, so that the player can experience the defeat effect as if the player were playing a jackpot game. I can make you think.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle production is terminated based on the condition that is established first, whether the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or the small winning is won. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle effect indefinite.

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133, a first modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so each variation for each special figure It is configured to execute the start process, and as shown in FIG. 9(a), only the variation effect corresponding to any special figure variation (special figure 1 variation in FIG. 9(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device. It was configured to display in the 81 main display area Dm.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, since the variation effects corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations are not simultaneously executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can use the third symbol display device 81 Although it was possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the variation effect to be executed was confusing, it was difficult to understand that multiple special symbol variations were being performed at the same time (in parallel), and multiple There is a problem that the game is played without the player understanding the characteristic game property that the special symbol variations are executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the first modification, one special figure variation is the main variation display, the other special figure variation is the subordinate variation display, and the variation effect (main variation effect) corresponding to the main variation display is also the subvariation A variable effect (subordinate variable effect) corresponding to the display is also configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the variable performance corresponding to the main variable display is configured to be more conspicuous than the variable performance corresponding to the secondary variable display.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in the first modified example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen of the third pattern display device in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 130(a), in the first modified example, the main display area Dm of the display screen is divided into the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb, in contrast to the display screen of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the main variation effect is executed in the main variation area Dma, and the sub-variation effect is executed in the sub-variation area Dmb, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), the first modification is configured such that the main variation area Dma is formed larger than the secondary variation area Dmb, and the main variation effect is presented to the player. It is configured so that it can be executed more conspicuously than the variable production. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to one variable performance among the plurality of variable performances being executed.

In the first modification, when a specific variation performance (variation performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, super reach performance)) is executed as the variation performance executed on the sub-variation region Dmb side, the main variation region Dma , and the variable effect executed in the sub-variation area Dmb can be executed. As a result, when a variable performance that the player should pay attention to is executed, the player can be notified of the variable performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, at the time when a specific variation effect (variation effect to win a jackpot (for example, super reach)) is set as a variation effect to be executed on the sub-variation area Dmb side, even in the main variation area Dma (expectation to win a jackpot) When a highly variable performance (for example, super reach) is being executed, the variable performance being executed in the main variable area Dma is suddenly switched, and the performance is provided incomprehensibly to the player. There was a problem of hoarding.

In addition, for a player who wants to see the specific variable performance being executed in the main variable area Dma, which is a variable performance that is difficult to execute, and who wants to see the performance to the end regardless of the special symbol lottery result, There is a possibility that the sudden switching of the variable presentation may cause dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when executing (setting) the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma, in the sub-variation area Dmb retained and stored It is configured to discriminate the prefetch result of winning information corresponding to the variable performance (special figure 2 variable performance) to be executed, and to determine whether or not there is winning information for winning a big hit. Then, when it is determined that there is winning information for winning a jackpot, the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 can set a specific variation effect (for example, a winning super ready-to-win effect). (For example, if it is an outlier variation pattern indicating a variation time of 90 seconds), it is not a specific variation performance, but a normal variation performance (for example, a short-time deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (see FIG. 18) It is configured to execute a special variable performance that executes a variable performance set in correspondence with) a plurality of times.

By configuring in this way, even if the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is switched from the special figure 1 variation effect to the special figure 2 variation effect, in the main variation area Dma before switching, the normal deviation fluctuation Since the corresponding variable performance is only executed, the variable performance can be switched smoothly without making the player feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of rendering in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing the flow of each effect in the case of switching between the variable effects that are variably displayed between the main variable area Dma and the sub-variable area Dmb. As shown in FIG. 129, the timing of setting the variation performance (special figure 1 variation performance) of the special figure 1 variation (the variation of the lottery result is out and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation area Dma ( At the timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation, or the fluctuation display is executed next It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 has the information indicating the winning of the jackpot.

As a result of the above-described determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has information indicating the jackpot winning, the special figure As the variable performance of 1 variation, a special variable performance is set and executed for pseudo-continuously executing the variable performance (short-time deviation variable performance) selected when the variation time is 10 seconds. Thereby, the second variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and at the production switching timing (the timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation production in the main fluctuation area Dma, the variation of the special figure 1 fluctuation Since the short-time off variable performance is executed as the performance, the variable performance can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Also, at the timing of setting the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation, even if you do not accurately grasp the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation being executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be performed in the future, etc. At the production switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 fluctuation production in the fluctuation area Dma, since it is possible to execute the normal deviation fluctuation, the processing when setting the fluctuation production can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130(b) and 131, description will be given of the effect contents displayed when switching the variable effect displayed between the main variation area Dma and the sub-variation area Dmb. Figure 130 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content at the time when the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation is executed in the main variation area Dma, Figure 131 is a variation display of the special figure 2 variation is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when is being executed in the main variation area Dma.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b), before the switching timing of the variation display, the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation (short-time deviation variation performance) is executed in the main variation area Dma, and the sub-variation area Dmb Then, the variation production (reach generation) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. After that, when the variation display of the special figure 2 variation develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. A super reach effect (a effect in which a fish swims within the display area) is executed.

On the other hand, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation is displayed by switching to the sub-variation area Dmb. Note that the example shown in FIG. 131 shows the point in time when one of the short-time out-of-variation effects that are pseudo-executed multiple times ends, and the third symbol displayed in the sub-variation area Dmb is in the temporary stop mode ( In FIG. 131, it is displayed as "swing stop"). In this way, when the pseudo short-time fluctuation effect is executed a plurality of times, the third symbol is displayed in a temporary stop mode at the end of each short-time fluctuation effect. It is possible to make it seem that special figure 1 variation is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, in the first modification, the display position (left side of the main display area Dm) where the special figure 1 fluctuation effect is executed, and the display position (right side of the main display area Dm) where the special figure 2 fluctuation effect is executed , the main variable region Dma and the sub-variable region Dmb are variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner to which special symbol the executed variable effect corresponds. In addition, without being limited to this, the display position of the special figure 1 fluctuation production and the display position of the special figure 2 fluctuation production are changed without changing the position of the main fluctuation area Dma and the position of the secondary fluctuation area Dmb. It can be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to fix the position where the variable effect that the player should pay attention to is executed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, in the first modified example, before and after the switching timing of the variable display, the main variable region Dma and the secondary variable region Dmb are formed without changing the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after switching the variable display, it is preferable to form the main variable area Dma larger than before the switching and the secondary variable area Dmb smaller than before the switching. As a result, the variation performance executed in the main variation area Dma after switching can be emphasized more, and the player can be interested. In addition to the configuration in which the size of each variable region is variable, for example, the frame mode for partitioning each variable region may be varied. may be colored red, or the shape of the frame may be circular.

Furthermore, in the first modification, when setting the variation effect of the special figure variation executed on the main variation area Dma side, it is determined whether or not the big hit is won based on the winning information of other special figure variations (preliminary discrimination), and based on the discrimination result, the production mode of the variation production is set.In addition, based on the winning information of the other special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation And, the timing at which the special figure is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit and the timing at which the variable performance is switched may be discriminated, and the variable performance may be set based on the determination result.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In the first modification described above, the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb are formed, and each variation area is configured so that the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation is executed, and the secondary variation area Dmb side When a specific variation performance is executed in the special figure variation, a special design corresponding to the variation performance performed in the main variation area Dma, and a special design corresponding to the variation performance performed in the sub-variation area Dmb It was to execute a variation effect switching process to switch between.

On the other hand, in the second modification, when a specific variation effect is executed in the special figure variation on the side of the sub-variation area Dmb, the main variation area Dma and the sub-variation area Dmb are combined into a special It is different in that it is configured to form a variable area and execute a variable effect corresponding to a plurality of special figure variations within the special variable area. Since other elements are the same as those of the first modified example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modified example, the variable display shown in FIG. 130(a) of the first modified example described above is executed in the normal varying state. Then, as in the first modification described above, the special figure 1 variation executed in the main variation area Dma (the lottery result is out, the variation time is 60 seconds) variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) At the timing (timing of FIG. 129 (a)) to set the winning prize information of the special figure 2 from the winning information storage area 223ab, the special figure 2 variation being executed is a jackpot variation, or the next variation It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 to be displayed has the information indicating the winning of the jackpot.

As a result of the above determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) to be executed next has information indicating the jackpot winning, FIG. Special variable regions Dma to Dmd shown in (a) are formed. Here, with reference to FIGS. 132(a) to 133(b), the contents of the rendering in the second modified example will be described.

FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the special variation areas Dma to Dmd, and FIG. 132(b) is the special variation area Dma at the time when the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started. Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of ~ Dmd, Figure 133 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation, Figure 133 (b) is a special FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when a combination indicating a big win is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are formed from four variation display areas. The variation performance corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is configured such that the decoration variation performance of the pseudo pattern is executed in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd. Then, a comment "multi-reach" indicating that the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are formed is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

After that, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed while the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are displayed, the state shown in FIG. 132(b) is obtained. In FIG. 132 (b), the display mode "351" indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuation is out is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma, and the reach display indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is in the reach state It is displayed in the special variable area Dmb. In addition, in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd, decoration variation display is performed to suggest the degree of expectation for the big hit of the special figure 2 variation being executed, and the reach display is displayed in the special variation area Dmc. there is

In addition, the display area of the special variation area Dma becomes smaller based on the stop display of the off symbol in the special variation area Dma indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation, and the special variation area Dmb which is in the reach state, and The display area of the special variable area Dmc is formed large. In this way, by varying the size of each variable region in the special variable regions Dma to Dmd according to the state of variation in each variable region and the result of variation, the player is notified of the region to be watched in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

After that, when the special figure 2 variation display progresses, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), only the special variation area Dmb is in the reach state, and the other variation areas display the display mode indicating the deviation, and the sub display area Ds and the comment "Last Chance" is displayed. In this state, the special figure 1 variation is displayed as the next variation, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the result of the previous special figure variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the special variation area Dma. maintained in good condition.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is newly executed, there is no sense of incongruity in the multi-reach production using the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd. It should be noted that, when the newly executed special figure 1 variation is a big hit, for example, the third symbol starts to vary again in the special variation area Dma from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a). It may be configured to As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the multi-reach using the special variation areas Dma to Dmd will continue in what manner, and to enhance the effect of the performance.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, as shown in FIG. Along with the comment, the third symbol "555" indicating the big win is stopped and displayed. In this state, since the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is forcibly stopped, "351" indicating that the special figure 1 is lost and stopped is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma.

In addition, the decoration variation display executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd is variably displayed in a production mode for suggesting the expectation of winning the jackpot of the special figure 2 variation, and the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation, Based on the interval of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop timing, it is configured so that the fluctuation period of each fluctuation display is set.

Specifically, at the time when the special figure 1 variation is executed and the multi-reach is displayed, that is, at the time when the special figure 2 variation that becomes the jackpot variation is not started, the decoration performed in the special variation area Dmc and Dmd The variable display is displayed in a state in which the effect mode is not set. Then, at the timing when the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed, the difference between the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation and the variation time of the jackpot variation is calculated, and based on the calculation result, the special variation area Sets the variation time of decoration variation display executed in Dmc and Dmd.

By configuring in this way, even if the period from the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma to the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation area Dmb is short , even if it is long, the multi-reach effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of incompatibility. In addition, the configuration of the multi-reach effect is not limited to this, for example, if the difference between the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed and the variation time of the jackpot variation is within a predetermined time, special variation The areas Dmc and Dmd may be combined to perform one decorative variable display, or the decorative variable display may be performed only in the special variable area Dmc, and a mini-character may appear in the special variable area Dmd. It may be configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit of medium multi-reach.

In addition, in each of the above modifications, while the special variation effect (a variation effect in which a plurality of pseudo short-term fluctuation patterns are continuously executed during one variation period) is being executed Also, the fourth symbols displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are configured to be displayed in the usual manner. That is, in the special variation effect, even while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol in which the special variation effect is being executed continues to be displayed in a variable manner. It is not something that can be done. For example, in synchronism with the temporary stop period during execution of the special variation effect, the corresponding fourth symbol may also be temporarily stopped. By configuring in this way, even if the player visually recognizes the fourth symbol during execution of the special variation performance, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether or not the special variation performance is being executed. Therefore, before and after the changeover timing of the variable display, it is possible to suppress the unnatural display content that the fourth pattern continues to be displayed while the third pattern is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, for example, the fourth symbol may be difficult to be visually recognized at least during the temporary stop period during execution of the special variation effect. More specifically, for example, the fourth pattern is hidden, the fourth pattern display area is displayed in a reduced size, or a predetermined role is displayed at a position where the fourth pattern display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) is hidden. It may be configured to operate. By configuring in this way, the display control of the fourth symbol can be simplified as compared with the case where the display mode of the fourth symbol is synchronized with the temporary stop period of the special variation effect.

In addition, as a method for making it difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is being executed, for example, at least during the temporary stop period, the rear image around the fourth symbol display area is made the same color as the fourth symbol. , it may be configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize whether the fourth symbol is being variably displayed or stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fourth pattern difficult to see by the extremely simple control of changing the back image, so that the display control can be further simplified. In addition, by changing the back image, it is possible to make the player feel as if a performance different from usual is being executed, so that the expectation for the big win can be heightened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, for example, the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb are switched, and while the special figure 2 variation display is being performed in the main variation area Dma, the special figure 2 variation display with the display area expanded Depending on the content, the fourth symbol display area may be shielded. That is, in the example of FIG. 131, the image of the fish that is displayed as it develops into super reach is also displayed in the fourth pattern display area (the image of the fish is displayed in the layer in the hierarchy before the display layer of the fourth pattern). may be displayed), or a configuration may be adopted in which characters "Reaching has occurred!" are displayed in the fourth pattern display area to make the fourth pattern difficult to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special variation effect is being executed at least after the switching of the variation area. Furthermore, for example, during the execution period of the special variation effect, the meaning of the fourth design can be understood by changing the display position of the fourth design display area or reversing the arrangement of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. By making it difficult, it may be indirectly made difficult to recognize whether or not it is the execution period of the special variation effect. Further, by periodically or irregularly varying the display mode of the fourth symbol (the display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress and the display mode indicating that the stop display is in progress), the A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to understand whether or not the variable display is being performed from the display mode, and indirectly it is difficult to recognize whether or not the special variable effect is being executed. Specifically, for example, the first display method indicates that the symbol is displayed in a variable manner by performing a variable display, while the symbol is stopped to indicate that the symbol is in a stopped display; a second display method indicating that the entire pattern display area is white to indicate that the variable display is in progress, while the entire pattern display area is black to indicate that the stationary display is in progress; The left half may blink to indicate that the variable display is in progress, while the right half blinks to indicate the variable display in the third display method. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the special variable display is being executed.

In each of the above modifications, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 were separately displayed with respect to the fourth symbol display area, but not necessarily to the special figure 1 It is not necessary to display both the corresponding 4th design and the 4th design corresponding to the special figure 2. - 特許庁For example, only the fourth pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the third pattern being executed in the main variation area Dma may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area. By configuring in this way, not only the third pattern but also the fourth pattern to which the player should pay attention becomes clear, so that the player's convenience can be improved. Further, after the display switching process is executed, only the fourth pattern corresponding to the special pattern different from the special pattern on the side on which the special variation effect is being executed is displayed in the fourth pattern display area. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the aspect of the fourth symbol.

In each of the above modifications, when executing a variation effect corresponding to a specific variation type in the main variation area Dma, each reserved ball (winning Information) lottery results are read in advance, and when it is determined that there is a reserved ball (winning information) corresponding to a big hit, the variable performance to be executed in the main variable area Dma is set to a special variable performance. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the held ball (winning information) includes a variation type deviation with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, super reach, etc.), a predetermined ratio (eg, 1 A ratio of /5) may be configured such that the special variation effect is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the player notices that the player is temporarily stopped (the third symbol is swinging) during the temporary stop period in the special variation performance, the big win is confirmed. Therefore, even after the change effect (special change effect) executed in the main variation area Dma and the change effect executed in the sub-variation area Dmb are switched by the display switching process, the main change area Dma It is possible to pay attention to the change performance after switching to the end. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example, when the multi-reach effect is executed, the decoration variable display is executed in the special variable regions Dmc and Dmd. That is, the variation period is set according to the interval between the variation stop timing of the variation performance executed in the special variation region Dma and the stop timing of the variation performance executed in the special variation region Dmb. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be synchronized with the variation display period of the special figure variation based on each held ball held at the start of the multi-reach production. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation stop period of the fluctuation performance executed in each of the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd can be matched with the fluctuation stop period of the fourth symbol, so that a more natural-looking production mode can be achieved. can provide.

<Regarding the ball entering unit 64 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 134, FIGS. 134(a) and (b) for explaining the ball entry unit 64 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment schematically show the internal structure of the ball entry unit 64. It is a schematic diagram. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

A passage opening through which a game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the ball entry unit 64, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage opening is arranged. there is A game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the entering game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 134(a)), and the game ball is first entered. It is guided to the mouth 64b1. Here, each of the distribution members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900c.

A magnet 900b of a distribution member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back side of the entering ball unit 64, and a base side magnet 901 is arranged on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also made of a bar-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage opening), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. Then, either one of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) for receiving the game ball entering the first ball-entering device 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, by receiving the entered game ball in one of the accommodation parts 900a and 900c, the game ball can be properly inserted into either the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2. can be distributed.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64b1, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball entered into the ball entry unit 64 is received by the accommodation portion 900b. The distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second left ball inlet 64b2. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the ball entering unit 64 to the first ball entering port 64b1 and the left second ball entering port 64b2. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 to win a prize, and a lottery game (particularly 1 lottery game) and the lottery game (special figure 2 lottery game) resulting from the winning to the left second ball entrance 64b2 can be executed efficiently.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment performs the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) at the same time (in parallel are configured to be executable. Therefore, the ball passing through the passage port of the entering ball unit 64 alternately alternates between the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery and the left second ball entrance 64b2 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery. By providing the distribution member 900 so as to be distributed to , the lottery (fluctuation) of each special symbol can be efficiently performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has flowed into the specific area formed on the game area) is placed in the first ball entrance 64b1 (the starting A distribution member 900 (distribution means) that alternately distributes between the winning opening) and the second left ball entrance 64b2 (starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of special figure 2) is provided, but it is limited to this There may be provided a distribution means for regularly distributing the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 at different ratios (for example, 2 to 1). It is preferable to configure so that the distribution ratio is high for the entrance corresponding to the special figure type on the side where the short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, each special figure variation can be executed efficiently.

Furthermore, the ball that has flowed into the ball entrance unit 64 can be distributed to the first ball entrance 64b1, the second ball entrance 64b2, and other ball entrances (for example, the general ball entrance 63). A member 900 (dividing means) may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 surely enter each ball entrance. A configuration may also be adopted in which the ball is distributed to a flow path in which the ball can enter.

Also, it may be configured so that the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member 900 can enter a plurality of ball entrances. 80% of the balls distributed to the first flow path go to the first ball entrance 64b1, and 10% go to the left second ball entrance unit 64b2. It may be configured so that the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 at a rate of 10%. In this case, the ball distributed to the first flow path and the ball distributed to the second flow path should be different in the ratio of entering each ball entrance. Even if there is, a ball can be sorted into a channel in which the ball can (easily) enter the first ball entrance 64b1 and a channel in which the ball can (easily) enter the left second ball entrance 64b2. Included in the concept of means.

In addition, a rolling area is provided in which the ball that has flowed into the ball entering unit 64 can circulate, and a plurality of passage holes are formed in the rolling area. It may be configured such that a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the lottery, the second left ball entrance 64b2 that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, and the general ball entrance 63). When such a configuration is used, the passing opening through which the ball that rolls on the rolling area passes can be changed according to the momentum of the ball rolling on the rolling area. can be made to pass irregularly through each passage opening, and the number of balls entering the entrance opening, which is advantageous to the player, is greater than the number of balls entering other entrance openings. can make it possible. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying which passage port the ball that has flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 passes through, and by extension, which ball-entering port the ball enters. Note that such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which the balls that have flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 are irregularly distributed toward a plurality of ball-entering openings, is also included in the concept of the distribution means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means is provided with one distribution member 900 that changes the distribution destination based on the passage of the ball. Alternatively, a plurality of distribution means may be used to vary the distribution destination of the balls. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball-entering means is provided so that only the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can enter the ball. Such a ball entry port may be arranged at a position where balls that are not sorted by the sorting member 900, that is, balls that have not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can also be entered. In this case, it is assumed that the balls that have flowed into the ball entering unit 64 (the balls that have been sorted by the sorting member 900) are more likely to enter the ball entering port than the balls that have not flowed into the ball entering unit 64. good.

By configuring in this way, players can keep an eye on the ball flowing down the game area while expecting the ball to flow into the ball entering unit 64, thereby providing a game that is never boring. In addition, since there is a possibility that the ball that did not flow into the ball-entering unit 64 will also enter the ball-entering opening, expectations can be given to the ball that did not flow into the ball-entering unit 64 until the end. .

Furthermore, when the number of balls that have flowed into the ball entry unit 64 reaches a predetermined number or more within a predetermined period, the distribution means distributes the balls to a specific ball entrance that is more advantageous to the player than other ball entrances. You may configure so that it becomes easy. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play (shoot balls) in order to let many balls flow into the ball-entering unit 64 in a short period of time.

Although the distribution means (distribution member 900) having various technical ideas has been described above, a distribution means may be provided in which each of the technical ideas described above is appropriately combined.

<Third modification>
Next, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the battle production executed during the jackpot game is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of special figure fluctuations in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (30 times) It was configured to run continuously. Then, when the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (30 times), the battle production is terminated, and the production of entering the time saving state (see FIG. 114 (b)) is executed. was

On the other hand, in the third modified example, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in some of the lottery results other than the big win, benefits different from the big win game executed when the big win is won are given. It is constructed so as to be able to win a small prize in which a small prize game is executed. Furthermore, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set to a predetermined end condition (special figure fluctuation Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning a small prize) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol, the execution is continuously performed, and the termination condition is satisfied. After that, a time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135(b)) indicating that the time saving state has been set is executed. By comprising in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state was set at the timing when end conditions were satisfied. In addition, regarding the control of winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the control object for the big win winning in each embodiment described above is changed to a small hit, and the winning judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1) is set to When the range is set to be different from the range corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the small win game is executed, a small win operation scenario different from the big win operation scenario (for example, the round game is one round and the variable winning device 65 is A round game to be opened is performed, and the variable prize winning device 65 is operated based on the condition that either 5 balls win or the opening period has passed for 0.5 seconds as the round end condition of the round game. Since the points are different and the rest is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the third modified example, as a predetermined end condition, it is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) whose establishment timing is irregular. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state of a certain number of times (for example, 100 times of time-saving) is set internally, the time-saving state of various number of times of time-saving depending on the timing at which the time-saving rush production is executed. is set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the effect content of the third modified example will be described. FIG. 135(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen having a display mode that can be executed during the jackpot game displayed after the jackpot game ends (during the time saving state), and FIG. 135(b) It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the time saving rush screen. In addition, in each element displayed in each figure, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the ending screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game is continuously displayed. In this ending screen, a display mode Dm5 showing the number of prize balls won by the player during a period (continuous chance period) in which the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. Then, a display mode Dm10 showing the number of times of the jackpot game executed during the consecutive chance period is displayed. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) is internally a time saving state, so the variation display mode (arrow) indicating that the special figure 2 variation is being performed in the small display area Dm2 is displayed. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is continuing in spite of the fact that the time saving state is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured so that the game executed during the time saving state and the game executed during the jackpot game are the same game (right-handed game). Also, the current game state is not determined by the player depending on the game method.

Next, when the end condition is established during the time saving state, the time saving rush effect is executed as shown in FIG. 135(b). Here, in the third modification, when the termination condition is established by winning a small win, the number of remaining short times at that time is determined, and the determined number of short remaining times is a good value (for example, the last digit is "0"), the number of times of correction obtained by correcting the actual number of times of shortening remaining time is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the number of times of time saving (number of times of remaining time) displayed when the time saving rush production is executed can be set to a good value, so the time saving state is set at the time when the time saving rush production is executed. It can make you think of the timing.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 135(b), 80, which is the number of corrections, is displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm11. Then, in the small display area Dm2, a display mode of "341" indicating that the special figure 2 has been won is displayed. In the third modification, the same variable winning device 65 is configured to vary the winning game to be executed in the case of winning a small win and in the case of winning a big win. Therefore, when the time-saving rush effect is executed based on the winning of the small prize, the time-saving rush effect is executed based on the execution of the winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is varied. On the other hand, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be reminiscent of the time when the time-saving rush production is executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the small winning game is completed, it is configured to execute the time saving rush effect shown in FIG. You may comprise so that a time saving rush production may be performed sometimes.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the electrical configuration of the third modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the third modification differs from the above-described third embodiment in that a battle end flag 223ca, a corrected flag 223acb, and a correction count storage area 223cc are added. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, in the present third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends, the "jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a))" is used. In this respect, it is different from the above-described third embodiment (of the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "battle effect screen" is displayed as a display mode that is displayed even after the jackpot game ends), but for convenience of explanation, Description will be made using flag names (in-battle flag 223ba, battle-end flag 223ca) used in the third embodiment. That is, in the third modification, when the in-battle flag 223ba is set to ON, it indicates that the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a)) is displayed, and the battle end flag 223ca, which will be described later, is displayed. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the condition for terminating the display of the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a)) is established.

The battle end flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the end condition is satisfied based on the small winning, and is set to ON when the ending condition is satisfied by the small winning.

The corrected flag 223acb is a flag for indicating that the number of times of shortening remaining time displayed has been corrected, and is set to ON when the number of times of shortening remaining time is corrected. By setting this corrected flag 223acb to ON, as a variation production of the special figure fluctuation, an effect mode (correction effect mode) for adjusting the difference between the corrected number of times of time saving and the actual number of times of time saving is executed. .

The corrected number of times storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing a value indicating the corrected number of times of shortened remaining time after correcting the number of times of shortened remaining time and a value indicating the difference between the corrected number of times of shortened remaining time and the actual number of times of shortened remaining time. Based on the value stored in this correction frequency storage area 223cc, a correction effect mode is set as a variable effect of the special figure fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIGS. 137 to 141, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third modification will be described. In the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification, with respect to the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described third embodiment, the small winning end processing during the small winning game is changed. , the battle effect update process is changed to the battle effect update process 4, and the special figure fluctuation start process is changed to the special figure fluctuation start process 4. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, as described above, in the third modification, in contrast to the above-described third embodiment, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends is changed to the "battle effect display". , but for the convenience of explanation, the processing relating to the battle presentation in the above-described third embodiment is used as it is. In the third modified example, when the process related to the battle effect is executed, the process related to the jackpot ending screen is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 137, the contents of the small winning end processing 4 (S2571) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning ending process 4 (S2571). When the small hit end process 4 (S2571) is executed, first, in order to determine whether the battle is being produced at the present time, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ba is set to ON (S2791). If it is determined that there is (S2791: Yes), the in-battle flag 223ba is set to OFF (S2792), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is off (S2791: No), this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the details of the battle presentation update process 4 (S4651). In this battle effect update process 4 (S4651), in contrast to the battle effect update process described above, it is determined that the first end condition (remaining time count reaches 70) has not ended while the battle effect is being executed. If so (S6654: No), it is determined whether the battle end flag 223ca is set to ON (S6671), and if it is determined to be ON (S6671: Yes), the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Next, the content of the number of times correction processing (S6672) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the details of the number-of-times correction process (S6672). In this number of times correction process (S6672), a process for correcting the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the battle effect ends to a good number of times is executed.

When the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed, first, the remaining time number of times is extracted (S6691), and it is determined whether the last digit of the extracted remaining time short number of times is "0" (S6692), "0" If so (S6692: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last digit is not "0" ("1 to 9") (S6692: No), the number of corrections (correction remaining number of times of time reduction) is set (S6693), the set number of corrections is stored in the correction number storage area 223cc (S6694), the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6695), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 140 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4291). This special figure fluctuation start process 4 (S4291) is different from the special figure fluctuation start process described above in that the correction number corresponding process (S4391) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the correction number handling process (S4391) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the details of the correction count handling process (S4391). In this correction count corresponding process (S4391), when the number of remaining time reduction displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the corrected remaining time reduction count, the difference between the corrected remaining time reduction count and the actual remaining time reduction count. is set to 0, processing for setting a variable effect is executed.

When the correction count correspondence process (S4391) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6801). is 30 seconds or longer (S6802). When it is determined that it is 30 seconds or longer in the process of S6802 (S6802), the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc and the actual remaining working hours reduction number are read (S6803), and the difference is calculated (S6804).

Then, the display mode corresponding to the difference value referred to in the process of S6804 is set (S6805), and the value (difference value) stored in the correction number storage area 223cc is updated according to the selected display mode ( S6806), it is determined whether the difference value after updating is 0 (S6807). When it is determined that the difference value is 0 (S6807: Yes), since there is no need to set the correction effect any more, the corrected flag 223acb is set to OFF (S6808), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if S6801: No, S6802: No, S6807: No, then this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S6802, it is a process to determine whether or not it is possible to execute the number of times of remaining time reduction correction effect (effect of bringing the number of times of remaining time reduction on display close to the actual number of times of remaining time reduction) as the variable effect of this time. In this modification, the execution condition of the remaining time reduction number correction effect is that the fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds or more. You may comprise so that the production|presentation aspect (range of the value of the number of remaining time reductions to update) may be changed.

As described above, in the third modification, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. During the time saving state, it continues until a predetermined end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is elected as a lottery result of a special symbol) is established. After the end condition is established, the time saving rush performance (see FIG. 135(b)) indicating that the time saving state has been set is executed. By comprising in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state was set at the timing when end conditions were satisfied.

Furthermore, in the third modified example, as a predetermined end condition, it is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) whose establishment timing is irregular. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state of a certain number of times (for example, 100 times of time-saving) is set internally, the time-saving state of various number of times of time-saving depending on the timing at which the time-saving rush production is executed. is set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present third modification, when correcting the number of times of shortening remaining time, a correction process is performed to correct the number of times of shortening remaining time to a value smaller than the actual number of times of shortening remaining time. A correction process may be performed to correct the reference value (for example, the last digit is "0" or "5") to the value with the smallest difference. In this case, the number of times of reduced time after correction (number of times of reduced remaining time) may be greater than the actual number of reduced times of remaining time. The value of the number of times of reduced remaining time (value of the number of times of reduced remaining time) may be configured to execute a variable performance for subtracting a plurality of times. Specifically, once the variation performance (for example, 60 seconds) is performed twice, the third pattern is temporarily stopped after 30 seconds, and the variation performance to restart is performed. Then, the value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed in accordance with the temporary stop timing is subtracted by one. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions on the display can be brought closer to the actual number of time reductions without causing discomfort.

In addition, in the third modification, the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) in which the time reduction state is set is used to notify the player by the time reduction rush production, but not limited to this, for example, the production mode The game state is changed from the time saving state to the probability variable state, and the probability variable state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 times). You may use the structure which alert|reports by rush production|presentation.

Furthermore, when the special drawing is executed in the state where the variable probability state is set, a falling lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to end the variable probability state is provided separately from the jackpot lottery means for performing the jackpot lottery, In the period in which the variable state is set (for example, 100 times), in addition to the first end condition (30 special figure fluctuations) and the second end condition (small winning), the third condition (falling election) Each condition It may be configured such that the effect mode executed in accordance with the establishment of is varied.

In this case, for example, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is executed, and if the third condition is satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is changed. It is good to constitute so that the reduction in working hours information production mentioned above may be performed. Further, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the fixed notification performance is not executed, and only when the third condition is satisfied, the short time notification performance is executed. You can

In addition, in the present third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "jackpot ending screen (Fig. 135(a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends. Any display mode may be used as long as it makes the player think that the player is currently playing the jackpot game. For example, an interval screen displayed during the interval period may be displayed, or a display displayed during the jackpot game. A dedicated display mode having at least a part of the mode (for example, a display mode displayed in the small area Dm5 or the small area Dm6) may be used.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a further modified example of the battle effect in the third modified example described above will be described. In the third modification described above, when the time-saving jackpot is won, after the jackpot game ends (after the time-saving state is set), a predetermined end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations is a predetermined number (30 times) or until a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning a small prize) is established as a lottery result of a special pattern, and the probability is changed during the battle performance in the time-saving state. It is configured to execute a battle victory performance (battle victory performance) when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the performance of losing the battle at the end of the time-saving jackpot game (battle defeat performance) is suppressed, the winning rate of the battle performance (the execution ratio of the battle victory performance) is increased, and the player It was intended to make it possible to make the audience interested in the performance results.

However, in the above-described third modification, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the battle production in the time-saving state, the rematch production is executed, so the period of one battle production is extended, and the player cannot control the production. I had a problem with getting bored. In addition, there is a risk that victory or defeat will not be displayed as a result of the battle presentation even though the jackpot has been won multiple times, resulting in an presentation that is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the variation pattern selection table referred to when the time saving state is set is changed 30 times after the time saving state is set (as the end condition of the battle production It is configured so that different fluctuation times are selected between the first short period of time until the set special figure fluctuation number) passes and the second short period of time after that, and a jackpot is won during the first short period of time. In this case, the variable time (30 seconds) that can be set is selected for the winning performance period in the battle performance and the pseudo variable probability performance period for pseudo-executing the variable probability performance during the variable probability state. ing.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won during the first time short period (during battle production), regardless of the type of jackpot won (variable jackpot, short-time jackpot), the result of the battle production being executed. As a result, the production of winning the battle (battle victory production) can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the winning rate of the battle effect (percentage of execution of the battle winning effect) and make the player interested in the result of the effect.

Further, it is configured to execute different performances according to the type of jackpot won during the short period of the first time. Specifically, when winning a winning probability big win (8 rounds, 16 rounds) during the short period of the first time, a performance for winning a big winning is executed during the pseudo variable probability performance period, and the game shifts to a big winning game. Then, a new battle effect (battle victory effect) is executed in the jackpot game executed thereafter. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot (2 rounds) is won during the short period of the first time, during the jackpot fluctuation, the pseudo battle performance period is set after the pseudo probability variable performance period, and the jackpot is won during the pseudo probability variable performance period. After the production is executed, a pseudo-battle production is executed, a jackpot game is started during the battle production, and the production result of the pseudo-battle production (battle victory production) is displayed during the short jackpot game period of two rounds. It consists of As a result, if the probability variable jackpot is won during the first short period of time, the battle victory effect can be executed twice by the end of the probability variable jackpot game, so it is used in the third modification described above. It is possible to increase the winning rate of the battle presentation (execution rate of the battle winning presentation) more than the configuration, and to make the player interested in the presentation result.

In addition, in the fourth modification, when a jackpot is won during the first short time period, a constant fluctuation time (30 seconds) is selected regardless of the jackpot type, but this is not limited to this. If the jackpot type in which the pseudo-battle performance is executed is won, the variation time is longer than that in the case of winning the other jackpot category, that is, the variation time is longer by the performance period of the pseudo-battle performance (for example, 50 seconds). can be selected. As a result, the period until the simulated battle performance is executed can be set to a fixed period, so that the judgment of the jackpot type won this time before the simulated battle performance is executed is suppressed. can be done.

On the other hand, during the first short period of time (during the battle production), if the short-time jackpot is won, the first battle victory production is executed during the jackpot fluctuation, and the pseudo-variable production is executed in the same way as the above-mentioned variable jackpot. do. Then, in the second battle performance (battle performance during the jackpot game, or pseudo-battle performance), a battle performance that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is satisfied is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first short period of time, one battle victory effect can be executed, so the winning rate of the battle effect (the execution ratio of the battle win effect ) and make the player interested in the effect result. In addition, since the battle victory effect can be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of times the jackpot is won during the battle effect, the effect can be provided without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, the contents of the pseudo probability variable production will be explained. In the fourth modification, when the variable probability state is set in the same manner as in the third embodiment and the third modification described above, the variable probability effect in which the character 811 runs on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. . During the pseudo probability variable production, the production including at least a part of the production modes executed when the probability variable state is set (the concept including the same production) is executed, and during the production period It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation performance that makes the player think that the special figure variation is being executed a plurality of times.

As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the pseudo probability variation performance executed in a partial period of one special figure variation (jackpot variation) and the probability variation performance performed over a plurality of special figure variations. can do.

Next, with reference to Drawing 142, the contents of table 202de2 for probability variation and time saving are explained as a variation pattern table used in this 4th modification. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable probability/time reduction table 202de2. This probability variation/time reduction table 202de2 differs from the above-described probability variation/time reduction table 202e2 (see FIG. 19) in that the table to be referred to is different based on the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and each of the variation type counter CS1 The difference is that the types of fluctuation patterns defined corresponding to the values are different, and the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100 to 71", that is, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times (first time short period), If the judgment result is a hit (big hit, small hit), the time-saving A big hit variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if the win/fail determination result is out, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1, it is defined to select a time-saving A-out variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "70 to 1", that is, the period (second time short period) after the number of special figure fluctuations has passed 30 times since the time saving state is set, and the success or failure determination result is hit ( In the case of a jackpot or a small hit), the time-saving B jackpot variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. In the range of "0 to 179", the time reduction B deviation variation pattern 1 with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and in the case of the range of "180 to 198", the time reduction B deviation variation pattern 2 with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected. is defined as

In the fourth modification, by using the above-described probability variable / time reduction table 202de2, a short period of time when the battle production is executed (first short period of time) and a short period of time when the battle production is not executed (second short period of time) , so that different fluctuation times can be selected. During the first time short period, when the special lottery is lost, a variation time shorter than the second time short period is selected, and when the special lottery is successful, a longer variation than the second time short period is selected. Since it is configured so that the time is selected, the degree of advantage in the reduced working hours state does not differ significantly between the first reduced working hours and the second reduced working hours.

In addition, in the fourth modification, if a small win is won during the first time period and the conditions for ending the battle production are satisfied, the battle victory production is performed once in the same manner as the production executed when the big win is won. After that, the simulated probability variable performance is executed, and the performance of losing the battle in the simulated battle performance to be executed after that is executed during the small winning variation. As a result, the battle effect can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. In this case, as the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is longer than when winning the other jackpot type, that is, the fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) that is longer by the period until the effect result of the pseudo battle effect is displayed. It is better to configure so that you can select

Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small win is won during the first short period of time and the end condition of the battle production is satisfied, the period from the end of the small winning game to the end of the first short period of time The variation time of the special figure variation executed in the second time period is configured to be selected based on the data table referred to during the second time period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable time corresponding to various effects during the battle effect from being selected despite the end of the battle effect.

As described above, in the third modified example and the fourth modified example, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot game ends, and a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the time saving state. A performance for notifying that the time saving state disadvantageous to the player is set, out of the probability variable state and the time saving state, is executed after the time saving state is set and a predetermined end condition is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the time saving state and the probability variable state based on the small hit winning.

In addition, in the time-saving state that is set when you win the time-saving jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is slightly shorter than the normal state (same concept) (for example, 5 to 60 seconds). It is constructed so as to be easily selected, and when a small prize is won in the time saving state, the data table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special figure variation is switched to provide a short variation time (for example, 0.5 to 0.5). 5 seconds) may be easily selected. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal design is also similar to the fluctuation time of the above-mentioned special figure, and the shorter fluctuation time is likely to be selected after winning a small hit during the time saving state than when the time saving state is set. It is better to configure it so that

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the time saving state has been set based on winning the small win, and the number of remaining time saving times at the time of winning the small win can be seen. Since it becomes the number of times of time saving, a player can be made to play a game in which various times of time saving are set. In such a case, by using the technique of the third modified example described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more comfortable game.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, mamball, slot machine, and so-called game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stage settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the ratio of determining the jackpot that transitions to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) (or easily shifts) can be changed according to the setting, or a disadvantageous game state (for example, normal state) ) may be varied according to settings. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% in the event of a jackpot, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of only 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a type of game machine that has a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to have a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then confirms and displays the identification information. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature group A> (sets whether or not to overlap button effects)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, wherein the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priorities and an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to cause the effect execution means to execute the effects corresponding to the plurality of the mode information stored in the same order of priority. A gaming machine A1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which various effects are executed as suggestive effects at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestive effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, by executing an operation effect that causes the player to operate a predetermined operation means as a suggestive effect, a player-participating suggestive effect is executed. There are amusement machines that enhance interest. However, since there are players whose desire to play is reduced by executing a large number of suggestive effects, an effect that satisfies a plurality of players is executed only by executing the suggestive effects according to predetermined rules. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest in the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the mode information for indicating the mode of performance of the performance executed by the performance executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of mode information having the same priority order, and the execution effect setting means executes an effect for the plurality of mode information stored in the same order of priority. It is decided whether to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably set whether or not to perform duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each piece of mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so as to enable overlapping execution, and when actually executing the performance, the mode of the performance to be executed is varied according to the setting contents of the execution performance setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the performance setting timing at which the performance mode is set and the performance execution timing at which the performance based on the performance mode set is greatly different, the execution performance setting means at the performance execution timing. There is an effect that an effect corresponding to the setting contents of can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine A1, the mode information storage means transfers the mode information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area when a predetermined transfer condition is satisfied. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is a machine for storing data.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, mode information already stored in a specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when a transfer condition is satisfied. As a result, the performance mode to be executed can be changed depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the performance mode setting means sets the performance modes having the same priority order, an order determination means capable of determining the order in which the performance modes are set; and erasing means for erasing the mode information stored in the storage area, wherein the erasing means deletes the number of the performance modes for which the same priority order is set by the performance setting means. when the number of storage areas is set larger than the number of the storage areas corresponding to the priority order of , the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is deleted in order from the oldest order based on the determination result of the order determination means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the number of performance modes set with the same priority order is set more than the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority order, the set The performance modes are erased in order from the oldest one. Therefore, since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the performance corresponding to the performance mode set most recently, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that, using the configuration of the gaming machine A1, if it is set to execute only the effect corresponding to the mode information stored in one storage area for the same priority, the most recent It is preferable that mode information corresponding to the set performance mode is stored in one storage area, and other mode information is deleted by the erasing means.

In the gaming machine A1 or A3, the effect executing means stores the first mode information in a predetermined first storage area among the plurality of storage areas of the mode information storage means, and stores the first mode information in the specific first storage area. A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that when specific second mode information different from the first mode information is stored in a second storage area different from the above, a special performance mode effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas is stored in a predetermined combination, a special effect mode effect is executed. Thus, in contrast to the process of storing the mode information in the storage area by the mode information storage means, the process of storing the effect mode that has already been set and the process of establishing the execution conditions for the effect of the special effect mode are performed. , can have a dual role. In addition, since it is possible to assign a role for executing a special effect mode effect even to mode information with a low priority order for which the corresponding effect is difficult to be executed, the stored mode information can be effectively utilized. can. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be executed efficiently.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A4 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the effect execution means. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to execute an operation performance using an operation means that the player can operate, so that the player is interested in the performance to be executed. There is an effect that it can be given to have and can improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A5, the effect mode setting means can set an operation effect mode in which an operation effective period for validly determining the determination result of the operation determining means is set as the effect mode, and the effect is executed. The means stores first mode information corresponding to the operation presentation mode as the first mode information in the first storage area, and stores second mode information corresponding to the operation presentation mode as the second mode information. A gaming machine 6 characterized by executing the special effect mode when stored in the second storage area.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, a special performance can be executed in a situation where a plurality of operation performance modes are executed, so that the player is interested in the performance to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A6, the effect execution means includes the operation effective period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the first mode information, and the operation valid period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the second mode information. When the operation effective period overlaps, the effect of the special effect mode is executed, and in the effect of the special effect mode, the effect in which the operation effect mode is set is executed. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect when the operation effect is set redundantly. In addition, when the operation valid period is set in duplicate, since the special performance mode can be executed as the operation performance, the special performance mode performance is executed while continuing the performance for operating the operating means. be able to. Therefore, since the effect of the special effect mode can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature group B> (Change the area to store the button effect according to the setting trigger)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information for indicating in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities, and the effect mode setting means has at least It has a predetermined first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the mode information storage means is established when the presentation mode is set by the presentation mode setting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that ranges of the plurality of storage areas for storing the mode information are varied according to the setting conditions set therein.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which various effects are executed as suggestive effects at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestive effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, there is also a game machine configured to execute more suggestive effects so that suggestive effects can be set at various occasions. However, there is a problem in that a large number of suggestive effects set at various occasions are executed, resulting in a complicated effect as a whole, which reduces the player's desire to play the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game capable of improving the interest in the game by suppressing a decrease in motivation for the game due to the effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the first set condition or the second set condition is established, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is set. Mode information for indicating is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities by the mode information storage means. Then, it is possible to change the range in which the mode information is stored among the plurality of storage areas according to the setting conditions that are established when the presentation mode is set. As a result, it is possible to set a limit on the order of priority according to the setting condition of the presentation mode, so that regularity can be imparted to the presentation executed based on each presentation mode set under a plurality of conditions. . Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of a complicated performance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the performance to be executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine B1, the plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of the same priority orders, and the plurality of modes stored in the same priority order in the effect executing means. The game machine B2 is characterized by having execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to the information.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, mode information for indicating the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of pieces of mode information having the same priority order, and the execution effect setting means executes an effect for the plurality of mode information stored in the same order of priority. It is decided whether to By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably set whether or not to perform duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each piece of mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so as to enable overlapping execution, and when actually executing the performance, the mode of the performance to be executed is varied according to the setting contents of the execution performance setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the performance setting timing at which the performance mode is set and the performance execution timing at which the performance based on the performance mode set is greatly different, the execution performance setting means at the performance execution timing. There is an effect that an effect corresponding to the setting contents of can be easily executed.

In the game machine B2, the mode information storage means transfers the mode information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area when a predetermined transfer condition is satisfied. A game machine B3 characterized by being a machine for storing.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, mode information already stored in a specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when a transfer condition is satisfied. As a result, the performance mode to be executed can be changed depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

<Feature group C> (Premium effect for low priority effects)
An effect execution means for executing an effect for a predetermined period determined in advance based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing, in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, mode information for indicating the mode of presentation set by The performance mode can be set so as to overlap, and has a performance end means for ending the performance being executed before the prescribed period elapses when a prescribed end condition is established. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various suggestive effects at various timings. However, it has been proposed to execute a suggestive effect with a higher priority when execution timings of suggestive effects overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, suggestive effects are executed according to a predetermined priority order. For example, by setting a high priority to a suggestive effect with a high effect, a suggestive effect with a low effect is executed. This can solve the problem that the suggestive performance with high performance effect is not executed and the amusement of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestive effects to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestive effects with low priority, and the executed suggestive effects become monotonous. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects.

According to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the mode information for indicating the set effect mode is given different priorities by the mode information storage means. Stored in multiple storage areas. Then, when the termination condition is established during execution of the performance, the performance is terminated by the performance termination means before a predetermined period elapses. As a result, the performance execution period can be varied depending on whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the performance based on the mode information with the lower priority among the mode information set in the overlapping periods can be easily executed. . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The game machine C1 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means is a predetermined value. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the end condition is established when the determination result is the result of .

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the termination condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means by the player, so that the player can select the period during which the effect is executed. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to vary the amount of the effect to be executed according to the player's willingness to participate in the effect, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result. , wherein the effect mode setting means includes a first effect mode that is likely to be set at least when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and a second effect mode that is more difficult to set than the first effect mode. and the mode information storage means stores first mode information for indicating the first presentation mode and second mode information for indicating the second presentation mode. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the data is stored in a storage area having a lower priority than the storage area.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the priority order of the first performance mode, which is easily set when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result for executing the privilege game, is set to be lower than the second performance mode, which is difficult to be set. be done. Thus, the effect corresponding to the second effect mode is more likely to be executed when the end condition is established and the effect period of the effect being executed is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the effect being executed can be expected to end early, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Feature D group> (associating effects with different priorities)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information for indicating in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, wherein the effect execution means corresponds to one priority among the plurality of storage areas When the first mode information stored in the first storage area satisfies a predetermined performance condition, the second mode stored in the second storage area corresponding to the other priority lower than the one priority. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it also executes an effect corresponding to the information in association with it.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various suggestive effects at various timings. However, it has been proposed to execute a suggestive effect with a higher priority when execution timings of suggestive effects overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, suggestive effects are executed according to a predetermined priority order. For example, by setting a high priority to a suggestive effect with a high effect, a suggestive effect with a low effect is executed. This can solve the problem that the suggestive performance with high performance effect is not executed and the amusement of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestive effects to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestive effects with low priority, and the executed suggestive effects become monotonous. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects.

According to the game machine D1, an effect corresponding to the mode information stored in the plurality of storage areas with different priorities by the mode information storage means is executed by the effect execution means based on the priority order. Furthermore, when the first mode information stored in the first storage area corresponding to one priority satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than the one priority is stored in the second storage area. An effect corresponding to the stored second mode information is associated and executed. As a result, an effect with a low priority can be executed in association with an effect with a high priority. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D1 has an effect period setting means capable of setting a period during which the effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect period setting means executes the first effect corresponding to the first mode information. and a second effect period during which the second effect corresponding to the second mode information is executed are set differently.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, each performance period is set so that the first performance period during which the first performance is executed and the second performance period during which the second performance is executed do not overlap. is set by the effect period setting means, it is possible to reliably notify the player of a plurality of effects to be executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine D2, a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result. The effect mode setting means has at least the first effect that is likely to be set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and the second effect that is less likely to be set than the first effect. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result for executing a privilege game, the first effect which is likely to be set and the second effect which is difficult to be set can be associated and executed. Furthermore, the second effect is a low priority effect that is executed alone. As a result, when the second performance is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the current execution of the second performance is related to the first performance, and a sense of expectation for the execution of the privilege game. can increase Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that the effect period setting means sets the second effect period earlier than the first effect period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second presentation period is set before the first presentation period, so the second presentation is executed before the first presentation. It will be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed before the second effect and the expectation of the player at the time when the second effect is executed to be spoiled. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is continuously executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the effect period setting means is configured to execute the second effect in association with the first effect and to execute the second effect without being associated with the first effect. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the period for which the second effect period is set is different between when the second effect period is set.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the current second production is executed in association with the first production based on the period during which the second production is executed. Since it is possible to predict whether or not it is, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature group E> (special effect when switching the target of the main variation effect)
A first determination means for executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination means different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. A second determination means for executing determination, a first effect execution means for causing a display means to execute a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means for a predetermined period, and a determination result of the second determination means. a second effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a second effect for a predetermined period of time; an effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means; An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second effect, and an effect switching means for switching the first effect being executed to the second effect when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The game machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state in which the switching condition can be satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there are game machines that enhance the effect of suggestive effects by executing various suggestive effects at various timings, and in such a game machine, suggestive effects are set at different timings based on different triggers However, when another suggestive effect is executed while one suggestive effect is being executed, the one suggestive effect being executed is forcibly terminated and the other suggestive effect is executed. There is a game machine that has a game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestive effect is being executed, another suggestive effect can be executed, so the effect is that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. be. However, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestive effect regardless of the effect situation of the one suggestive effect being executed. However, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect causes the predetermined process change mode to end in the middle. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the switching condition is satisfied, the effect switching means switches the first effect being executed to the second effect. A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied. Thus, the performance mode of the first performance is set to the special performance mode, and the performance of the special performance mode is executed when switching to the second performance, so that various suggestive performances can be executed without confusing the player. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a related effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect as the special effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect is set as the special effect mode. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved without confusing the player.

The game machine E2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect execution means and the first effect execution means. The second effect execution means is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and the effect mode setting means performs the operation effect as the second effect. is set, the game machine E3 sets an effect mode corresponding to the operation effect as the special effect mode of the first effect.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect mode setting means is a first effect mode that is likely to be set as the effect mode of the first effect when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result. and a second effect mode that is less likely to be set than the first effect mode, and the second effect mode is set as a special effect mode of the first effect. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, the effect mode of the first effect being executed can be set to a effect mode in which the player is less interested. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the switching of the first effect to the second effect.

<Feature F group> (Continues to execute the variable promotion effect after the jackpot ends)
determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and setting after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played. The machine has at least a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as a result of the effect during execution of the privilege game, and the notification effect execution means is , the game machine F1 is characterized in that, when the privilege game in which the first game state is set after the privilege game ends, the notification effect is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. .

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. After the end of the privilege game, the game state can be set to either an advantageous game state in which winning is likely to occur or a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to win, and during the privilege game, after the end of the privilege game. It has been proposed to enable execution of a suggestion effect for suggesting the game state to be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). With such a game machine, it is possible to experience the pleasure of obtaining a privilege during the privilege game and the pleasure of predicting the game state to be set at the same time, thereby improving the amusement of the game. rice field. However, if it can be determined that the game state set after the end of the privilege game is a disadvantageous game state by the suggestive effect executed during the privilege game, the willingness to play after the end of the privilege game is reduced. I had a problem. In addition, the rate at which the advantageous game state is set is predetermined depending on the type of gaming machine. In the presentation, it is difficult to execute the presentation suggesting that an advantageous game state is set, and the suggestion presentation itself causes a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the notification effect executed by the notification effect execution means during execution of the privilege game is set to the first game state, a predetermined end condition is established after the privilege game is completed. will run until Thus, the privilege game in which the first game state is set after the privilege game ends and the second game state is set after the privilege game ends during the first game state until the end condition is satisfied. is executed, it is possible to set a notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect. Thus, compared with the case where the notification performance is executed only during the privilege game, it is possible to increase the setting ratio of the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the performance result of the notification performance. Therefore, it is possible to execute a notification effect that gives the player a sense of anticipation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine F1, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminations of the discrimination means, and a measurement discrimination means for discriminating whether the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number; is established when it is determined by the measuring and determining means that the number of times of determination after the first game state is set reaches the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the termination condition is satisfied based on the number of determinations by the determination means. can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, and a game is played by the privilege game. special privilege game execution means capable of executing a special privilege game capable of imparting a special privilege different from a privilege that can be imparted to a person; and variable means capable of changing to a second state, wherein the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed in a state where the first game state is set. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, the end condition is established when the special privilege game in which the variable means is varied is executed. can make you think it was established. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the period until the termination condition is satisfied is a privilege game, and it is possible to execute the notification effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the notification effect executing means is provided when the special game executing means executes the special game in which the first game state is set before the end condition is satisfied. is a game machine F4 characterized in that the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, during the execution of the notification effect, the setting of the second game state cannot be notified to the privilege game. As long as the winning is won, the notification performance can be continuously executed, so that as the performance result of the notification performance, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the notification performance indicating that the second game state is not set. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect result of the notification effect can relatively increase the ratio of the notification result indicating that the second game state is set.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period, and the special game is executed by the special game executing means. special period setting means capable of setting a special period to be executed, remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the special period determined by the remaining period determining means special period notification means capable of notifying remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the period, wherein the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the remaining period of the special period is notified after the end condition is satisfied and the notification performance is finished, the remaining period indicated by the remaining special period information can be varied according to the timing when the end condition is satisfied. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the length of the special period set when the first game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Features G group> (Time-saving rush effect with small winnings during time-saving state)
determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the stop display of the identification information in a specific display mode, and setting after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished. a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played; and an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect. and an execution means, wherein, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the effect execution means executes the first game from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the first notification condition. When the second game state is set based on the fact that one performance is executed and the first notification condition is established, the second game state is less likely to be executed than the case where the first game state is set. A game machine G1 characterized by executing 2 effects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. After the end of the privilege game, either a first game state which is more advantageous than the normal state or a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state can be set for a predetermined period. It has been proposed that a suggestive effect for suggesting a game state to be set after the end of the bonus game can be executed during the game (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200589). In such a gaming machine, when the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game, the player continues to play the game for a predetermined period of time with regret that the second game state was not set. There is a problem that the desire to play after the end of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, even if the first game state is set, until the first notification condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the first game state has been set, so that the privilege game ends. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play later from being lowered. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, period setting means for setting a period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means, , wherein the second effect includes a notification mode for notifying the remaining period of the first game state at least when the first notification condition is established.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is notified, the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first game state is set, that is, the period set by the period setting means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period of time. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that more types of periods are set by the period setting means than the number of types actually set as the period of the first game state. There is an effect that a game can be provided.

In the game machine G1 or G2, it is possible to execute a special game capable of imparting a privilege different from the privilege game to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a special display mode different from the specific display mode. said special game execution means, and when said special game is executed in a state where said first effect is being executed by said suggestive effect execution means, said first notification condition is satisfied. Characteristic game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the first notification condition is satisfied when the special game is executed, so the timing at which the first notification condition is satisfied is determined by the determination result of the determination means. can be different. Therefore, since the timing at which the second effect is executed can be set irregularly, an effect that is difficult for the player to predict can be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G3, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is changed to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the first state. Having ball entry means, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, or when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, the predetermined opening condition can be established. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, when a privilege game or a special game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state. When the 1 notification condition is established, it can be made to think that the second performance is executed based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, since the remaining period notified by the second effect can be thought to be the period (initial value) set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the effect executing means executes, as the first effect, a effect using at least a part of the effect mode of the privilege game effect executed during the privilege game. A game machine G5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can be made to think that the player is in the privilege game during the period until the first notification condition is established, the timing at which the first game state is set can be made difficult to understand, thereby making the game interesting. has the effect of being able to improve In the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine G2, by making the timing at which the first game state is set difficult to understand, the player can easily understand how long the first game state has been set this time. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G5, a remaining period condition determining means for determining whether the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first notification condition is established satisfies a predetermined remaining period condition; remaining period correction means for executing a predetermined correction process for the remaining period when the period condition determining means determines that the remaining period condition is not satisfied; The game machine G6 is characterized in that the notification mode included in the second effect is executed in place of the corrected remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period corrected by the remaining period correcting means.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, when the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied does not satisfy the remaining period condition, the remaining period The remaining period of time is corrected by the period correcting means, and a corrected remaining period of time information mode indicating the corrected remaining period of time is executed as a second effect. Thereby, when the value indicating the remaining period of the first game state is an incomplete value, the player can be notified of the corrected value after being corrected to an appropriate value. Specifically, for example, when the period of the first gaming state is set based on the number of special figure fluctuations, the value of the remaining period (number of remaining special figure fluctuations) at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied , when the last digit is not "0" or "5" (for example, "81"), the correction process is executed to correct the value of the remaining period to be "0" or "5" (for example, , "80"), and informs the player of the corrected value. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of a sharp value, so that the player can easily think that the timing when the second performance is executed is the timing when the first game state is set. has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S306 First discrimination means S908 Second discrimination means S4202 First effect executing means S4204 Second effect executing means S5606 Effects mode setting means

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether a game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 is provided with a determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination, and a game machine that provides a player with a specific determination result based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A privilege game executing means capable of executing an advantageous privilege game, a first game state in which a predetermined benefit relating to the game can be received by executing the first game, and the predetermined benefit rather than the first game. and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state capable of executing a second game in which the bonus game is easily received, and the privilege game ends. a specific effect starting means for starting a specific effect in which a specific mode capable of making the player understand that the second game state is set as a result of the effect is displayed on the display means; At least a part of the mode displayed on the display means during the effect is displayed on the display means even during a period from the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. The game machine comprises game period setting means capable of setting a game period of a predetermined game to be executed when the first game state is set by the game state setting means; and a remaining period informing means capable of informing the player of the remaining period of the game period set by the period setting means. The remaining period information can be notified when the termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. , a first game state in which a predetermined benefit relating to the game can be received by executing the first game, and a second game in which the predetermined benefit is easier to receive than the first game a second game state capable of executing two games; a specific effect starting means for starting a specific effect in which a specific mode capable of making the player understand that the second game state is set is displayed on the display means, and the display during the specific effect At least a part of the mode displayed on the means is displayed on the display means at least during a period from the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. The game machine comprises game period setting means capable of setting a game period of a predetermined game to be executed when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and setting by the game period setting means. a remaining period informing means capable of informing the player of the remaining period of the game period, wherein the remaining period informing means is adapted to notify the player of the remaining period of the game period when the predetermined end condition is established. In this case, the remaining period information can be notified.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; (b) is the third symbol in the first embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed with a display apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production|presentation performed corresponding to each special design fluctuation|variation in 1st Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow which duplicate button production|presentation is performed as button production|presentation performed corresponding to each special design variation in 1st Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production|presentation period in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when button effect A is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when the button production|presentation A succeeds on the display screen of a 3rd design display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when the button production|presentation A fails on the display screen of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a button effect B is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when button production|presentation B is complete|finished on the display screen of a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the button production|presentation C which is a duplicate button production|presentation is complete|finished on the display screen of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the first embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number table set in a ROM of . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table set in the ROM, (c) shows the contents of the special figure 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table set in a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variable / time saving table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in the first embodiment FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latency determination table set in a ROM of . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a button effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a button effect hierarchy storage area set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-games update process performed by MPU in a control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing a first prefetching process executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the number of pending pitches processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a status command receiving process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing execution timing setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 button production setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing button effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing button effect start processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing button effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second frame button setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing button press processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suspension production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suspension production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the normal 8 pending effect start screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation result of the normal 8 reservation|holding production|presentation performed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a super hold effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is started, and (b) is a third symbol display in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a super pending effect displayed on the device ends; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pending effect selection table configured in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a performance hierarchy storage area configured in the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the set first effect hierarchy storage area 223 in a schematic diagram. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between each hierarchical storage area and set effect information; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding pitch number process 2 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special holding effect processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the related production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing button pressing process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation level selection process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example when it wins by battle production|presentation. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case of defeat in the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a rematch in the battle effect displayed in . (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat, and (b) is the third symbol in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example when the battle production|presentation displayed with a display apparatus is complete|finished and a time saving state is alerted|reported. It is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st jackpot random number 2 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in the third embodiment is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of, (c) is a special figure 2 jackpot type set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. 13 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the battle production|presentation update process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st modification. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in the first modification, (b) is an example of the variation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first modification It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the variation effect displayed by the third pattern display device in the first modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of a ball-entering unit. (a), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the multi-reach effect|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a 3rd modification. (a), (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound ramp control apparatus in the 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit completion|finish processing 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing battle presentation update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modified example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frequency|count correction|amendment production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation|variation start processing 4 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a correction number corresponding process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modified example; FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation / time reduction set to ROM of the main control unit in the 4th modification.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 91. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the many ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9).

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Further, the lower tray unit 50 is provided with a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operating means that can be operated by the player. The first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22 when both frame buttons are shown) are displayed, for example, on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect to be performed or changing the content of the super ready-to-win effect. In this embodiment, the effects (button effects) are set such that the frequency of operation of the first frame button 22a is higher than that of the second frame button 22b. The first frame button 22a, which is operated more frequently, is arranged on the left side of the second frame button 22b in the front view of FIG. As a result, in the button effect executed while the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the first frame button 22a, which is likely to be operated, can be easily operated with the left hand, so that the button effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation (shooting game) of the operation handle 51 every time the game is performed, thereby preventing the operation of the game from being lowered.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is likely to be the operation target in the button effect executed when a result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big win) is announced. It is configured to be As a result, only the button performance with the second frame button 22b as the operation object is executed, that is, the player is expected to win a big prize even before the second frame button 22b is operated. be able to.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the second frame button 22b is arranged substantially at the center of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a button effect with the second frame button 22b as the operation target is executed, the player can be encouraged to operate the second frame button 22b (for example, press down with both hands). can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first frame button 22a, which is operated more frequently, is smaller than the second frame button 22b. The two-frame button 22b is formed in a cylindrical shape with a radius of 6 centimeters. This makes it possible to make the second frame button 22b, which is operated infrequently (a privilege is likely to be given to the player when operated), stand out.

In this embodiment, the size of the frame button 22 is changed so that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a. It is sufficient that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a at the timing when the frame button 22b is operated. When the button effect is executed, the second frame button 22b may be configured to project upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 1). In this case, the first frame button 22a may be configured to stand out more than the second frame button 22b when the button effect is not being executed. As a result, when the button effect is executed, the effect that the second frame button 22b suddenly appears can be executed, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball opening 63, ball entry unit 64 (first ball entry 64b1, left second ball entry 64b2), second ball entry 640, variable prize winning device 65, normal pattern starting opening (through gate) 67, variable display device It is configured by assembling the unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General ball entrance 63, ball entrance unit 64 (first ball entrance 64b1, left second ball entrance 64b2), second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, and variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with first pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the ball has entered (won) the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether the ball (winner) has been won. Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64b1, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the left second ball entrance 64b2, or When the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is activated. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, and displays the first symbol. The device 37b serves as display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the game states of the pachinko machine 10 (probability variable state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.), or indicate whether the first symbol is changed. It is indicated by the lighting state whether it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a big win that is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous. Whether a pattern corresponding to a big hit or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and the combinations of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is triggered when a ball enters (wins a prize) in the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A jackpot game that can be acquired by is executed. During this jackpot game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult to enter the ball), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period until the next round game starts (for example , 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the ball is released in accordance with the timing when each prize opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make preparations for firing in an arbitrary direction, it is possible to smoothly perform a big winning game. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a big win in the big win lottery, the kind of the big win is also determined. Details will be described later, but as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is granted. 16R probability variable jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, a probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is given 4R probability variable jackpot, jackpot game round A 4R time-saving jackpot is prepared in which the number is four rounds and a time-saving state (low-probability state for special symbols, high-probability state for normal symbols) is provided after the jackpot game is completed.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous privilege for the player (the number of prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game is the largest, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous to the player. ) is provided, followed by the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 4R short-time jackpot, in order of decreasing advantage. In this way, even when a jackpot is won in the special lottery, the degree of advantage of the privilege granted to the player can be varied according to the type of the set jackpot. Not only the presence or absence of winning the big win, but also the type of the big win set when winning the big win can be made interesting.

In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is configured to determine two types of lottery results, that is, the jackpot lottery and the loser. In a part of the cases where it is determined to be out, it is possible to determine a small win with fewer benefits given to the player than the above-described big win (for example, a privilege to open the variable prize winning device 65 for only one round). good. As a result, it is possible to diversify the amount of privilege given to the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not a pachinko machine capable of judging a small win) is displayed as a stop symbol after the fluctuation. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

In this embodiment, as the game state, it is configured to be set to any of the "normal state", the "time saving state", and the "probability variable state" (see FIG. 16). The normal state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/250) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbols: low probability state, Normal pattern: called low probability state), and in the time saving state, the special pattern jackpot probability is set to a low probability (1/250), and the normal pattern hit probability is set to a high probability (232/233). It is a game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), and the probability variable state is set to a high probability (1/50) of the special symbol jackpot probability, and the normal symbol hit probability is a game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) set to high probability (232/233).

Here, the special symbol high probability state is, as described above, a state in which the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is higher than the low probability state, and in this embodiment, the special symbol high probability state is set. Then, the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery are defined to be the same high probability value (1/50). In addition, without being limited to this, for example, only the special figure 1 lottery jackpot probability is set to a high probability value, or only the special figure 2 lottery jackpot probability is set to a high probability value. , The high probability value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set may be defined differently between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, the normal design high probability state is a state in which the normal design hit probability is higher than the low probability state. When a win is won in a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery), the electric accessary 640a is opened as a winning game, and a ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of special 1 (first special pattern), and if you win a jackpot in the lottery of special 2 (second special pattern) The setting ratio of the jackpot type is set to be different between the case and the case, and if the jackpot is won in the special 2 lottery rather than the special 1 lottery, the player will be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The type (for example, 16R probability variable jackpot) is configured to be easily set. By configuring in this way, the special figure 2 lottery is executed more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery, and the game state ( A player can be made to play while expecting that a time-saving state, a variable probability state) will be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the high probability state of the normal pattern (high probability of normal pattern), during the low probability medium state of the normal pattern , a first mode that makes the probability of winning a normal symbol high, a second mode that increases the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one winning game, and a short variation time of the second symbol Although it is configured to execute the third mode in which the variable time is easily set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol rather than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is only necessary to be configured so as to be in a state in which it is easy to do so, and it is only necessary to set at least one mode among the three modes described above. Further, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol, among the above three modes Either of the modes may be configured so that the ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. A game area is formed on the surface of the game board 13 so that the shot ball can flow down, and the game area is defined by the variable display unit 80 . Specifically, it is divided into a left game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and is fired at a predetermined first firing intensity. A ball flows down the left playing area, and a ball shot with a second firing strength that is higher than the first firing strength flows down the right playing area. In addition, hereinafter, a game in which the operation handle 51 is operated so that the shot ball flows down the left game area is called a left-handed game (normal game), and the operation handle makes the shot ball flow down the right game area. A game in which 51 is operated will be referred to as a right-handed game and will be described.

The left game area is provided with a general ball entrance 63 through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the second left ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). To the third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs the variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) only for a certain period of time.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the right game area, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part (approximately 50%) of the balls flowing down the right area can pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of 4 times in total, and the number of reserved balls (normal pattern reserved number) is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). be. Four second symbol reservation lamps are provided for the maximum number of reservations.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right game area) of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side (left game area) of the variable display device unit 80. good. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, below the variable display device unit 80, a lower game area is formed in which the left game area and the right game area communicate with each other. A possible ball entry unit 64 is provided. The detailed configuration of the ball entry unit 64 will be described later, but inside the ball entry unit 64 are a first ball entry port 64b1, a left second ball entry port 64b2, and an opening through which a ball can be entered. Distributing means for alternately distributing the thrown balls to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 is provided.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when the ball enters the second left ball entrance 64b2, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, a lottery (special figure 2 lottery) for a big win is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering unit 64 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the lower game area, but a left-handed game is performed, and the ball flowing down the left game area performs a right-handed game, and a right-handed game is performed. It is configured so that it is easier for a ball to enter the opening of the ball entry unit 64 than a ball that has flowed down the game area. Specifically, the path from the left game area through the lower game area to the ball entry unit 64 by the game nail (ball guide member) implanted in the game board 13 is the path from the right game area through the lower game area. It is constructed so that the ball can flow down more easily than the path facing the incoming ball unit 64.例文帳に追加

Therefore, during the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the left-handed game is the proper game method. By stipulating an appropriate game method in this way, when it is determined that a right-handed game has been played in the normal state (the area (for example, the through gate 67) through which only the ball flowing down the right side area can pass) When it is determined that the ball has passed, the player can be notified that a game different from the proper game method is being played.

Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the right game area will be described. The above-described through gate 67 is arranged in the right game area, and a second ball entrance 640 and an electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are arranged on the downstream side thereof. . Since the right game area is an area where the ball launched by the left-handed game and flowing down the left-handed game area cannot flow down, the ball will not reach the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 640 due to the left-handed game. . As a result, the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the right game area or the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state even though the left-handed game, which is a proper game method, is being performed. It is possible to suppress the situation of entering the ball. Therefore, it is erroneously determined that an inappropriate game method (a game method in which a right-handed game is played in a normal state) is being played against a player who is playing a game with a proper game method, and the game method is changed. It is possible to solve the problem that the notification for making the game is executed and the willingness to play is lowered.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640 (part of the lower game area). This variable winning device 65 is opened during a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special lottery, and the number of balls paid out when one ball wins (number of prize balls). is configured to be 15.

Here, in this embodiment, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 than the left-handed game. In addition to the state), it is configured to execute the right-handed game even during the jackpot game. Thus, when the game during the game state advantageous to the player and the jackpot game are alternately executed, the same game method (right-handed game) may be continued, and the game method is presented to the player. It is possible to eliminate the need for complicated changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, and when the player operates the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the third The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the player operates the first frame button 22a or the second frame button 22b, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a not-shown performance character object, or the first frame button 22b is operated. A sound output command for outputting a sound corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp is displayed in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22. It may be configured to set a lamp output command for causing the device 227 to emit light.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7(a). FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is Each pattern consists of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "0" to "9" is added.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each piece of identification information imitating numerals. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed, respectively, upper, middle and lower. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display.

More specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are arranged so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. In the lower pattern row L3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed vertically and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed obliquely. In a state in which the symbol rows L1 to L3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols are stopped in a combination of the jackpot symbols (the same combination of the main symbols in the first embodiment) on the activated line. , a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), in the first embodiment, each activated line (V1 to V5) is formed to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be changed at the same time. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2, (See FIG. 9(a)) shows a situation in which the special symbols are fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 10), the lottery result of the special symbols is shown. However, without being limited to this, for example, using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, a display mode in which a figure is deformed, or a color can be changed It may be configured to indicate the lottery result of the special symbols by indicating that the special symbols are fluctuating depending on the display mode to be displayed, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbols and colors.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 5(b), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display areas (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery status is displayed are displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. can be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(a) to be described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a display mode using numbers. Although it is configured to display, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow identification of the number of retained balls in the acquisition diagram.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. This small display area Dm3 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 5(b)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area Dm3), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the time saving state, during the variable probability state, and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of ``left hitting'' is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hitting game ends. there is Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of "left-handed" is detected. It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5B, the description is continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed to the left of the fourth pattern display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which a reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved information for indicating the number of memories) is displayed, and the special figure 2 reserved information for indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Although detailed description is omitted, the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a display the result (prefetch result) of preliminarily discriminating the winning information stored in reserve in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol. It is constructed so as to display a display mode in which a suggestion can be notified to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol, and to vary the corresponding reserved display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of individual reserved memories, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set a result display that easily displays the variable reserved symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a reserved ball, the third symbols are stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, the fixed display is performed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. continue until Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Although the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 A situation in which there is no entry is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. This is due to the fact that no games have been played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new ball enters any one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. , the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new incoming ball is executed.

<Regarding production content in the first embodiment>
6 to 12, description will be given of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured with a game specification (so-called simultaneous variation machine) in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 execute the special figure lottery in parallel. The incoming ball unit 64 is so that the ball enters alternately into the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the lottery of the special figure 1 and the second left ball entrance 640 that triggers the lottery of the special figure 2. is configured to In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the third symbol display device 81 provides a variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the third symbol for indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery. If the variable display performance of the symbols is executed at the same time, there is a problem that the variable display of a plurality of third symbols is mixed and the lottery result of each special symbol becomes difficult to understand. Furthermore, since it is necessary to divide the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited area, and execute the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol There is a problem that the display area of the display becomes small, and a variable display that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, if the variation display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the variation display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery are executed at the same time, for example, each variation display A performance (button performance) in which a player operates a frame button 22 (a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b) can be executed in the performance, and a variation of the third pattern indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Execution timing of button production (special figure 1 button production) executed as display production and execution of button production (special figure 2 button production) executed as fluctuation display production of the 3rd pattern showing the result of special figure 2 lottery When the timing and the overlap, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp which button performance the frame button 22 is operated for, and the performance which is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, in the simultaneous variation machine in which the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed independently (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 button effect and the special figure 2 button effect are performed in duplicate. If you try to limit it so that it will not be done, since the fluctuation start timing of each special figure is indeterminate, a period (prohibited period) that can not set (execute) the button production more than necessary is set. was difficult to execute.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the third symbol showing the lottery result of one special figure ((special figure 1) main fluctuation pattern) among the plurality of special figures on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to perform variable display (main variable display). As a result, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the main variation symbol can be variably displayed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a variable display performance that is easy for the player to understand can be executed. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the other special figure ((special figure 2) sub-fluctuation symbol) that is not variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the third symbol display It is configured to switch the target of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display screen of the device 81 . As a result, despite the fact that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner), the big hit game (special figure 2 lottery) is suddenly executed based on the fact that the jackpot was won. It is possible to suppress the execution of a jackpot game).

In addition, while the button effect is being executed in the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 1, if the button effect is executed as the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 2 jackpot winning, each special It is configured to execute a special button effect in which the button effects executed for the figure are combined. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of button effects are overlapped and individually executed to provide a player with a difficult-to-understand effect. In addition, by executing the special button effect, the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 can be switched to the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the sub-variation pattern that is not variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the target of the third symbol is switched from the main variation pattern to the sub-variation pattern. However, without being limited to this, part of the deviation fluctuation set when the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation pattern is out (for example, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time selected when winning the jackpot) is set), it is preferable to perform the process of switching the target of the third symbol from the main variation symbol to the sub-variation symbol. As a result, when an effect (for example, a special button effect) is executed to switch the target of the third pattern from the main variation pattern to the sub-variation pattern, the third pattern display device 81 is expected to win the jackpot. It is possible to make the user interested in the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the display until the end.

Here, with reference to FIG.6 and FIG.7, each special figure fluctuation|variation in this embodiment and the content of the production|presentation performed are demonstrated. In FIG. 6, the button production (button production A) as the variable display production of the special figure 1 (main fluctuation pattern) and the button production (button production B) as the fluctuation display production of the special figure 2 (secondary fluctuation pattern) are different. It is a timing chart showing the flow of production when it is executed at the timing, FIG. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when button effects (button effects B) and button effects (button effects B) are executed at overlapping timings as variable display effects of symbol).

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 8, a specific flow of button effects will be described. FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of button effects. As shown in FIG. 8, during an effect period (button effect period) during which a button effect is executed for the player to operate the operation means, the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) becomes valid for the player. an execution period t2 during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means) is determined to be effective (the player can operate the frame button 22); and a frame button 22 during the execution period. and a result notification period t3 during which an effect based on the operation result to is executed. Further, an operation period t4 is set in which, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the execution period, it is notified that the frame button 22 has been operated.

During the preparation period t1, a display mode for explaining the content of the effect displayed during the execution period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Specifically, for example, when the effect shown in FIG. 9A is executed during the execution period, the comment "The effect to wake up the sleeping rabbit will start" is displayed and the operation is performed. A button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a is displayed without displaying a validity period gauge 812a indicating the validity period. As a result, the player is notified of the content of the effect to be executed later, and the player is previously notified that the effect to be executed later is a button effect for operating the first frame button 22a.

By providing the preparation period t1, the player can prepare for operating the frame button 22 (operation means), and the frame button 22 (operation means) can be smoothly operated during the execution period t2. be able to.

During the execution period t2, an effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22 (operation means) (see FIG. 9A). Here, with reference to FIG. 9(a), the content of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect will be described. FIG. 9(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the execution period t2 of the button effect (button effect A) is set, a character 811 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm in a sleeping display mode, and the secondary display is performed. In the area Ds, a comment "Wake me up" is displayed for explaining the effect content (game content) of the current button effect. Then, a button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a to be operated for the current button effect and a validity period gauge 812a indicating the operation validity period t5 of the first frame button 22a are displayed.

This validity period gauge 812a indicates the overall length of the operation validity period t5 to be set by the length of the outer frame (rectangle), and the remaining period form (Fig. 9(a)) is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining period mode decreases from right to left. As a result, the display area in which the remaining period mode is not displayed (the mode shown as blank in FIG. 9A) of the valid period gauge 812a becomes the elapsed period mode for indicating the elapsed period of the operation valid period t5. can be

In this way, by displaying the length of the remaining period of the valid operation period t5 relative to the overall length of the valid operation period t5, the remaining period of the valid operation period t5 is specifically indicated in time. Even if it is not, the player can be made to grasp it. Also, even when a different operation effective period t5 is set, the length of the outer frame (rectangle) of the effective period gauge 812a is fixed, and the speed at which the remaining period mode is variably displayed can be changed. It is possible to inform the player of the operation valid period t5 in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the above-described effective period gauge 812a is used to inform the player of the operation effective period t5 in the button effect. The length of the effective period t5 and the remaining period of the operation effective period t5 may be notified by specific numerical values (for example, number of seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is formed linearly is shown, but the valid period gauge 812a is not limited to this, and the valid period gauge 812a is formed in a circular shape, and the remaining period mode is the valid period gauge 812a. may be variably displayed in a clockwise direction, and may be configured to indicate that the operation valid period t5 ends when the valid period gauge 812a completes one cycle of the remaining period mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it relatively easy for the player to comprehend the remaining period with respect to the set operation effective period t5, and to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the starting position where the remaining period is variably displayed (for example, the position indicating 12 o'clock of the valid period gauge 812a formed in a circle) and the end position where the remaining period is variably displayed (for example, formed in a circle) position indicating 12 o'clock of the active period gauge 812a) can be made the same. By providing, it is possible to set an unexpected effect for the player.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description continues. When the player operates the first frame button 22a to be operated this time during the execution period t2 during which the effect illustrated in FIG. 9A is executed, it indicates that the first frame button 22a has been pressed. An operation period t4 is set in which an effect for the purpose is executed. During this operation period t4, the display mode of the button 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device is the post-press display mode (the thickness of the button 812 is thinner than the display mode shown in FIG. 9A). display mode).

In this way, by setting the operation period t4 and displaying the display mode after pressing, the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated for the current button effect is operated by the player. It is possible to reliably notify that the button has been (depressed). In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the player that the operation means to be operated has been operated, a configuration other than the above-described display mode after pressing may be used. For example, a voice output device may be used. 226 may output a press sound indicating that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated (depressed), or the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided with a light emitting means, which emits light. It may be configured such that whether or not the operation has been completed can be determined by the light emission mode (light emission color) of the means.

In addition to the above configuration, when an operation means (second frame button 22b) different from the operation means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the current button effect is operated during the execution period, It may be configured so as to execute an alert notification to indicate that the operated operation means is not an operation target. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of operating means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand guide to the correct operation when the player has operated the wrong operating means.

When the execution period t2 of the button effect period ends, a result notification period t3 is set in which the effect based on the operation result during the execution period is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 9(b) and FIG. 10, the content of the effect executed during the result notification period t3 will be described. FIG. 9(b) shows, as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3, an operation condition during the execution period t2 (for example, pressing the first frame button 22a twice during the execution period t2). ) is established. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the effect displayed during the notification period t3 of the result of the button effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first frame button 22a is pressed twice during a period t2 is not established.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2, the character 811 that was sleeping during the execution period t2 wakes up, and the comment "SP reach" suggesting the effect mode to be executed later is displayed. Is displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "success" indicating that the operation of the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was proper is displayed.

On the other hand, if the operation condition is not satisfied during the execution period t2, for example, if the player does not operate the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2, as shown in FIG. A character 811 is displayed, and no comment suggesting a mode of presentation to be executed later is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "sorry" indicating that the operation of the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was not appropriate is displayed.

In this way, by varying the display mode during the result notification period t3 based on the operation to the operation means during the execution period t2 of the button effect, it is possible to determine whether the operation during the current button effect was appropriate (success (whether or not the game has been played) can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect mode executed after the button effect period has elapsed (for example, the effect mode displayed during the ready-to-win period) is variable according to the effect result of the button effect. It is configured to allow Specifically, when the effect result of the button effect is "successful", it is easier to set an effect mode with a lower execution frequency than when it is "sorry". As a result, the player can actively participate in the button performance while expecting that the performance of the performance mode with a low execution frequency will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. When the execution period t2 during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means) is determined to be effective (the player can operate the frame button 22) is set in the button presentation period, the execution period t2 is set. Although an operation effective period t5 is set (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 8), when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) during the execution period t2 and the operation condition is satisfied, the operation effective period is set at that point. t5 ends (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 8). Then, during the difference period between the execution period t2 and the operation effective period t5, an operation condition satisfaction mode (for example, a comment of "operation completed") is displayed as a display mode indicating that the operation condition is satisfied.

Since the period during which the operation condition establishment mode is displayed varies depending on the timing at which the operation condition is established, for example, the operation condition establishment mode may be configured to be variably set according to the length of the display period. Also, if the display period of the operation condition fulfillment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), the display congratulates the player for quickly performing the operation, such as "operation completed, excellent". If the mode is set and it is shorter than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), the display mode is set to indicate that the player did not perform the operation quickly, such as "The operation is almost completed." In addition, only when the display period of the operation condition establishment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), information that is advantageous to the player (for example, the result of the special drawing lottery being executed , information suggesting the currently set game state, and special images that are difficult for the player to experience). As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means so that the operation condition is satisfied as soon as possible.

Further, according to the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2 (the timing at which the operation effective period t5 ends), the effect mode to be executed later (for example, the effect of the result notification effect to be executed during the result notification period t3) It may be configured such that the mode and the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect executed during the subsequent ready-to-win effect are variable.

In this embodiment, even if the operation condition is met, the result notification period t3 is not set until the predetermined execution period t2 ends (elapses). However, it is also possible to terminate the operation effective period t5 and the execution period t2 at the timing when the operation condition is established, and immediately set the result notification period t3. As a result, the button presentation can be executed quickly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 8, each period (preparation period t1, execution period t2, result notification period) set in advance as the button effect period when the transition condition is established based on the passage of time t3) is configured to transition, but a transition condition other than the passage of time may be set. It may be configured to shift to the result notification period t3 before the length of the execution period t2 elapses. As a result, it is possible to set the result notification period t3 corresponding to the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) performed by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause discomfort.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to advance only the start timing of the result notification period t3 and set the end timing to the predetermined timing. Thus, when the operation condition is quickly established during the execution period t2, the period during which the display mode of t3 is displayed during the result notification period (the period during which the result notification effect is executed) can be lengthened. Therefore, the effect result of the current button effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the end timing of the button effect period is not variable, there is no need to change the effect mode (effect period) of the effect (reach effect) executed after the button effect period ends, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to this, when the length of the execution period t2 in the button effect period is configured to be variable according to the operation content of the operation means, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button effect period) may be configured to be different from the predetermined end timing. In this case, for example, if the length of the execution period t2 is shortened, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button presentation period) will come earlier than the predetermined end timing. should be configured to By configuring in this way, the effect period after the end of the button effect period can be set long, so that it is possible to execute an effect different from usual, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the flow of execution of the button effect explained with reference to FIG. 8 will be explained. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation and the button effect (button effect B) set as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation are executed at different timings. It shows the flow when In this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly the third symbol display device It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of 81, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a jackpot, or a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a variation of 60 seconds A variation pattern in which time is set) is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a part of the case where the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the special figure 2 variation in which the lottery result is out is executed in a state where the button effect A is set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, the button effect A (with the operation target The first frame button 22a) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the button production B (the operation button to be operated is When the first frame button 22a) is set, the button effect B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect contents of the button effect B set as the variation effect of the second variation of the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when button effect B is executed, and FIG. 11(b) shows display contents displayed when button effect B ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. This button effect B, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, is a button effect that can be set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the button effect B is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 813 imitating a turtle appear in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A competition effect is displayed, and a button 812 modeled after the operating means (first frame button 22a) to be operated for the current button effect (button effect B) and an effective period gauge 812a are displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "Push the button repeatedly and aim for the GOAL" is displayed to indicate the effect content of the button effect B.例文帳に追加In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the display mode of the button 812, the current button effect (button effect B) is a continuous hit effect that requires the first frame button 22a to be operated (depressed) many times. It is displayed in a continuous hit effect mode (represented by three arrows in FIG. 11(a)).

In this way, by displaying the display mode (button 812) indicating the operating means to be operated and the operation contents during the button presentation, the player is notified of the game characteristics of the button presentation in a visually easy-to-understand manner. can be done. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, during the operation valid period of the button effect B (while the remaining period display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is being displayed), according to the operation mode of the first frame button 22a, the character 811 The display mode and the display mode of the button 812 are configured to be variable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to vary the presentation mode (display mode) of the button presentation being executed for each operation executed during the operation valid period, and to provide the player with an operational feeling. can be done.

Then, when the operation valid period of the button effect B has passed, the result of the competition effect between the character 811 and the character 813 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11(b). In the example shown in FIG. 11(b), the effect result in which the character 811 passed the goal 814 first is displayed. Then, at the goal 814, the comment "Gekiatsu" is displayed as a display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special lottery (special lottery 2) targeted for the button production B will be a big hit, and will be executed in the future. An effect is displayed in which the character 811 wins the prize with the comment "SP Reach" for suggesting the content of the effect to be given. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "GOAL" are displayed to indicate that the button effect B has ended.

Here, the relationship between each period set in the button effect period described with reference to FIG. 8 and the effect mode of the button effect B will be described. An effect in which 811 and character 813 are standing by at the start position is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a comment "Aim for GOAL" indicating the content of the button effect B is displayed in the sub-display area Ds (Fig. not shown). During this preparation period t1, the effective period of operation t5 is not set, so the effective period gauge 812a is not displayed. A button 812 is displayed in the display mode shown.

During the execution period t2, the effect shown in FIG. 11A is displayed, and during the operation period t4 set when the operation means (first frame button 22a) is operated, the first frame button 22a is displayed. An effect for changing the display mode of the character 811 and the display mode of the button 812 is displayed according to the operation mode. Finally, the effect shown in FIG. 11(b) is displayed during the result notification period t3.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. In FIG. 6 described above, the button effect A, which is a variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the button effect B, which is a variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2, are executed at different timings. While the flow of the case is explained, in FIG. 7, the button production A that is a variable production for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the button production that is a variable production for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 B and B are executed at overlapping timings.

As shown in FIG. 7, while the button production A is being executed as a variation performance of the first variation (off) of the special figure 1 variation, the second variation of the special figure 2 variation (off) is performed, When the button performance B is set as the variable performance of the second variation (disappearance) of the special figure 2 variation, the performance mode of the button performance A being executed is a duplicate performance in accordance with the start timing of the button performance B. It is executed by switching to the presentation mode of the button presentation C. Then, when the overlapping period of the button performance A and the button performance B elapses, the button performance B is executed.

In this embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). Therefore, the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are executed at the same time (in parallel). And, since the variation time of the special figure 1 variation and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation are set independently, the start timing of the special figure 1 variation and the start timing of the special figure 2 variation are related never have Therefore, the effect period of the variation effect (button effect) of the special figure 1 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation of the special figure 2 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It may overlap with the effect period of the display (button effect).

In this way, if a plurality of button effects are set so that the execution periods overlap, the player cannot determine which button effect the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22a) executed by the player corresponds to. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, in order to solve such a problem, if the button effect being executed is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed, the operation means can be positively controlled for the button effect being executed. There is a problem that the player who is operating the machine feels dissatisfied and loses his or her desire to play.

In addition, if the button effect is configured so that other button effects are not executed during execution of the button effect, for example, the button effect being executed is a button effect with a low expectation of a big win (low effect of effect), and the button effect is executed. Even if a button effect with a high expectation of a big win (high effect) is set during execution, the button effect with a high expectation of a big win (high effect) is not executed, and the effect is reduced. was there.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when button effect B is set so as to overlap with button effect A during execution of button effect A, the button which is the overlapping button effect It is configured to execute the performance C, and is configured to execute the button performance without making the player feel uncomfortable even if a plurality of button performances are set redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the button effect C, which is the overlapping button effect, will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the button effect C is executed, and FIG. 12(b) shows the display contents displayed when the button effect C ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, this button effect C is an overlapping (fusion) effect that is executed when the execution condition of the button effect B is satisfied while the button effect A is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the button effect C is set, an effect is displayed in the main display area Dm in which a character 811 resembling a rabbit is training, and the character 811 becomes an obstacle resembling a rock. A production that jumps over the correspondence is executed. In the secondary display area Ds, a comment indicating the content of the present button effect (button effect C) is also displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm, in order to indicate that the current operation target is the second frame button 22b, a button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b and the current button effect (button effect C) are displayed. A validity period gauge 818a indicating the validity period t5 and the remaining period of the operation validity period is displayed.

Here, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81b is closer than the button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a (see FIG. 11A). It is displayed in a large display mode. In this way, by varying the display mode displayed on the display screen for each operation means to be operated, it is possible to inform the player of what is the current operation target in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the button effect C ends, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the training is successful, as shown in FIG. 12(b), indicating that the button effect B is set after the button effect C. A comment "Successful in training, determined to participate in race" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Although illustration is omitted, the display mode of the end screen of the button effect C is configured to vary according to the operation content of the second frame button 22b during the effective period of operation of the button effect C. For example, Whether or not to display a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2) targeted for the button presentation C is determined according to the operation contents during the button presentation C.例文帳に追加As a result, the player who wants to grasp the result of the special drawing lottery as soon as possible can be motivated to participate in the button presentation.

As described above, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12, the button effects (button effects A to button effects C) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment have been described. As the effect mode of (button effect C), an intermediate effect mode between the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A) to be executed first and the effect mode of the button effect (button effect B) to be executed later is set. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the button effect A, an effect mode in which the character 811 is raised is set (see FIG. 9A), and in the button effect B, an effect mode in which the character 811 rails is set (see FIG. 11A). )reference). Then, in the button effect C, as an intermediate mode, an effect mode is set in which the character 811 who wakes up trains for the race (see FIG. 12(a)).

In this way, by setting the intermediate mode as the mode of performance of the overlapping button performances set when a plurality of button performances overlap, the performance mode of the button performance A can be changed to the button performance B without making the player feel uncomfortable. It can be shifted to, and the production effect can be enhanced. Note that in the flow of effects shown in FIG. 7, the remaining period of button effect B after the overlapping period of button effect A and button effect B has elapsed is the first period during which the effect mode of button effect B can be executed (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the button effect B is executed again after the button effect C is executed. When the remaining period of the button effect B after the elapse is less than the first period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed, the button effect B is not executed, and the button effect B is performed. It is preferable that the button effect C is executed during the set button effect period, and a mode suggesting the effect to be executed later is displayed as the effect result of the button effect C. - 特許庁

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the button performance B is executed only in the remaining period that is difficult for the player to identify, and that the player does not understand the performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation target (second frame button 22b) of button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is replaced with the operation target (first frame button 22b) of button effect A and button effect B, which are executed as independent button effects. 22a). As a result, the special feeling of the button presentation C can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button effect A is set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, and the button effect B is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 Set the 1st button effect as the variable effect of , set the 2nd button effect as the variable effect of the special figure 2, and set the button effect to be executed first between the 1st button effect and the 2nd button effect as the effect mode The button effect A may be set, and the button effect B may be set as the effect mode of the button effect to be executed later. By configuring in this way, even if the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed earlier than the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a plurality of Since the presentation mode of the button presentation can be set in chronological order, the presentation can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, when the button effects A and B are set in duplicate, the button effect C is set as the overlapping button effect. As an effect mode of the button effect, it is preferable that the effect mode in which the button effect A is shifted to the button effect C can be set. As a result, when the effect corresponding to the button effect C is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the current effect is a duplicate button effect, so the button effect B is executed after the button effect C. The player can play the game while anticipating that.

In addition, a button performance A is set as a variable performance of the special figure 1 variation, a button performance B is set as a variation performance of the special figure 2 variation, and a button performance C is set in the overlapping period of the button performance A and the button performance B. In the machine 10, if the timing of switching the effect mode of the button effect (timing to shift from button effect A to button effect C, timing to shift from button effect C to button effect B) is different from the timing to stop the special figure fluctuation It is better to set it so that

Specifically, the operation effective period of the button effect C and the operation effective period of the button effect B (see FIG. 7) are set so as to straddle the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is the target of the button effect A. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the special figure variation to be the target of the button performance is switched during the series of button performances executed in the order of button performances A, C and B. It is possible to execute a button effect without a sense of incongruity as if a predetermined button effect was executed for one special figure variation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to set the display in the .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the stop type of removal in special symbols, and 1st per random number counter C1 used for initial value setting 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and four reserved areas (reserved 1st to 4th areas), and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided. In the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1. Each value of CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as with the above-described special symbols, normal symbol holding corresponding to entering the ball (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. stored respectively.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each counter value (each counter value related to the special figure 2 lottery) obtained based on the ball entering the second left ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 is reserved and stored. , and each counter value acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is retained and stored. On the other hand, the function (reserved storage function) for storing the acquired counter values may not be provided.

By constructing in this manner, in a game machine in which a lottery advantageous to a player and a lottery disadvantageous to a player are switched as a lottery for one special pattern type according to a set game state, an advantageous lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state in which many reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 499, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 499. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 64b2. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). .

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, a judgment value for judging a big hit is defined in common for the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined corresponding to the state (low-probability state, high-probability state). As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the special symbol low probability state (normal state) is set, "0, 1" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, loss).

In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state, latent probability state) is set, "0 to 9" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, A value other than the jackpot (that is, out) is defined as a judgment value. That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined to win the jackpot with a probability of 2/500 (1/250), and the high probability state of the special symbol is specified. If set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 10/500 (1/50). Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a game state in which it is easier to win the jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of the symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. Also, in the present embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, ie, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but one type or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery result is determined to be either a big win or a loss, but the lottery result is not a big win (is a loss) without being limited to this. In some cases, it may be possible to win a small win with fewer benefits (for example, the number of prize balls that can be given during a winning game) than a big win. In this case, for example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 may also be referred to when determining whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol wins a small winning. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined in the small hit random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a small hit, it is determined as a small hit of a special symbol.

Furthermore, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning a big win and the value of the first random number counter C1 for winning a small win are set to be different, and one process (whether or not a win In the process of determining), it is configured to continuously (simultaneously) execute the judgment of whether the big hit is correct and the judgment of whether the small hit is correct.

By configuring in this manner, a big win or a small win lottery can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in a game machine in which a small prize is provided as a lottery result of special symbols, the probability of winning a small prize is defined differently between the lottery for the winning first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. can be As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lotteries.

Also, as described above, the table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referenced when executing the big winning lottery and the table (small winning random number table) that is referenced when executing the small winning lottery are separated. Alternatively, one table (for example, the first winning random number table 202a) may be used to execute the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of counter values for small winnings for each type of special symbol. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 and the type of the special symbol are determined in advance according to the predetermined determination value. However, without being limited to this, for example, the determination of the jackpot winning may be executed using a different determination value according to the set gaming state, or until a predetermined condition is established The value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is defined as the winning of the jackpot, may be varied according to the number of times of winning the jackpot within a specific period. A data table that does not define a judgment value corresponding to a big win may be provided as a data table for abnormal times referred to in the big win lottery.

Further, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, And, based on both special symbol lotteries, control is performed so that the jackpot game is not executed at the same time (in parallel). Specifically, when the special symbols overlap and perform the jackpot variation, one jackpot winning in which the special symbols are stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the jackpot is first validated, and the other jackpot winning is validated. are configured to be discarded (deleted).

In addition, the configuration for preventing the execution of the jackpot game redundantly based on the lottery result of each special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. During the period until the big win game corresponding to the winning of the big win is executed, the judgment value corresponding to the big win is not specified so as not to win the big win in the lottery of the other special pattern, and the small win is dealt with. A special symbol lottery may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that defines only the determination value.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, or the left second ball entrance 64b2, And it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 .

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. As described above, this jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, using the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a special pattern 1 table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a second special pattern (special pattern 2 ) includes at least a special figure 2 table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery.

First, referring to FIG. 16(b), it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 table 202d1 is a table referred to in the lottery for the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16(b), this special figure 1 table 202d1 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "jackpot A" is defined. A "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "20 to 79", and a "jackpot C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Here, the release operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the opening operation (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the operation content ( (timing, number of times) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as an opening operation scenario defined in chronological order.

Then, when the jackpot is won, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out and stored in a running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 . When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). , In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

In this manner, by using an opening action scenario that defines the action contents of the movable member in time series during the jackpot game in which the movable member is moved, the action control of the movable member can be centrally managed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which one movable member (variable winning device 65) is opened as a jackpot game is used. (Variable winning device 65, second variable winning device) may be configured to perform an opening operation. In this case, as described above, by setting the opening operation scenario and centrally managing the operation control for each movable member, for example, compared to the case where the operation control is performed separately for each movable member In addition, when a malfunction occurs in one movable member, it is possible to smoothly execute the operation processing for the other movable members.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times round games are executed) is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened. This round game is a game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is continuously opened until 10 balls win or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds.

Also, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state of normal symbols is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and a high probability state of special symbols is set ( The probability variation counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot A" is executed, the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won before the variation is executed 70 times.

The "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four, and a jackpot game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened is executed. When the jackpot game based on the "jackpot B" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set (probability variable counter 203g set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot B" is executed, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won before the variation is executed 70 times. In addition, "jackpot B" has the same game state as "jackpot A", but the number of rounds (number of rounds played) is small, so when compared to "jackpot A", the player is It becomes a big hit game that is disadvantageous.

"Jack C" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4, and the jackpot game of the round game 1 in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed. It is a jackpot type. When a jackpot game based on "jackpot C" is executed, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state of normal symbols is set (time reduction counter 203h is set to 70), and a low probability state of special symbols is set (probability variable counter 203g is set to 0). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot C" is executed, the time saving state (low high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is executed 70 times of special symbol variation, or special It is set until the jackpot is won before symbol variation is executed 70 times. Therefore, when compared with "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of which jackpot type is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. However, without being limited to this, a plurality of variable prize winning devices may be provided, and a variable prize winning device determined for each jackpot type may be configured to open for the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot, since it is configured to set the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, to the player, the jackpot It is possible not only to make the player play the game expecting to win the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of jackpot set when the player wins the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number of types is not limited to three. In addition, even if the value of the first win type counter C2 is the same, different jackpot types may be selected according to the game state at the time of winning. By configuring in this way, for example, when the game state at the time of winning is a variable probability state and a big hit, by setting a jackpot type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the winning in the variable probability state can be improved. people can expect. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first type corresponding to each jackpot type Only the range of the hit type counter C2 is configured to be different, but without being limited to this, the jackpot type selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 table 202d2 will be described. FIG.16(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the table 202d2 for special figures 2. As shown in FIG. The special figure 2 table 202d2 is a table referred to in the lottery for the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16(c), this special figure 2 table 202d2 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

The special figure 2 table 202d2 differs from the special figure 1 table 202d1 in that it is referred to in the second special symbol lottery, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot A" in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B" is defined in the range of "50 to 79". However, the difference is that the "jackpot C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is configured to make it easier for the player to select the "jackpot A" that is most advantageous to the player when the special figure 2 wins the jackpot than when the special figure 1 wins the jackpot. ing. Thus, each special figure lottery is advantageous in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery in parallel and equally executing both special figure lotteries in a normal state. You can vary the degree. Therefore, when the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the special figure type of the jackpot winning is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 17) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202e is used in the normal table 202e1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, and in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set. A probability variation/potential probability table 202e2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e1. This normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol for the variation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery is longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". is defined in association with the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in the range of "51 to 100", and is defined in association with the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds in the range of "101 ~ 150" is defined in association with a super reach jackpot variation pattern B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and a range of "151 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach jackpot variation pattern C with a variation time of 60 seconds. It is

Although the detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the variation time is 60 seconds. ). This is because when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating each type, the effect mode of the variable effect is set differently according to the variation pattern type indicated by the received command. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the special figure lottery with the same lottery result and variation time, a plurality of types of variation pattern types can be set on the main controller 110 side, and based on the set variation pattern type It is configured so that the effect mode of the variable effect is set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. As a result, since it is possible to set the performance mode of the variable performance by combining a plurality of parameters, it is possible to set a wider variety of performance modes and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, if the lottery result is "out" and the number of pending items is within the range of 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 will be in the range of "0 to 70" and the fluctuation time will be 20 seconds. A pattern is defined in correspondence, a normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "71 to 150", and a super reach deviation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in the range of "151 to 198" A variation pattern is associated and defined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "lost" and the number of pending items is 3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the short-time off fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated. Defined, the range of "71 to 130" is defined in association with a long-time off fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the range of "131 to 170" is associated with a normal reach out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. , and the range of "171 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the same value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired when the lottery result is "loss", a different variation pattern is selected. Specifically, when the number of reservations is small, compared to when the number of reservations is large, it is stipulated that fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are more likely to be selected, and when the number of reservations is large, compared to when the number of reservations is short, It is stipulated so that one with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, the number of reserved balls is quickly consumed, and the period during which the lottery is not executed increases, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. can be done. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, the number of held balls becomes less likely to reach the upper limit, and the player has more chances to shoot balls in succession, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game early. can be done.

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player without being limited to this. Different variation pattern tables may be used for the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating another jackpot (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the table 202e2 for probability variation/time reduction provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 19, the probability variation/time reduction table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198 , that is, the normal jackpot variation pattern A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the entire range. In the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as a short-out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds in the range of "0 to 79", and the fluctuation time is in the range of "80 to 198". A 180-second long deviation variation pattern is associated and defined.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 5 seconds. A short jackpot variation pattern is defined, and a super reach jackpot variation pattern B with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 198" in association with it. In the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as a short-out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time is in the range of "180 to 198". A super reach out variation pattern of 30 seconds is associated and defined.

As described above, during the variable probability state, or during the time saving state (during the right-handed game), it is easier to set a shorter variation time as the second special symbol variation time than during the normal state (during the left-handed game). It is configured. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, since it is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and it becomes a game state in which it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, during the time saving state, it becomes a game state in which it is easy to accumulate special figure 2 reservation and short variation time is easily set as the variation time of special figure 2 variation, and special figure 2 variation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the variation time which can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol is configured so as to overlap with the variation time which can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the variation time of the first special symbol. By grasping, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the variable probability state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that a variable time is set so that the player can determine which game state is set.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 15(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the normal design hit is defined in the range of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired "0 to 10", and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal figure in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this general/universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 20, when the normal pattern low probability state is set, the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198" 30 seconds fluctuation time is set be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set and the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is configured to vary based on the normal symbol game state and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and is set. It is configured to vary the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 depending on the variable time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to restrict the lottery action of the second special pattern, which tends to obtain a lottery result advantageous to the player, so that the player is prevented from receiving excessive benefits. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, Second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time reduction counter 203h, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation It has a stop flag 203o, a special figure 1 variation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 variation time counter 203s, and a memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning). is a storage area for storing In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 4), the game ball enters the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 ( This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the start winning.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) along with the detection of winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are detected from the counter buffer. , and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second left ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each The values of counters C1-C2 and CS1 are obtained and stored in corresponding areas (not shown) in the same way.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (each value of counters C1 to C2, CS1), one start The data corresponding to winning a prize is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes a second winning random number counter C4 and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning). A storage area in which values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is read from the counter buffer. , Acquire the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and store it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is early among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device, the above-described normal symbol holding ball Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning is used as this normal symbol. Shift to hold ball execution area (not shown). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the ball entering the ball opening 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of variable display effect) up to a maximum of 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the ball entering the second left ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). , When the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). When it is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol variation start process (not shown). 35) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f detects a ball passing through a through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ), it is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 . This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. The variable probability counter 203g is set with a value corresponding to the type of jackpot won after the jackpot ends. And the value of this probability variation counter 203g is the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) game state update process (S308 (S910 in FIG. 40) )). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variation state), and a special symbol propriety determination is performed with reference to a table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in a normal state (low probability state), and a special symbol propriety determination is performed with reference to a table for low probability.

The time-saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the high-probability state (time-saving state, probability variable state) of normal symbols. After the end of the big win, a value corresponding to the winning big win type is set in the time saving counter 203f. Then, the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by one in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 40). If the value of the short time counter 203f is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal design is performed, it is determined that the normal design is in a high probability state, and the judgment for the normal design is executed with reference to the table for the high probability. be. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the low probability table.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64b1 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S406 in FIG. 36). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S811 in FIG. 39).

With this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S805 in FIG. 39). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol is executed while the other big winning game is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second left ball opening 64b2 or the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value. This is a flag that is set to ON when the flag is set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 42). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1510 in FIG. 45).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1504 in FIG. 45). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol is executed while the other big winning game is being executed.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (the setting state of the variable probability counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, the normal state is stored, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more , the variable probability state is stored, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 1 or more, the time reduction state is stored.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game is being executed, a jackpot game state indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed are also stored. is configured to

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the information is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 52), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set. As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In addition, in this embodiment, a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit flag 203i) and a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation (special figure 2 jackpot flags 203j) are configured separately, but without being limited to this, it is possible to identify whether the jackpot variation corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern is executed. It may be composed of one flag (for example, a jackpot flag). Specifically, the flag is composed of 2 bits, "10" indicates that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, and "01" indicates the second special symbol (special figure 2). indicates that the jackpot is fluctuating, and "00" indicates that none of the special symbols are fluctuating the jackpot. It may be configured to set a 2-bit value.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols will be a big hit. In the case of winning, a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). ), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i as a big hit flag that can separately store the lottery result of the first special symbol (hit winning) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (hit winning) Although the two big win flags 203j are used, without being limited to this, a common big win flag is provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are provided. On the other hand, when a big win is won, a big win flag is set to ON, and in the other special pattern lottery executed with the big win flag set to ON, a big win may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag for indicating that the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, It is set to ON when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (Fig. 39 S801: Yes), when it is determined that it is during special figure 2 fluctuation (S802 of FIG. 39: Yes), it is set to ON (see S803). Also, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S209 in FIG. 41), it is set to OFF.

By using this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost pattern. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again.

In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, within one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), after executing the process relating to the first special symbol, the process relating to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, it is configured to execute the variation processing for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53) is the big win control process. (S2404 in FIG. 54) is executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 34) is such that if the current state is a jackpot (S201 in FIG. 34: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S203 to S212 in FIG. 34) is skipped. It consists of

That is, in the present embodiment, while the jackpot game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is configured so that no new special symbol variation (lottery) is executed. 34 (see S104 of 34)), when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot by the variation processing for the first special symbol, the special symbol variation. It is configured such that a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, that It is possible to suppress execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 37). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S204 in FIG. 38) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) is determined (see S205 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S205 in FIG. 34: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S206 in FIG. 39) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the second special symbol jackpot stop display, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 43). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1209 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see S210 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) is determined (see S211 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S211 in FIG. 34: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing ( (see S212 in FIG. 45) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S806 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure at the time of the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped. After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the resumption of the variation of the second special symbol based on the value left in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 209z including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing forward is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors inputs from the frame buttons 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the player presses the frame buttons 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). When operated, it controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach, and , to the display control device 114 . When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a button effect selection table 222b, as shown in FIG. 22(a).

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, a part of the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the information included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (variation time, success/failure determination result) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223u are associated with each other. Effect content (effect pattern) of the variable effect of the third symbol to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

Specifically, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio ramp control device 113 is normal reach (30 seconds) and the win/loss determination result is hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u "Effect A" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "effect B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "effect C" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If the value of the first effect counter 223u is out of range, the value of the first effect counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 79" for "effect A", in the range of "80 to 94" in "effect B", and in the range of "95 to 99". "Production C" is defined in .

Further, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio ramp control device 113 is super reach (60 seconds) and the result of the win/loss determination is hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set to "0". ~ 29”, “super effect B” is defined in the range of “30 to 79”, and “super effect C” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. If the value of the first effect counter 223u is out of range, the value of the first effect counter 223u falls within the range of ``0 to 49'' for ``super effect A'', within the range of ``50 to 89'' for ``super effect B'', and ``90 to 99''. , 'super effect C' is defined in the range of '.

Finally, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the audio lamp control device 113 is long-time off, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set to the range of "0 to 89" and the "off effect A" is displayed. However, the "off effect B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As described above, the variation pattern selection table 222a, when the information indicating the variation time included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is the same, regardless of the result of the determination, the same type are defined to be selected, and the ratio of selection of each effect pattern is made different based on the result of the determination of success or failure. As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot depending on the type of effect pattern selected. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to which production pattern the production contents of the variable production of the third symbol to be executed are based on, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, each effect pattern (“effect A”, “effect B”, “effect C” . The presence or absence of an operation effect (button effect) for operating the , and the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect are set in association with each other. In this embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are explained with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 222a is stipulated so that more subdivided effect patterns corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be selected, and the description thereof is omitted.

The button effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the contents of the button effect according to the result of determination of whether the lottery is successful or not and the type of variation pattern. Now, with reference to FIG. 24, the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 24, the button effect selection table 222b stores button effect information indicating various button effects corresponding to effect patterns (effect types) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a. . As the button effect information, the button effective period start timing information indicating the period from the start of the special figure fluctuation until the operation valid period (button effective period) corresponding to the button effect is set, and the button effective period start timing information, which is set during the button effect. Validity period information indicating the length of the operation valid period (button valid period), priority information indicating the execution priority of the button presentation, and button presentation information indicating the content (mode) of the presentation of the button presentation. It is specified for each production type.

Specifically, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "effect A", "super effect A", or "off effect A", the button effect information is There is no button effect, and it is defined so that the button effect is not executed. When the effect type is "effect B", "10 seconds" is defined as the start timing of the button effective period, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect. It is

Here, the priority of button effects will be briefly explained. As described above, this embodiment is configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), It is configured to be able to set the variation production corresponding to each special figure variation. In the gaming machine configured in this way, a plurality of button effects are set by a plurality of different triggers (the trigger for setting the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation, the trigger for setting the variation performance of the special figure 2 variation). In some cases, a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, and when the operating means (the frame button 22) is operated, it becomes difficult to understand which button effect corresponds, and the player's desire to play is reduced. There was a problem.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in order to set a plurality of button effects without overlapping the execution timing, it is necessary to centrally manage the plurality of button effects set at different timings. There is a problem that the processing load of 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, priority is given to the button effects to be executed, and when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects with higher priority are executed. is doing. Thus, even if the button performances are set so that the execution timings overlap, only the button performances with high priority are actually executed, so that the player can be provided with the performances that are easy to understand. Moreover, since there is no need to centrally manage the settings of a plurality of button effects that are set at different occasions, the problem of increased processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be solved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same priority is assigned in advance to button effects that are not problematic even if they are executed simultaneously, and a plurality of button effects with the same priority can be stored. Configure. As a result, it is possible to overlap execution timings for button effects that can be overlapped, so that it is possible to provide the player with unexpected and novel effects, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

Here, the contents of the button effects to which the same priority is assigned will be described. In the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the button effect, the display range of the button effect on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the operation target (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the operation content (one button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicately) are defined according to the type of press, repeated presses, and long presses), and the same priority is set for the button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicately). It is configured as follows.

Specifically, of the display areas of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5) is used as the display area, and the first frame button 22a is used as the operation target, and the sub-display is performed. A button effect that uses the area Ds (see FIG. 5) as a display area means that even if the display area is duplicated, the player can grasp the content of each button effect and operate the operation means ( Since it becomes possible to operate the frame button 22), it becomes possible to duplicate the button effect.

In addition, for each button effect with different display areas and the same operation target, if the operation content is the same, performing the same operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) on the operation target will display it in a different display area. Since it is possible to develop each button effect that has been performed, it becomes a button effect that can be duplicated. On the other hand, the display areas are different, the operation target is the same, and the button effects with different operation contents cannot be overlapped (difficult) because the player cannot operate the operation means for each button effect. It becomes a button production. Further, even when the display areas overlap, the effect becomes difficult for the player to grasp the effect mode (display contents) of each button effect, so that the button effect becomes impossible (difficult) to overlap.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to set the same priority for all combinations of button effects that can be duplicated as described above. The privilege of variably operating a decoration variable member that is provided and can be changed (moved) from a predetermined first position to a second position, and the privilege indicated by the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81). Accordingly, even button effects that can be duplicated may be given priority.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that a plurality of button effects set based on one opportunity (for example, the opportunity to set the variable effect of special figure 1) may overlap, and the plurality of button effects Among them, the first button effect to be executed first has a higher priority than the second button effect to be executed later. The above-described first button effect can be terminated before the start timing of the above-described second button effect by actively (early) operating the operating means by the player. ing.

By configuring in this way, at the start timing of the second button effect, if the first button effect with high priority is being executed, the second button effect is not executed, and the first button effect with high priority is executed. If it is not inside, the second button effect can be executed. Therefore, depending on the operation content of one button effect, whether or not to execute another button effect can be changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

It should be noted that, when such a configuration is used, the second button effect with a lower priority is more valuable to the player than the first button effect with a higher priority (for example, it is usually difficult to see). It is preferable to configure so that a privilege such as reproducing a privilege video that cannot be performed, notifying the current game state, or notifying the result of the special figure fluctuation during execution) can be given. In this way, by setting a privilege button presentation that can give a valuable benefit to the player as a button presentation with a low priority to be executed, the execution period of the other button presentation overlaps with that of the other button presentation. A frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated while another button performance is being executed, aiming at suppressing the privilege button performance from not being executed.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a suggestion (notification) means capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the privilege button presentation has been internally set before the execution timing of the privilege button presentation arrives. With this configuration, by suggesting (notifying) that the bonus button effect has been set by the suggesting (notifying) means, unless the execution timing of another button effect overlaps, the reward is given at a predetermined timing. It is possible to easily grasp that the button presentation is executed. In addition, the frame button 22 can be positively operated so that the execution period of another button effect executed after being notified is shortened as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 24, the specific contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b will be described. When the effect type (effect pattern) is "effect C", a plurality of button effects are defined. "5 seconds" as the effective period, "1" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect are defined. "3 seconds" is defined as the valid period, "2" as the priority, and "C" as the button effect mode.

Here, the button effects defined corresponding to the effect type "effect C" will be described. As described above, this "effect C" defines a plurality of button effects, and the difference between the start timing of the first button effect executed first and the start timing of the second button effect executed later. is specified to be 4 seconds. Since the effective period of the first button effect is defined as "5 seconds", the frame button 22 is not operated while the first button effect is being executed, and the first button is activated after the effective period has elapsed. When the effect is terminated, the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect. That is, since the first button effect with a high priority is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, during the execution of the first button effect, by operating the frame button 22, the first button effect can be started early (for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the start timing of the button valid period, that is, 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation). If it is terminated, the high priority first button effect has ended at the start timing of the second button effect (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), so the second button effect will be executed. Become. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated in response to the first button effect while expecting the second button effect to be executed.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect B", a plurality of button effects are defined in the same manner as the above-described "effect B". The first button effect to be executed first has "10 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, and "A" as the effect mode of the button effect. is specified, and the second button effect to be executed later has "14 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, "3 seconds" as the effective period, "1" as the priority, and "C" as the effect mode of the button effect. is stipulated.

Here, the difference between the content specified in the above-mentioned "effect B" and the content specified in the "super effect B" will be described. In the above-mentioned "effect B", it is stipulated that the second button effect to be executed later has lower priority than the first button effect to be executed first. When the first button effect is being executed, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, "super effect B" is defined so that the second button effect executed later has a higher priority than the first button effect executed earlier. Therefore, in the "super effect B", even while the first button effect is being executed, the first button effect is terminated and the second button effect is executed. The effect mode of the first button effect to be executed first is defined so that the "effect B" and the "super effect B" have the same effect mode.

In other words, when the first button effect is executed, the player determines whether the current first button effect is the first button effect set corresponding to "effect B", or whether it corresponds to "super effect B". The first button effect proceeds without being able to discriminate whether it is the first button effect set by the user. When the frame button 22 is operated so as to end the first button effect before the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is executed in both "effect B" and "super effect B". , You can experience multiple button effects, but whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B" or "super effect B" has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than "effect B". Therefore, it cannot be determined whether the second button effect is executed or not.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first button effect so that the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, in the case of "effect B", the second button If the effect is not executed and it is "super effect B", the second button effect is executed. In other words, in this case, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed, whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B" or whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than "effect B". It can be determined whether it corresponds to "super effect B", but if it is "effect B", the second button effect is not executed and it is not possible to experience a plurality of button effects. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is predicted which button effect is set corresponding to which effect type (effect pattern) the button effect to be executed this time is, and based on the prediction result, the frame during each button effect is predicted. It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the content of the button operation by himself/herself.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect C", the button effective period start timing is "10 seconds" and the effective period is "10 seconds". ", "2" as the priority, "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, "10 seconds" as the start timing of the button effective period, and "5 seconds" as the effective period ”, “3” as the priority, and “A” as the effect mode of the button effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, various button effects can be set according to the effect type (effect pattern) selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a, so that the effect can be enhanced. can. In addition, even if each production type (production pattern) is selected based on a variation pattern with different jackpot expectations, the start timing of the button effective period of the button production is unified, so depending on the start timing of the button effective period, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect of the button presentation to be executed later due to the determination of what is in advance.

In addition, a plurality of button effects such as "effect B" are set at timings where the execution periods can overlap, and can be executed later according to the operation content of the button effect (first button effect) that is executed first. Since the button effect (second button effect) is configured to be variable, the player can actively participate in the button effect.

In addition, like "effect B" and "super effect B", while unifying the contents of the button effects to be executed, only by varying the priority of each button effect, button effects that can be executed later (first The presence or absence of the execution of the 2-button presentation) can be made different, and the enjoyment of making the player predict the presentation type this time can be provided.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). As shown in FIG. 22(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, pending production counter 223j, subordinate state setting area 223k, button production hierarchy storage Area 223m, button valid timer 223n, special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, special figure 2 button effect flag 223q, second frame button valid flag 223r, operated flag 223s, pressing counter 223t, first effect counter 223u, second effect At least a counter 223v and a memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. , win-win information is stored. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223b, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ( It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It's like

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by the ball entering first ball entrance 64b1, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in a special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 5(b)). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, for the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 The only difference is that they are stored in the same manner, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the fluctuation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The pending effect counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of remaining pending balls used in the pending effect. The pending effect counter 223j determines in the pending ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 63) that the number of pending balls is the upper limit value (S4503 in FIG. 63: Yes), and when it is determined to execute the pending effect (S4504: Yes), the value is set to 8 (S4506), the value is reduced by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation is started in a state where the value of the pending effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (holding storage decreases) . The suspension effect is executed until the value of the suspension effect counter 223j becomes zero.

Data corresponding to a state command output from main controller 110 is set in sub-state setting area 223k. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223k. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 .

The button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is a storage area for simultaneously storing a plurality of set button effects, and has a plurality of storage areas. In this button effect layer storage area 223m, button effect information such as the start time of the set button effect and the setting value of the button effect timer 223n, which will be described later, is stored in a storage area corresponding to the priority of the set button effect. be done. Details of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 25, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is formed from four storage areas (hierarchical areas). It is

Specifically, the first layer area 223m1, in which priority 1 is set to execute the effect with the highest priority, and priority 2, in which the effect is executed with priority next to the priority 1, are set. a second layer area 223m2, a third layer area 223m3, and a fourth layer area 223m4 in which the lowest priority level 3 is set.

Here, in this embodiment, when the button effect is executed, the stored information is read in order from the hierarchical area with the highest priority, and the button effect is executed. Then, when it is time to execute a button effect, it is determined whether a button effect with a priority higher than that corresponding to the button effect whose execution timing has come this time is being executed, and the button effect with a higher priority is executed. It is configured to execute a new button effect when it has not been executed. Also, when a button effect with a lower priority than the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is being executed, the button effect with a lower priority is forcibly terminated, and a new button effect is executed. is doing.

In addition, this embodiment has a second layer area 223m2 and a third layer area 223m3 as storage areas to which the same priority (priority 2) is set. The button effects stored in the third layer area 223m3 are executed at the same time even if the execution timings overlap. This embodiment is configured so that the button effects are set at different timings, and when the button effects with priority 2 are set first, the information indicating the button effects is displayed in the second layer area 223m2. When the stored button effect with priority 2 is set, the information indicating the button effect already stored in the second layer area 223m2 is shifted to the third layer area 223m3, and then Information indicating the button effects with the set priority 2 is stored in the second layer area 223m2.

Then, when a new button effect with priority 2 is set, the storage area is similarly shifted, and the information stored in the third layer area 223m3 is erased. In this manner, when a predetermined number of button effects with the same priority (priority 2) are configured to be stored, when the number of button effects with the same priority is set equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the oldest button effect is discarded. By configuring as above, the most recently set button effect can be easily executed.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of button effects with the same priority (priority 2) can be stored. is discarded, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the latest button effect may be configured not to be newly stored. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to manage the execution timing of the button effect stored in the storage area and the erasure timing, so that the control processing can be simplified.

The button validity timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b). set. Then, the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113 1 is subtracted from the value of the button valid timer 223n (S6003). Note that the button valid timer 223 is configured to be able to simultaneously measure a plurality of operation valid periods. As a result, even when button effects are executed in duplicate, it is possible to properly measure the operation effective period corresponding to each button effect.

The special figure 1 button effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set as the variation effect of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the button effect of the special figure 1 is set. It is set to ON when In this special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, the button effect is set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303 in FIG. 68), and the set button effect is executed in the execution timing setting process (S5405 in FIG. 69). It is set to ON when the timing is set (see S5509 in FIG. 69), and in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 70) for setting the button effect of special figure 2, the button of special figure 1 It is referred to when determining the effect setting status (S5602 in FIG. 70). Then, when the information indicating the corresponding button effect is erased from the button effect hierarchy storage area, that is, when the corresponding button effect is executed, or when the button effect with high priority is executed, the corresponding button effect is executed. is set to OFF (S5907 in FIG. 73).

In this embodiment, the variation display based on the special figure 1 lottery is configured to be displayed (main variation display) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second figure based on the special figure 2 lottery The variable display of the three symbols is not executed, or the variable display (secondary variable display) is performed so as to be less conspicuous than the main variable display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined result (for example, when a big hit is won, or when a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected among the losers), the fluctuation display based on the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. It is configured to display by switching from the secondary fluctuation display to the main fluctuation display.

The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set in the variation effect of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the button effect of the special figure 2 is set. It is set to ON when

The second frame button valid flag 223r is a flag for indicating that an operation valid period (second operation valid period) for judging whether the operation on the second frame button 22b is valid is set. It is set to ON when a period is set.

The operated flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the operation content of the operating means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, and is set to ON when the operation content satisfies the predetermined operation condition. be. This operated flag 223s is discriminated at the timing when the execution period t2 (see FIG. 8) of the button effect has passed, and depending on the discrimination result (setting state of the operated flag 223s), the result reporting period t3 (see FIG. 8) A middle production mode (success production, failure production) is set.

The pressing counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times the operation means (frame button 22) is operated during one operation valid period. Each time the button 22a or the second frame button 22b) is operated, the value is incremented by 1, and the value is reset to 0 when the valid operation period expires. Then, it is determined whether the value of the depression counter 223t during the valid operation period or at the end of the valid operation period satisfies a predetermined condition, and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation completed flag 223s is set to ON. be done.

In this embodiment, the number of operations (number of presses) is counted using the press counter 223t as the operation content during the valid operation period. number of times), determines whether or not a predetermined condition is established based on the determination result, and sets the operation completion flag 223s to ON when it is determined that the predetermined condition is established. For example, if there is a means for measuring the length of a period (long-pressing period) during which the operation means (frame button 22) is continuously pressed, or if there are a plurality of operation means Alternatively, a means for measuring the order and number of times each operating means is pressed, a means for measuring the pressing force when pressing the operating means, or the like may be used.

The first effect counter 223u and the second effect counter 223v are counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. FIG. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 773) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 78) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 79(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1 is opened. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entrance 64b1b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 77).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player starts the game, and the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 64b2 is displayed. When the ball entering the ball 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, as shown in FIG. 27(b). and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 28A and 28B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 28(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, for the back face A corresponding to the "town stage." . Also, FIG. 29 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 28, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is determined to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 29(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 29(a) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 28(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 29(a) and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face E, the image shown in FIGS. 29(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 29(b)-(c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after displaying the images of FIGS. 29(b) to (c) and FIGS. 29(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 26). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, even if the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, Regardless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, main patterns imitating animal characters and predetermined marks (for example, triangular marks) are displayed as main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern (blank pattern) is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", "girl", "monster", "rabbit", and "turtle" are displayed according to various effects. , data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e, so that when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the corresponding data is read from the character ROM 234. Instead of newly reading out image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 77). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9605 in FIG. 89(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 79B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and the simple display setting process (see S8308 in FIG. 79(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S9501 in FIG. 89A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 89(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 32) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 79(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S9205 in FIG. 88) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 32), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 79(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9207 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S8002 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9713 in FIG. 90). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S9714 in FIG. 90). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9802 in FIG. 92).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S8306 in FIG. 79B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 85(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S9709 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S9710 in FIG. 90). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 85(a)). ) of S9002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S9221 in FIG. 86). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set (S8505 in FIG. 81(a), S8705 in FIG. 82(a), S8805 in FIG. 82(b) , S8905 in FIG. 83). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (S9214 in FIG. 86). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81(a), S8705 in FIG. 82(a), S8805 in FIG. 82(b), FIG. 83, S8905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 57. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 479, 99, 239, 232), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning) and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination based on each counter value obtained for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and determines the determination by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first pattern display device 37 to enable the variable display in the variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third pattern display device 81 are issued. Control is executed for setting and stopping display in a display mode showing the judgment result (positiveness judgment result). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 34, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (during jackpot) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is during the big winning game (during the big winning) or during the small winning game (during the small winning). In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is not in the jackpot (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0, that is, the first special symbol is displayed as a variation It is determined whether it is in the middle (S203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed while the variation is being displayed (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S203: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed ( S204).

In this first special symbol variation executing process (S204), the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is varied (updated) during the period when the first special symbol is varying. process is executed. Then, when the processing of S204 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation executing processing (S204) is 0 (S205), S205 When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S205: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to S208 which will be described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the process of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stopping process (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss. is executed. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process for erasing the information about the jackpot is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 in the process of S205 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S203 (S203: No), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not currently changing Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S207). In this first special symbol variation start process (S207), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG.

After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S207), after determining that the special figure 1 is being varied in the process of S205 (S205: No), or after performing the first special symbol variation stop process (S206) After execution, next, the variation processing (S208 to S212) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S208). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (0) in the process of S208 (S208: No), the present is not in the special figure 2 fluctuation, so the following Then, a second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S209), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), if the retention data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol retention ball number storage area 203b, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection based on the retention data Processing is performed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S209), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S208, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is (S208: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation in-execution process is executed (S210). The contents of this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S210) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S211), and if it is determined to be 0 (S211 : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S212), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S211 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and this process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop processing (S212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but as with the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206), it is defined in the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time has passed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). , the variation processing (S203-S207) regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing (S208-S212) regarding the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to (preferentially) the variation process regarding the second special symbol. Thus, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the second special symbol. 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the variation regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and the player can choose according to the set game state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types for which the lottery that is advantageous to the game is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for executing the variation processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (discarding) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303 ).

Then, set the number of reserved balls command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction (S304), the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the first special symbol reserved number of balls storage area 203a, the execution area A process for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) will be described later in detail. Based on the game state that has been set, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not a big win has occurred.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described later in detail, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value. Then, the number-of-games update process (S308) is executed, and this process ends. The number-of-games update process (S308), which will be described later in detail, is performed to update the game state by subtracting the values of the variable probability counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the current gaming state is a high probability state of special symbols (probability variation state, latent probability state), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a value greater than 0 ( S402). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15 (a)) Based on , It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S401 matches the big winning judgment value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (judgment result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)) Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the low-probability jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S404).

When the process of S403 or S404 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405). As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, information indicating a big win is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol among the big win flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big win (S407), and the big winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 ( S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the first big win flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol. This first big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-described first special symbol big win determination process (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 table 202d1 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery result is not a big hit (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process of S503 is performed.

After either processing of S501 or S502 is completed, next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state) corresponding to the information is read (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 Then, set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S506).

Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and the selected variation pattern The value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S509), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S204). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S207), the variation time and display of the first special symbol being varied are updated.

In the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), first, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S701), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S702), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation executing process ( (see S204 in FIG. 38) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is updated (decremented by 1) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 in FIG. 38). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206). This first special symbol variation stop process (S206) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is "0", that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) This is a process that is executed when the period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S206 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 It is determined whether (S802). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S803), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o has been turned on (S804).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S805), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S806). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode (outgoing symbol) indicating the loss. (confirmed display).

When the processing of S806 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to ON (S807), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to ON (S807 : Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol stopped and displayed forcibly in the process of S805 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to OFF. (S808), deletes the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S809), and proceeds to the process of S810. On the other hand, in the processing of S807, when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery (S807: No), the processing of S808 and S809 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S810.

In the process of S810, first, a jackpot scenario that has been won in this special symbol variation is set (S810), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, and the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are set to 0. It is set (S811), and information indicating that the current game state is during a jackpot (during a jackpot game) is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S812). The game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to separately store the game state (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state (during the jackpot) related to the winning game, S811. By executing the process of (1), the game state (normal state, probability variable state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing of winning the big win at the end of the big win game.

When the processing of S812 is finished, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S813), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner at 37 is executed (S814), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S812 is skipped, and the processing of S813 described above is performed. Go to processing.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the process (S810 to S814) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. Also, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is lost (S805). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (confirmed display) one of the special symbols with a symbol indicating a big win, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during variation, Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the processing is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stop-displayed as a symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a symbol indicating a loss. For example, if it is determined that one special symbol has won the jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) ( In S405 of FIG. 36: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the off symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the big winning variation of one special symbol ends for the other special symbol that is forcibly lost and stopped. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to discriminate that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the big win has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of the other special symbol during execution based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, the contents of variation control are varied according to the result of the lottery of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is fluctuating (losing fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is lost, the lottery When the result is discarded and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is in the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to indicate that it is a big hit, the second After the jackpot game of one special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game with the first special symbol is finished, the player is interested in whether the second special symbol variation is newly executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation is resumed. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not). good to do

Next, referring to FIG. 40, a game which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 35) and one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) to be described later. The number update process (S308) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the number-of-games update process (S308).

In the game count update process (S308), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the time saving state (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more (S851: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h subtracted in the process of S852 is 0 (S853). When it is determined that the subtracted value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S853: Yes), since it is time to end the time saving state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S854), The process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 or more (that is, 0) (S851: No), since it is not necessary to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h, S852 ˜S854 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S855.

After the processing of S851 or S854 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the variable probability state (S855). When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 or more (S855: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability counter 203g (S856). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203g subtracted in the process of S856 is 0 (S857). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g that has been subtracted is 0, it is the end timing of the variable probability state, so the corresponding game state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. .

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 or more in the processing of S855 (S855: No), or if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 in the processing of S857 (S857: No) , S859. In the process of S859, a state command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the variable probability counter 203g, and the game state being set is set (S859), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the second special symbol variation start process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S209).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36) executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)) immediately before this process is performed )) to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol variation after forcibly stop-displaying the special symbol with the deviating symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is configured to be set to OFF Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 41) can be skipped only once.

This is the lottery of the first special symbol executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)) immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed. Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), if the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) to be executed immediately after is skipped, then the first special symbol jackpot A jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), and the jackpot game ends by the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) is not executed until it is done.

By configuring in this way, based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of the other special symbol, control processing executed by the main controller 110 processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. A special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to prevent the execution of a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol until the big winning game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. is skipped once, other configurations may be used.

In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not won in the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110 to be described later, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to OFF.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit execution of a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S209 in FIG. 41) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, variation of the second special symbol Skip the process, that is, it is configured not to start a new variation (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but not limited to this, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on It may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to the case where it is set.

In this case, a lottery for the second special pattern is carried out using a special lottery that does not win a big hit, and the variation display of the second special pattern is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special pattern is executed without executing the lottery of the second special pattern, the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

It should be noted that the content of the variation processing for each special symbol described above is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) which is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped even when the variation performance is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S910 , and terminate this process. The processing of S903-S910 is different from the processing of S301-S308 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. The value of the number of balls counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in that the target special symbol type is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S409 In the processing of S1006 to S1009 corresponding to the processing of, the difference is that the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since other processing is the same, description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 43) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) in the following points. In the process of S1201 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S506 to S507 In each process of S1206 to S1207 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210). The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S210) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204 in FIG. 38) in each of the processes of S1401-S1402 corresponding to the processes of S701-S702. The difference is that the object to be played is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and from the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s. Since other processing is the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol variation stop process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S212). In the second special symbol variation stop process (S212), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). differ. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel. The special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined which one of the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 the ball entered (start winning), In the case of winning, each counter value obtained is increased up to the upper limit number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first entrance 64b1, up to 4 in total in the left second entrance 64b2 and the second entrance 640). It is a process of storing in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64b1, which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64b1 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (there was a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702), and the It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64b1 is less than the upper limit of 4 at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of pending balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 To set a reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first start port (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area for the number of reserved balls corresponding to 203a (S1706).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1707). This first look-ahead processing (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process for discriminating the stop type and the like is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each counter value newly stored, but this is not the only option. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of winning or not determination for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, It may be configured to execute a process of determining the stop type or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although it is configured to determine the contents of the lottery right (winning information) in advance, without being limited to this, when the lottery right for the first special design is newly acquired, the lottery right for the second special design (winning information ) may be determined in advance.

After the processing of S1707 is executed, the processing of S1708 is executed next. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64b1 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64b1 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead processing (S1707) based on the information (winning information) on the added winning is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703 : No), that is, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed. It may be configured so that As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of balls reaches the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64b1) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance (left second ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 , each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in low probability state, jackpot only in high probability state, jackpot in both low probability state and high probability state) (S1823: Yes), jackpot type and the information indicating the variation pattern is set (S1824), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, it is out) (S1823: No), the information indicating the deviation and the variation pattern are shown. A first winning command including information is set (S1825), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first prize winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, in addition to the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when executing the look-ahead process, the determination result of the case of the high probability state of the special design, the determination result of the case of the low probability state of the special design is determined, the result of each determination However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the determination value that is determined to be a big hit ( The value of the first winning random number counter C1) may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery based on the reservation memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a is accurately discriminated, and based on the game state It may be configured so as to execute the suitability determination. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process , but not limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a ( Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the pending memory) may be set as a winning command, and the result of winning/failing determination may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process Although the configuration that predicts the success/failure determination in advance is used, this is not the only option. In the present embodiment, new pending storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a. Due to this, information indicating the prefetch result based on all the winning information stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a may be set as the first winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this second prefetching process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 48) is based on the fact that the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47) entered the first start hole (first ball entry hole 64b1) (start winning). While it is a process of determining (pre-reading) the pending data (winning information) in advance and making various judgments, the object to be judged is the first starting point. The only difference is that the winning information is changed to that based on the start winning at the opening (left second ball opening 64b2, second ball opening 640). Description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S2001). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed at the maximum after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S2001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S2002). When it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing, that is, it is now possible to execute a new normal symbol change (lottery) (S2002: No), then the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S2004 (S2004: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S2004 (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is established, it is retained and stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1 → execution area, normal design reservation 2 → normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3 → normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4 → normal design reservation 4, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S2008), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined (S2008: Yes), the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 15(b)) (S2009 ), and the process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is a low probability state of normal symbols (S2008: No), the second for low probability Based on the hit determination value in the hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(b)), the hit/fail determination result is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the process of S2011, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S2012), and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (S2014). On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing (S2013), and proceeds to the processing of S2014 described above.

Here, the processing (processing of S2014) for determining the normal pattern fluctuation time will be described using the contents defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal design fluctuation, the probability state of the set normal design (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal design reservation ball number counter 203f (normal design reservation number), It is configured to be variably set based on The easiness of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (the length of the opening period of the electric accessory 640a per unit time) is made different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. ing.

As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) defines a variation time of 30 seconds when the normal symbol low probability state is set. Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, since the game per normal pattern ends before the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, the ball It is configured so that a ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Then, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a winning game (normal A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67) Since the normal pattern variation (30-second variation) is being executed, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern low probability state is set. If so, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the normal game is being executed. , the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this manner, by varying the degree of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether the variation time of the normal symbol is set shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 even in a game state (for example, variable probability state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set the variation pattern of the normal design according to the game state of the normal design and the number of reserved balls of the normal design. It may be configured so that different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of changing (S2002: No), the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed. (S2015), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "○" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or S2013 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second pattern in the display mode set by the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is not a hit (no) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the processing of S2015) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing for special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), then the probability state of the current normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S2018), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, the current is normal If it is determined to be in the probability state (S2018: No), as the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening pattern "0.7 seconds × 1 time" that executes opening once for 0.7 seconds is selected. Set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S2018: Yes), as an open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening for 0.8 seconds is 1 A release pattern of "0.8 sec x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds × 1 time) is higher than the open pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds × 1 time). , to open the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a, a winning game (first 2, the period during which the ball entrance 640 is in an open state is lengthened). Next, based on the opening pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2021), and this process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal design propriety determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal design at the timing of performing the normal design propriety determination, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal design winning game. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set

Thus, in this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the normal symbol variation pattern is set corresponding to each game state and the number of retained balls of the normal symbol. Other than the probability variation state (probability variation: with electric sapo), there is one type of variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general figure variation type counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the through gate passage processing executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second winning This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set game state is the normal state (S2102), When it is determined that it is in the normal state (S2102: Yes), since it is a case where the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality is set (S2103) , S2104.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 detects the firing abnormality. (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the processing of S2102 (S2102: No), next, the current game state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a definite state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (S2104), and if it is determined that it is a latent definite state (S2104: Yes), the second notification indicating firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not in the variable probability state (it is in the latent probability state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds directly to S2106.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 , a second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating a firing abnormality is displayed.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the right-handed game is being performed by configuring to determine that the right-handed game is being performed. (For example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display unit 80) is no longer required, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, by setting the notification command for indicating the firing abnormality differently according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is played, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes. can.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed. For example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with an intensity (manipulation amount) sufficient to shoot a ball into the right-handed area. may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. After completing the processing of S2102 to S2103, the processing of S2104 is executed next. In S2104, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S2105).

In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (3 or less) (S2105: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f Add 1 (S2106), set the normal pattern reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f) (S2107), and set the value of the second per random number counter C4 to normal It is stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S2108), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 52), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if not stored (S2305: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S2312.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2313, S2314).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S2313, S2314).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2313, S2314) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2308). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S2311). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S2401 in FIG. 53), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 are executed (S2404).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (variable winning device 65) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (variable winning device 65). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the winning opening (variable winning device 65) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S2405). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S2021 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 49), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2406). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S206 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), according to the variation pattern Then, the variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) has ended , the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307 in FIG. 37) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39). ), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. As for the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating a loss. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2407). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2407), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), it is executed in the second symbol display device. 2012 or S2013 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2409). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2409: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described processes after S2401 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2409: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2410, S2411).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2410). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2410 (S2411). In addition, in the process of this S2411, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the processing of S2408, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, so the power-off process after S2412 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2412), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2413). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2414), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2415), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2408 is at the end of the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2401 to S2407, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2410 and S2411 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2401. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a prize winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S2501). Specifically, the process of S810 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot (jackpot Scenario) is set, it is determined that a special pattern jackpot will start. In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is periodically updated (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or a small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). When it becomes so, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, when a big win is achieved in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened, and when a big win is achieved in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big win is lengthened. can be shortened. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is hit during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the jackpot game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time to switch to the right-handed game (jackpot game) when the left-handed game results in a big hit. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2503). In the processing of this S2503, determination is performed by reading the game information relating to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k.

During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2504).

When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S2504 (S2504: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S2505). Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 54), will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot action setting process (S2505) is executed, first, among the opening action scenarios set corresponding to the jackpot of this time, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. An operation scenario is read (S2641). The opening operation of the large opening is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642), and then this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S2504 in FIG. 54: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed Configure the command to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 what round the game is currently in.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main controller 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that the round game has been newly started. In this case, means for measuring the number of round commands received during one jackpot game is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113, and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time is provided on the side of the voice ramp control device 113. may be calculated, and the display mode of the number of rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description continues. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506). The start timing of the ending production is the final round of the jackpot game (the 16th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the open/close door 65b is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2506: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2508). It should be noted that the end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the set ending effect. In the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2509: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2509), and this processing exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S2508: No), the process is terminated.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S2512). In this jackpot ending process (S2512), a process of setting a special symbol high probability state or a normal symbol high probability state according to the type of jackpot won is executed.

When the jackpot ending process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S2701: Yes), after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable state is set as the game state, so the probability variable counter 203g The value is set to 70 (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the big win type this time is the big win C (S2701: No), the process of S2702 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2703.

In the process of S2703, 70 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the game state is set (S2704), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 57, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 58) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), it executes power-off processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then , interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If it has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. (Hereinafter, when both frame buttons are collectively referred to as the frame button 22), it is set to monitor the input whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set at the same time, a process of differentiating the button effects to be executed according to the priority is executed based on the information in the button effect layer storage area 223m. Also, when executing a plurality of button effects in duplicate, a process for validating the operations of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4110, command determination processing (S4111) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time, propriety determination result) of the first special symbol. In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4203). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), special figure 2 variation start processing provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4205: No), whether the number of pending balls command is received from the main controller 110 It discriminates (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the pending ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the pending ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the processing of S4207, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing ends. .

In the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. A certain state) and a winning game state (during a jackpot) are set in the sub-state setting area 223k.

Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213), based on the fluctuation stop related command received from the main controller 110, a display command indicating the corresponding pattern stop is set (S4214), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the variation stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the winning related command has been received (S4215), and it has been determined that the winning related command has been received. In that case (S4215: Yes), hit-related processing is executed (S4216), and this processing ends. Details of the winning-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 performs processing.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

The command determination processing (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used, for example, the process of determining whether or not a state command is received, either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command The determination order may be defined so that it is executed before the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start processing of the main control device 110 (see S210 in FIG. 35) , the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state has changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 60, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 60 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for dependent variation) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) to be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of special symbols are variably displayed at the same time (parallel), the variable display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of any one of the special symbols is preferentially displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this embodiment, when the game state is set as the game state, the ball is caused to flow into the ball entry unit 64 (see FIG. 2), and the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port are opened. A left-handed game in which a ball is entered into 64b2 is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are evenly executed.

In this case, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is evenly divided, and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 2 are displayed together. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of fluctuation displays (special figure 1 fluctuation display, special figure 2 fluctuation display) are executed at the same time, and a fluctuation display (displacement fluctuation) indicating that the special figure lottery result is out There is a problem that the desire to play is lowered due to frequent display. In addition, there is a problem that a plurality of variable displays are executed at different variable speeds, and the eyes of the player watching the variable displays become tired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 is used as the main variation display, and is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to show the lottery result of the special figure 2. The variable display is a sub-variable display, and is configured to be executed in the small display area Dm4 of the 3-symbol display device 81. FIG. And, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, winning a jackpot), the special figure 2 variation display in which the secondary variation display is executed is configured to be switched to the main variation display.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are equally executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the deviation variation of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the side of the secondary variation display. Since it is possible, the number of variable display times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the total number of variable display times of special figure 1 and the number of big hit variation display times of special figure 2), the big hit It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of variable display times indicating winning (the number of times that the number of variable display times of special figure 1 and the number of times of variable display of special figure 2 are combined), so it looks higher than the actual probability of winning. It can make you think that you have won a jackpot with a probability.

Further, by emphasizing and executing the variable display corresponding to one special symbol among a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to make the player pay attention only to the variable display corresponding to one special symbol. Therefore, fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main variation display during the normal state, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the probability variation state and the time saving state. is configured to be the main fluctuation display. That is, according to the game state, it is configured to variably set the special symbol to be the main variable display. That is, when the variable probability state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by executing the right-handed game is executed, so the special figure 1 The special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the lottery, and the special figure 1 lottery is hardly executed.

Therefore, during the probability variable state and the time saving state, the variation display (special figure 2 variation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be the main variation display, so that the special figure lottery is actually executed. Regardless, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation where the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to occur, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, which is a game state in which a plurality of types of special figure lotteries (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed, variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery Although the display is set to be the main fluctuation display, it is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery may be the main fluctuation display, and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2. Different benefits (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished) that can be given when a jackpot is won in the lottery are easily given to the player. The variable display corresponding to the special symbol on the side may be set as the main variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to variably set the special figure type to be the main fluctuation display according to the set game state, but the special figure type to be the main fluctuation display is changed under another condition For example, if it is a game state in which a plurality of types of special figure lotteries (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed, the special figure lottery is not executed. It is preferable to configure so that the variable display corresponding to the special figure lottery executed earlier becomes the main variable display. As a result, even though the lottery condition of the special lottery (starting prize to the ball entrance) is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the special symbol for which the lottery was executed first is set to the secondary variable display, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player because the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, it may be configured such that the player selects which special symbol is to be the main variation display.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is set, first. Set the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e to ON (S4301), extract the variation pattern from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4302), and select the detailed display mode using the variation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the normal state (S4304). In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the current state is normal (S4304: Yes), in order to display the fluctuation display of the first special symbol as the main fluctuation display, the display command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern It sets (S4305) and ends this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (time saving state, probability variable state) (S4304: No), the game where the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation display (Because it is a game state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is a sub-variation display), the command for display indicating the special figure 1 sub-variation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing ends.

Here, when the command for display indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is set, the command output processing (see S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113 Output to the display control device 114 and stored in the display control device 114 side. Display control device 114, in the state of storing the command indicating the special figure 1 main variation pattern, when receiving the display command for special figure 1 variation, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol display Image data is generated to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the device 81 . On the other hand, in the state where the display control device 114 stores the command indicating the special figure 1 follower variation pattern, when the display command for the special figure 1 variation is received, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol It is controlled so as not to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 .

In this way, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, regardless of the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display, the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to each special figure fluctuation is set, and the display control device 114 side , setting conditions of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display, and the received display command, the image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is generated based on the voice lamp control. It is possible to omit the process of determining the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the sub-variation display on the device 113 side and setting the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to the judgment result, and reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113. can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 61, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 61 is the flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state Accordingly, the process of setting the display mode (variation pattern for primary variation, variation pattern for secondary variation) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) to be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352) , a detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4353).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the sub-state setting area 223k is read to determine whether the current game state is the normal state (S4354). In the process of S4354, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (normal state, variable probability state), that is, (S4354: No), the second special symbol variation display is a secondary game state, Set the display command indicating the special figure 2 main fluctuation pattern (S4355), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4354, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S4354: Yes), the second special symbol variation display is a subordinate gaming state (the first special symbol variation display (Because it is the main game state), set a display command indicating a special figure 2 subordinate variation pattern (S4356), and end this process.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols While simultaneously displaying the variable effect display (variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the third symbol display device 81, according to the set game state, each special symbol (first Special pattern, second special pattern) display mode (size of display area, presence or absence of display as the third pattern) can be variably set, so that the fluctuation situation (lottery result and number of fluctuations) in the current situation It is possible to make the player easily grasp the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallelly) executes a variation (lottery), it is possible to prevent a game from being provided that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

In the stop class command reception process (S4206), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop class command is received, the special figure 1 stop class selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and the process ends.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, the content of the pending ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows the pending ball number processing (S4208) In this pending ball number processing (S4208), when the pending ball number is the upper limit value, a process for setting a pending effect is executed.

When the pending ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the current number of held balls is the upper limit (S4503). When it is determined that the number of pending balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a pending effect (S4504). Specifically, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the reservation performance, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the result of the lottery for executing the reservation performance. Then, when it is determined that the pending effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), a display command indicating the pending effect is set (S4505), and 8 is set to the value of the pending effect counter 223j (S4506). . Then, other processing related to suspension is executed (S4507), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the number of pending balls is not the upper limit value (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4504 that the pending effect is not to be executed (S4504: No), S4505- The process of S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4507.

Next, the state command reception processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of the status command reception process (S4212) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4601, if it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the sub-status setting area 223k (S4610), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern command are set on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. It may be configured to

Returning to FIG. 64, the description continues. In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether the probability variation state (S4605), and if it is determined that the gaming state is the probability variation state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the probability variation state) (S4605: Yes), it corresponds to the probability variation state Set the main display area setting command, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (S4606), set the display command indicating the variable probability mode (S4607), and process S4610 described above. Move to

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not a probability variable state (the state command received this time is not a command that indicates a probability variable state), that is, if a state command indicating a time saving state is received (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4220). In this win-related process (S4220), as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big win game to be executed when a big win is won is performed. , processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 when a jackpot is won is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (jackpot game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and based on the accumulated result A process of setting the number-of-balls-for-display command is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the jackpot related processing (S5002), which is one of the winning related processing (S4220 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4220 in FIG. 65) is a jackpot start command (S5101). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that an ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S5106), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description is continued. In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5003: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a prize ball command (S5003: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter (not shown) (S5004), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after addition is set (S5005), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), received during the period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command is accumulated by the number of prize balls counter. The number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the counter for the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game or during the latent state.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the ball acquired during the period (advantageous duration) from when the time saving state or probability variable state is set until the normal state is set again The accumulated number can be reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period within the advantageous continuation period (a period combining the jackpot game period and the time-saving state period until the next jackpot game is executed, or the probability variable state period) is accumulated. may be configured to be displayed as In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls won during one game period as history information, and to display the history of the information stored in the storage means.

In addition, as described above, when the configuration for cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls obtained within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times the lottery result (jackpot) in which the special pattern lottery result is advantageous to the player is displayed. Or, it may be configured to display the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big win) that is advantageous to the player.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period, and to play the game enthusiastically. can be done.

Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of special symbols) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided for executing condition achievement notification to indicate that fact, for example, winning a jackpot. The number of times of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of addiction) executed until now may execute condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times exceeds a predetermined number of times (100 times). Further, condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of winning balls obtained within one advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command (effect pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). And, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S5305 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302). And special figure 1 button production setting processing (S5303) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 68 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 1 button production setting processing (S5303). In this special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), the process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as the variation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation this time, and the process for setting the effect mode of the button effect and is executed.

In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), first, information stored in the subordinate state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S5401). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (probability variable state or time saving state) (S5401: No), the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. This is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as the main variable display that is the variable display, and the button effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. Since there is no need, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5401, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is ON (S5402). This special figure 2 button effect flag 223q will be described later in detail, but it is set to ON when the button effect is set based on the special figure 2 fluctuation in the button effect mode setting process (S5303 in FIG. 71) is. In the process of S5402, the special figure 2 button production flag 223q is ON (S5402: Yes), that is, it is determined that the button production is set in the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) In this case, since the button effect of special figure 1 is not newly set, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is not ON (S5402: No), the button effect corresponding to the current special figure variation is selected by referring to the button effect selection table 222c (S5403). . Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect has been selected (the button effect can be executed) by the processing of S5403 (S5404), and when it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5404: Yes), execution timing setting Processing (S5405) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the button effect is not selected (S5404: No), the process of S5405 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, execution timing setting processing (S5405) which is one processing in special figure 1 button effect setting processing (see S5303 in FIG. 68) executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 explain. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this execution timing setting process (S5405). In this execution timing setting process, a process for correcting the execution timing of the button effect set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) is executed.

That is, as in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are configured to be executed at the same time (in parallel), for example, special figure 1 The execution timing of the button effect set based on the variation may be the timing when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit, and the button effect meaningless to the player is executed. I had a problem. Also, in order to solve this problem, during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or if the information indicating the big hit is included in the reservation storage of the special figure 2, the button production is performed with the special figure 1 fluctuation If a restriction is set so as not to execute the button effect, the frequency of execution of the button effect will decrease, which may cause a new problem that the effect of the effect will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the button production corresponding to one special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is set, the other special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) variation situation (lottery situation) is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, it is configured to be able to execute the process of varying the execution timing of the button production corresponding to one special figure fluctuation.

By constructing in this way, when a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the button presentation of the special figure 1 lottery is executed avoiding the timing of informing the player of the lottery result (the stop timing of the big winning pattern). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the execution frequency of the button presentation. In addition, when the button effect of the same mode is executed at a timing different from usual, it gives the player a sense of incompatibility, and the sense of incompatibility can remind the player of a big win (special figure 2 lottery big win). Interest can be improved.

In the execution timing setting process (S5405), first, it is determined whether or not this special figure 1 lottery is a big hit (S5501). When it is determined that this special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot (S5501: No), the winning information of the special figure 2 stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5502). Next, it is determined whether the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the special figure 2 winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b read in the process of S5502 (S5503). When it is determined that there is a jackpot in the special figure 2 winning information (S5503: Yes), the time until the fluctuation (special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation) corresponding to the winning information containing the information indicating the jackpot is started is calculated. (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

In the processing of S5505, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot variation start timing is later than the start timing of the variation (S5505). That is, in the process of S5505, the timing and the timing at which the variation time set to the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time passes, and the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started are determined, and the special figure 1 variation to be performed this time is determined. It is determined whether or not it is necessary to correct the effect mode (execution timing) of the variable effect (button effect) to be performed. In the process of S5505, the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot variation is not later than the timing when the variation time set for the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time elapses, that is, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be performed this time If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started during (S5505: No), the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started is within 15 seconds after the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time is started. (S5506).

In the processing of this S5506, when the button effect set in the special figure 1 variation is executed at normal timing (see FIG. 24), in order to determine whether it overlaps the special figure 2 jackpot variation, the normal button It is determined whether the effect period (10 to 15 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) overlaps with the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation.

In the process of S5506, if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds, even if the normal button production is executed, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is not executed during the button production, so the button production A period predetermined in the selection table 222c is set as a button effect execution period. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, when it is determined that the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is within 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S5506: Yes), the execution timing of the button effect is corrected (variable) A process (S5507) for doing so is executed.

In the process of S5507, the effect information included in the button effect is corrected so that the button effect is executed in a period before the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation start timing. Then, the effect mode (information) after correction is set in the button effect hierarchy storage area (S5507), the special figure 1 button effect flag 23 is set to ON, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not later than the special figure 2 variation (S5505: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot variation start timing is within 15 seconds (S5506: No), the variation start timing is 15 seconds If it is determined that it is not within (S5506: No), the button effect execution period is set in the period before the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation (S5507), and the corresponding area of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m Button effect information is set (S5508), then the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is set to ON (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is not within 15 seconds (S5506: Yes), it is impossible to set the button effect, so this process ends as it is do.

Also, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that this special figure 1 lottery is a big hit (S5501: Yes), or in the process of S5503, if it is determined that there is no big hit in the special figure 2 winning information ( S5503: No), to set the execution period of the button effect in the special figure 1 variation as it is (S5510), the process of S5508 described above. In addition, in the processing of S5505, also when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation start timing is after the variation (S5505: Yes), the processing of S5510 is executed and the processing of S5508 is performed.

As described above, in the execution timing correction process (S5405) in the present embodiment, at the execution timing of the special figure 1 variation, the winning information held by the special figure 2 reservation (the special figure stored in the winning information storage area 223b 2 (winning information corresponding to 2)), determination of whether there is winning information having information indicating a big hit, determination of execution (start) timing of special figure 2 variation corresponding to winning information including information indicating a big hit, Using, during this special figure 1 variation, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed, or the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot variation is determined, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 variation However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations until the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is executed (out of the special figure 2 reservations, the jackpot reservation Based on the special figure 2 pending number digested until the special figure 2 variation is executed), and based on the determination result, during this special figure 1 variation, the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed You may comprise so that it may discriminate|determine whether it is.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 lottery (fluctuation) and the special figure 2 lottery (fluctuation) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Without providing a large difference in the variation time of 2, it is configured to evenly execute each special figure lottery (variation), for example, as in the case of the present embodiment, special figure 1 lottery (variation) and special Figure 2 lottery (fluctuation) and, in a gaming machine that can be executed at the same time (in parallel), according to the set game state, one special figure lottery is efficiently executed game state and the other special figure In order to provide a game state in which the lottery is efficiently executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation on the side that makes it difficult to execute the special figure lottery in each game state is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes for the deviation fluctuation, and the hit fluctuation is set to 4 minutes). If you have a configuration that allows you to set the fluctuation time, in the gaming state where the special figure 1 lottery is likely to be executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, or the special that will be executed next time Only by determining whether or not the lottery (variation) in FIG.

Also, in this case, in the gaming state in which the special figure 1 lottery is likely to be executed, the maximum time set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, which is difficult to execute, is a big hit. It is good to set the variation time of each special figure so that it is shorter than the shortest time of the variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed more reliably during the current special figure 1 variation.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. After executing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), next, based on the extracted variation pattern, set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol as the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S5304), 1 is subtracted from the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the process of S5302 to S5305 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5306.

In the processing of S5306, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5306). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5307), based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, the second special A variation pattern command for the display of the design is set (S5308), and then special figure 2 button effect setting processing (S5309) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. Figure 69 is the flowchart which shows this special figure 2 button production setting processing (S5309).

In the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (S5601). If it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (that is, the variable probability or the time-saving state) (S5601: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S5601: Yes), whether or not the special figure 1 button production flag 223s is ON, that is, the button production is executed with the variation of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (S5602). When it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is ON (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is a big hit (S5603). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a big win (S5603: No), since there is no need to preferentially execute the button performance of the second special symbol, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S5603: Yes), or in the process of S5602, it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is not ON. If it does (S5602: No), it is the timing when the button effect can be set even in the variation of the second special symbol, so the button effect corresponding to the current variation is selected from the button effect selection table 222c (S5604).

Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect can be executed (S5605). If it is determined that the button effect cannot be executed (S5605: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5605: Yes), the button effect mode setting process (S5606) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the button effect mode setting process (S5606), which is one process in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this button effect mode setting process (S5606). In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), when the button effect is set for both the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the button effect is set according to the priority of the button effect. Execute, and set the button effect if it can be set redundantly.

In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), first, the button effect information set in the button effect layer storage area 223m is read (S5701). It is determined whether or not there is effect information in the area (S5702). If it is determined that the effect information is present in the highest priority area (S5702: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation being executed is a jackpot (S5703). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation being executed is a jackpot (S5703: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot variation being performed is given priority over the button effect in the special figure 2 variation, so this processing as it is exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation being executed is not a jackpot (S5703: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the second special symbol button effect set this time is during the first special symbol button effect period (S5704). When it is determined that it is during the button production period of the first special symbol (S5704: Yes), the overlap button production is performed during the period in which the button production periods of the set first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap. Set (S5705). The overlapping button effect set here is, as described above, when the variation result of the second special symbol is a win, during the period when the button effect of the first special symbol and the button effect of the second special symbol overlap. Set the button effect C. By configuring in this way, the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the execution timing of the button effect is not during the button effect period of the special figure 1 (S5704: No), the button effect is set in the highest priority area (S5706), S5707 , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) is executed within the main processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and is processing for starting effects using the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b and processing for operations. to run. In frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107), button effect start processing (S5801) is first executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 73, the button effect start process (S5801), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this button effect start process (S5801). In this button effect start process (S5801), each button effect information stored in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is read, and when it is time to start the button effect, a process for executing the button effect is executed. be. Further, when executing the button effect with the highest priority (priority 1), a process for discarding the button effect being executed is executed. By executing such processing, it is possible to properly execute a plurality of button effects set at different occasions according to their priorities. Also, only the button effect with the highest priority (button effect with high effect) can be executed without fail even while other button effects are being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In the button effect start process (S5801), first, information is read from the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m (S5901). Next, based on the read information, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the button effect (S5902). In the process of S5902, a plurality of pieces of information stored in a plurality of storage areas (first layer area 223m1 to fourth layer area 223m4) are read out in descending order of priority. Therefore, when the execution timings of the button effects are the same, the button effect with the higher priority is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined that it is time to start the button effect when the button valid period start timing (see FIG. 24) specified in the button effect selection table 222b is reached. However, without being limited to this, for example, a range of two seconds (four seconds) before and after the start timing of the button valid period may be defined as the same timing and determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress complicated execution of button effects when the start timings of a plurality of button effects are stored to be slightly different.

In addition to the contents described above, a plurality of button effects stored at timings in which valid periods set for each button effect overlap may be determined as button effects to be executed at the same timing. good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the processing of S5902, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the button effect (S5902: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to start the button effect (S5902: Yes), the button effect to be started this time is set to priority 1 according to the information in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m read out in the process of S5901. If it is determined that the priority is 1 (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether other button effects are being executed (S5905).

In the process of S5905, if it is determined that other button effects are being executed (S5905: Yes), the button effects of priority 1 are preferentially executed, so button operations for other button effects are disabled. set (S5906), set the button effect flag corresponding to the disabled button effect this time to OFF (S5907), and then set a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the information of priority 1 this time. (S5908), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5905, if it is determined that the other button effects are not being executed (S5905: No), the processes of S5906 to S5907 are skipped because there is no need to disable the other button effects. , S5908.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, if it is determined that the current button effect is not priority 1 (S5903: No), a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the current priority is set (S5904), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description continues. After executing the button effect start process (S5801), next, the button effect update process (S5802) is executed. Now, with reference to FIG. 74, the button effect update process (S5802), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the button effect update process (S5802). In this button effect update process (S5802), a process of updating the value of the button valid timer 223n and setting a display command according to the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the button effect is executed.

In the button effect update process (S5802), first, the value of the button valid timer 223n is read out (S6001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n read in the process of S6001 is greater than 0 (S6002). If the value of the button valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (S6002: No), it means that the current operation valid period does not determine whether the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, so the operation valid period is set. The processing of S6002 to S6009, which is executed when the information is set, is skipped, and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S6002: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding button valid timer 223n (S6003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S6003 is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6004). If it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is not 0 (that is, the value is greater than 0) (S6004: No), the button effect is being executed, so the current value of the button valid timer 223n A corresponding display command is set (S6005). The display mode (remaining period display mode) of the validity period gauge 812a (see FIG. 9A) is generated by the display command set here.

Then, when the process of S6005 is finished, the process proceeds to the second frame button setting process (S6011), which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S6004, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is 0 (S6004: Yes), it is the end timing of the button effect, so the corresponding special symbol button effect flag (first The button effect flag 223p and the second button effect flag 223q) are set to OFF (S6006), and then it is determined whether the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6007). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has operated (depressed) the frame button 22 during the valid period of operation (during the valid period of the button) so as to satisfy the operation condition.

Specifically, if the operation condition of the button effect being executed this time is "perform one operation (press) on the frame button 22", the frame button 22 is pressed once during the operation valid period. When pressed, the operation completion flag 223s is set to ON, and if the operation condition is "operate (press) the frame button 22 50 times", the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 50 times during the operation valid period. ), the operated flag 223s is set to ON. The condition for turning on the operation completion flag 223s is, for example, a predetermined lottery every time the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches a predetermined number of times. A condition that is established when the lottery result is a specific result, a condition that is established when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period, or the like may be set.

In the process of S6007, if it is determined that the operation completion flag 223s is ON (S6007: Yes), a display command corresponding to operation completion (a display command indicating that the button operation during the button effect was successful). is set (S6008), the operation completion flag 223s is set to OFF (S6009), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process ends. Based on the display command set in the process of S6008, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the success screen of the button effect (for example, see FIG. 9B), and the third symbol display device 81 to display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6007, if it is determined that the operation completion flag 223s is not set to ON (S6007: No), the operation is not performed (concept including operation to the extent that the operation condition is not satisfied during the valid operation period). A corresponding display command is set (S6010), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process ends. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S6010, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the button effect failure screen (see FIG. 10) and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the second frame button setting process (S6011), which is one process in the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the second frame button setting process (S6011). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first frame button 22a is normally operated. It is configured so that a button effect is executed. Then, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the overlapping button effects are executed with the second frame button 22b as the operation target. In this second frame button setting process (S6011), various processes for the second frame button 22b relating to duplicate button effects are executed.

In the second frame button setting process (S6011), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the button effect. (S6101). Then, if it is determined that it is time to start the button effect (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start the overlapping button effect (S6102). When it is determined that it is time to start overlapping button effects (S6102: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to ON (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6101 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S6101: No), or if it is determined that it is not the start time of the overlapping button effect in the process of S6102 (S6102: No), Since it is not the timing to enable the second frame button, the process of S6103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6104.

In the processing of S6104, it is determined whether it is time to end the button effect (S6104). If it is determined that it is not the time to end the button effect (S6104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104: Yes), it is determined whether the end timing is the end timing of the overlapping button effect (S6105). If it is determined that it is time to end the overlapping button effect (S6105: Yes), the second frame button enable flag 223r is set to OFF (S6106), and a display command indicating the end of the button effect is set (S6107). ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6105 that it is not the end timing of the overlapping button effect (S6105: No), the process of S6106 is skipped because there is no need to disable the second frame button. The process of S6107 is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 72, the description continues. After the button effect update process (S5802) is executed, the button press process is executed (S5803), then other button related processes are executed (S5804), and this process ends.

Now, with reference to FIG. 76, the button depression process (S5803), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this button pressing process (S5803).

In the button pressing process (S5803), first, it is determined whether or not the second frame button valid flag 223r is ON (S6201). If it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is off (S6201: No), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is on, that is, whether the first frame button 22a has been pressed ( S6202). If it is determined that the first frame button 22a has not been pressed (S6202: No), then neither the first frame button 22a nor the second frame button 22b has been operated, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is ON (S6201), it is determined whether or not the second frame button has been pressed (S6203). If it is determined that the second frame button 22b has not been pressed (S6203: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a has been pressed (S6202: Yes) or that the second frame button 22b has been pressed (S6203: Yes), the value of the corresponding press counter 223t is incremented by 1. (S6204). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the depression counter 223t added in the process of S6205 is a predetermined value (S6205). When it is determined that the value of the button pressing counter 223t is the predetermined value (S6205: Yes), the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6206), and a display command corresponding to the post-operation effect is set (S6207). ), the value of the depression counter 223t is cleared to 0 (S6208), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223t is not the predetermined value, a display command corresponding to the counter value is set (S6209), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to win the lottery result (jackpot with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, but it is limited to this. For example, only the lottery of special figure 2, if the lottery result is not a big hit, a privilege different from the big win game may be given to the player in some cases. It may be configured, and as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, winning the jackpot with the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the special figure 1 (for example, a variable state ) may be easily set.

In this case, the types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn according to the set game state are configured to be variable, and when a specific first game state (for example, probability variable state) is set, the second special symbol is set. lottery can be easily executed, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

In addition, as a game state, in order to be able to set a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbols during the latent state, Similarly, even when a normal state, which is a low-probability state of normal patterns, is set, the lottery for the second special pattern can be executed, and in the normal state, the lottery for the second special pattern is frequently executed. In order to suppress this, a configuration may be adopted in which a long (10 minutes) fluctuation time is set.

However, in the gaming machine constructed in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, although the efficiency is low, and if a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is elected with a predetermined lottery result (big hit or small hit) in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is out of the lottery and forced to stop, or It is preferable to configure so as to temporarily stop. As a result, it is possible to set the second special symbol so that it is difficult to win the jackpot when the normal state is set.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. A ball passes through a specific area provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the jackpot game is completed, so that a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. You can

In addition, in this embodiment, three game states (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state) are configured to be settable as game states, but four game states that can be set (normal state, latent probability state, It may be a variable probability state, a time saving state, or two or less.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are simultaneously executed in the normal state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entrance 64b1 is provided in the left region, and a first ball entrance with an electric accessory 640a attached in the right region and a second ball entrance 640 with no electric accessory 640a are provided, and a variable state is provided. It may be configured so that playing a right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player when is set.

When configured in this way, during the normal state, similar to the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation is set so that the variation time shorter than the special figure 2 variation is set easily, and during the latent state is set so that it is easier to set a shorter variation time for special figure 2 variation than for special figure 1 variation, as in the first embodiment described above, and the probability variation state and time saving state are released with the electric accessory 640a. It is better to set it so that it becomes easier.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big win is performed by the drawing of the first special pattern by the left-handed game, and during the time-saving state, the drawing of the first special pattern is performed more efficiently than during the normal state by the right-handed game. A game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a game aiming at a big hit, and a game aiming at a big hit is performed by performing a lottery of the first special pattern with a higher probability than a normal state and efficiently by a right-handed game during the variable probability state, and a latent probability. During the state, a right-handed game can be played aiming at a big hit by lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 91. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, the boot processing (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 76). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 78, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S8101. and the processing of S8102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 89(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9502 in FIG. 89A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and simple display setting processing (see S8309 in FIG. 79B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When the instruction to start the variable performance is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the variable pattern command for display is received, the variable image is immediately displayed during the period of the variable performance when the power is turned on. It is possible to display it on and perform a simple variation effect. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79(a). FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 79B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301). If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG.

In the display setting process (S8303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305), 32, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S8306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S8308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S8309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S8304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, the details of the command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 80, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S8403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S8405), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S8405). This variation pattern command processing (S8405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S8503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable performance in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . It should be noted that, for example, when the player operates the operation means or during the variable display of the special symbols, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed (rewritten) based on the effect mode set at another opportunity. When the display rewriting command for display is output, the timing counter 233h to which the time data is set by the processing of S8503 is used to measure the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table, and the corresponding fluctuation A rewriting process is executed to rewrite data subsequent to the display data. In addition, the image data based on the rewritten rendering mode is generated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display rewrite command was received. Thereby, after securing the time required for the rewriting process, it is possible to reliably execute the effect after the rewriting. Also, without being limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, all of the effects that can be executed during the variation (predetermined number), that is, the game In the case where the effect mode in which the player operates the operation means is executed, the effect executed when the player properly operates the operation means and the effect executed when the player does not properly operate the operation means are executed. In addition, information indicating the effect to be executed when the number of special reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the change is included, and it is necessary in the variable display data table corresponding to each effect information Such sprite image data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. may be configured to determine the image data to be displayed. Furthermore, in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of variation of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the effect that can be performed during the variation is performed in different layers (layers), and each layer By setting and controlling a visible state in which the player can visually recognize and a non-visible state in which the player cannot visually recognize, it may be possible to make it appear that only a specific effect is being executed.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a stop type command for display (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S8601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S8602 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to ON (S8603) and returns to command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S8602. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S8601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S8602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If there is an opening command (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the opening command processing (S8409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 82(b). FIG. 82(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8412). If there is an ending command (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the ending command process (S8413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S8414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to independently (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. , When one of the special symbols is stopped (fixed) in a pattern indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the other special symbol during fluctuation is displayed at the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of , it is configured to forcibly stop display with a symbol indicating the disconnection.

And, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) is executed. , a display command (forced stop command).

In this embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute a stop indication based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third pattern and the fourth pattern can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main controller 110 .

In addition, the display fluctuation stop command includes a display command indicating temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113. When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as fluctuation stop display data is determined.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S8931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S8932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the process of S8412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the display notification If there is a command (S8416: Yes), the notification command process for display is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the notification command process (S8415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 84(b). FIG. 84(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S8951). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. In the processing of S8416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the back image change command process (S8419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S9002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S9001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S9002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S9002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player never continuously operates the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S8418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8420). If (S8420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8421), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the error command processing (S8421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S9102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8416 that there is no error command (S8420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8422), and the process returns to the process of S8401. In addition, in the processing of S8422, command processing for various display commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. For example, when a display command for varying the timing of execution of a specific effect is received, processing for varying the execution timing of a specific effect already defined in the variable display data table based on the clock data. is executed. Also, the variation display of the 3rd pattern regarding the special figure 1 variation and the variation display of the 3rd pattern regarding the special figure 2 variation, which is the main variation display and which is the sub-variation display for display When a command is received, determine the received command, determine whether it is different from the setting status (association) currently being executed, and if it is determined to be different, set based on the variation pattern command of each special figure variation A process of switching the display data table to be used for the main fluctuation display and for the subordinate fluctuation display is executed.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), and the processing of S8402 to S8422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S8401 to S8422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 81(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 81(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S9202 to S9204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S9205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S9201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S9202), S9203-S9204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S9203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S9203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S9301).

In task processing (S8304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S9204), or if it is determined in the process of S9203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S9203: No), then the process proceeds to S9205.

In S9205, pointer update processing is executed (S9205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S9402). As a result, if it is End information (S9402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S9403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9206). In the task processing (S8304), the type of the sprite (display object) making up the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S9206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S9209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S9210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S9211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9215), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thereby, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, unlike the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S9215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S9209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S9216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S9216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S9216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S9216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, details of the transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 89(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S9501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S9501, that is, if it is turned off (S9501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S9502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S9601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9602). In the processing of S9602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S9602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S9602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9602: Yes), the process proceeds to S9603. Also, as a result of the processing of S9601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9601: No), the process proceeds to S9603.

In the process of S9603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S9603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S9603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) (see S9501: No in FIG. 89A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S9503), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9205) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9703), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S9704), and the process proceeds to S9705.

Also, in the process of S9702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S9702: No), the process of S9703 and S9704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9705. In the process of S9705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9706).

In the process of S9706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9706 that the transfer process has not ended (S9706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9706: Yes), the process proceeds to S9707. Also, as a result of the process of S9705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9705: No), the process proceeds to S9707.

In the processing of S9707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9707). is turned off (S9708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S9713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S9707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S9709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on, but off (S9709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S9709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S9712), and the process proceeds to S9713.

In the process of S9713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713). The determination in the process of S9713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9713 (S9713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9713 (S9713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S9714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9715), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of the drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), a drawing list (FIG. 32) is generated (S9801). That is, in the process of S9801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S9802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is done each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 109. FIG. Compared to the first embodiment, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the storage area for storing the priority of the effect to be executed is changed, and the priority is also given to effects other than button effects (for example, display effects). , adding a pending effect that is executed when a new pending pattern is acquired, adding a function that allows the player to select restrictions on the effect to be executed, , and the electrical configuration and processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 are different in order to deal with the above-described differences.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the fluctuation of each special symbol As a production, the button production was configured to be configurable. Then, in order to suppress the overlapping execution of the button effects set by another opportunity (the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1 and the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 2), A priority for executing the button performance is given to the button performance, and the button performance is executed based on the given priority. As a result, even if the button performances are set at overlapping timings, the button performance having a high priority can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with a performance that is easy to understand.

In addition to this, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the button effect when the held ball is acquired. As a result, the opportunities for setting the button effects are increased, so that more button effects can be provided to the player.

Also, in the above-described first embodiment, during the execution of the button effect (first button effect) set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a specific button effect (second button effect) as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed, a redundant button effect (special button effect) combining the first button effect and the second button effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure and the execution timing of the button effect set based on the acquisition of the reserved ball overlapped. Also in this case, the overlapping button effects (special button effects) are configured to be executed. As a result, even during the execution of the variable performance for showing the lottery result of the special figure, the player can be motivated to play the game to acquire a new reserved ball.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, it is configured to give priority to effects other than button effects (for example, notice effects executed during variation effects of special symbols). As a result, it is possible to manage the presence or absence of execution of the button effect and the notice effect for which the execution timing is set to be the same.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the number of storage areas for storing information related to each effect to which priority is given is increased, and the player can select the range of the storage area used for executing the effect. It consists of By configuring in this way, the quality (priority) and amount of the effect to be executed can be adjusted, so that the effect desired by each individual player can be provided.

<Regarding the flow of production in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95, the content of the characteristic presentation performed in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a button effect (8-piece pending effect) is executed when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit number (8), and FIG. During the execution of the button effect (button effect A) as a variable effect, a duplicate button effect (super 8 pending effect) is executed based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaching a predetermined number. It is a timing chart. FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are schematic diagrams showing the effect contents of the button effect (reserved effect) executed based on the acquisition of the reserved ball of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is configured to be able to hold and store up to 4 pieces of winning information, and the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be held and stored up to 4 pieces. Configure. Then, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged at the lower position of the game area, and the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 is the first ball entrance where the winning information of the special figure 1 can be obtained. 64b1 and the left second entrance 64b2 that can acquire the prize information of the special figure 2 are configured to be alternately distributed.

Therefore, in the normal state where the game (left-handed game) aiming at the entering ball unit 64 is performed, the maximum number of reserved balls with special symbols (retained balls that are the sum of the reserved balls of special figure 1 and the reserved balls of special figure 2) A game in which 8 can be obtained is played. Then, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches eight, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the eight reserved balls (see FIG. 94(a) ) is configured to execute a button effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to acquire eight reserved memories of special symbols.

As shown in Figure 92, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed, and the number of special figure reserved balls (the sum of the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls ) is "6" (the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "3" and the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "3"), the ball flows into the ball entering unit 64 and enters the first ball entering port 64b1. When the ball enters the ball, the number of special figure reserved balls becomes "7" (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3"). After that, if the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 enters the second left ball entrance 64b2 before a new special figure variation (lottery) is executed, the number of special figure pending balls will be "8" (special figure The number of 1 reserved balls is "4", and the number of special 2 reserved balls is "4").

In this embodiment, when the number of special figure pending balls reaches the upper limit value (8), the result of prefetching each prize information that is reserved and stored (for the acquired prize information, the special figure lottery using that prize information 94) is executed to suggest to the player the result of the preliminary determination performed before the execution of the first frame button 22a. A button effect (usually 8 pending effects) for operating is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the normal 8-holding effect executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the normal 8-piece pending effect is executed, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed after operating a first frame button 22a;

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the normal 8 reserved effect is executed, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As in the first embodiment described above, the number of special figure reserved balls (the sum of the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is a predetermined number (in this embodiment, the upper limit number "8 ”) is displayed in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a of the main display area Dm. Then, when the special figure pending number reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 94(a), it is displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds. The reserved patterns h1 to h8 are displayed in order of the oldest reserved memory, and although not shown, the reserved pattern displayed is the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, or the reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation The symbol is displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify whether it is a symbol or not.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the ball that has flowed into the ball unit 64 can acquire the winning information of the special figure 1 and the winning information of the special figure 2 from the first ball entrance 64b1. Since it is configured to be alternately distributed to the left second entrance 64b2, when the game state is the normal state, basically, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special The reserved symbols corresponding to FIG. 2 reserved are alternately displayed. However, both the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls are set with the upper limit number to be stored and stored, and the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are different fluctuation times configured to be executed.

Therefore, for example, in the state of 3 special figure 1 pending, 3 special figure 2 pending, long time (for example, 90 seconds) variation time is set as special figure 1 variation, the long variation By the end of the Toku-zu 2 variation multiple times (eg, 3 times) may occur. In such a situation, the number of special figures pending stored will be greatly different between special figures 1 and 2, and according to the above example, special figures 1 pending "2", special figures FIG. 2 Pending '0' situations occur. Then, in this situation, if the ball continues to flow into the entering ball unit 64 and the number of special figure reserved balls is increased, when the special figure 1 reservation reaches the upper limit number (4), the value of the special figure 2 reservation is " 2” occurs. In this case, if the ball is continuously entered into the ball entry unit 64, even if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 reaches the upper limit, A new special figure 1 reserved ball cannot be acquired, and special figure 2 reserved balls will be acquired continuously. As a result, in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third design display device 81, the reserved design indicating the special figure 2 reservation is displayed continuously.

In this way, a pachinko machine having a configuration in which it is possible to alternately acquire (hold and store) the special figure 1 reservation (winning information corresponding to the special figure 1) and the special figure 2 reservation (winning information corresponding to the special figure 2) 10, depending on the number of retained balls acquired and the variation time of the special figure variation to be executed, the retained symbols displayed in the order of retention storage alternately display special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension. Even if it becomes a state where it is not held, the player can easily grasp the type of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern by looking at the display mode of the reservation pattern, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to execute the production (holding production) using the reserved pattern indicating the number of special figure reserved balls, but the reservation production Another condition may be provided as an execution condition of, for example, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of reserved symbols indicating special figure reservation of the same type are displayed side by side, the reserved effect is executed. Alternatively, the reservation performance may be executed based on the combination of the order of the special figure types indicated by each reserved design and the number of displayed reserved designs (special figure reserved storage number).

By configuring in this way, when either the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 or the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the shooting of the balls is stopped, and the operation of the game is lowered. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 94(a), the description is continued. Suspended patterns h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds are formed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds each time the special figure variation is started, to the running display area Ds1a. The special figure is displayed so that the player can grasp the display form of the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation currently being executed (the display form changed by the reserved performance until the special figure fluctuation is executed). Variation is performed. By constructing in this way, the performance result of the reserved performance and the performance result of the variation performance executed corresponding to the special figure variation are analyzed in a complex manner, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is predicted to the player. can be made easier.

When the normal 8 reserved effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds is a preparation display prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a. The display is changed to a mode (a display mode imitating the first frame button 22a). Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a eight times is displayed, and the first frame button 22a, which is the operation target in the normal eight-hold effect, is displayed. A simulated button 812 is displayed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed during the normal 8-piece pending effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the player presses the first frame button 22a during this normal 8 reserved effect, the display mode of the reserved pattern h1 is first changed from the preparation display mode to the suggestive display mode (see FIG. 94(b)). Then, the display mode is variably displayed in the order of reserved symbols h2 to h8. Next, with reference to FIG. 94(b), the effect result contents of the normal 8 pending effect will be described.

In the normal 8-piece pending effect, when the player operates the first frame button 22a, a suggestive display mode is displayed that can suggest to the player the look-ahead result of each winning information corresponding to each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8. . This suggestive display mode suggests that the information indicating the big win is included in the target winning information, and a plurality of displays with different easiness of selection when the information indicating the big win is included. The mode (color) is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, the display mode of "white→blue→green→red" is defined in the order of difficulty of selection (lower expectation for a big win) when information indicating a big win is included. In other words, the reserved pattern displayed in the "white" display mode as the production result of the normal 8 reserved production is displayed in the "red" display mode because it is difficult to win a big hit in the special drawing lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern. The held design is constructed so as to easily win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery corresponding to the reserved design.

As a result, by grasping the effect result of the normal 8 pending effects before the special figure fluctuation is actually executed, a specific reserved pattern (for example, the display mode of "red" is displayed even before the special figure lottery is executed. A game can be played with expectation for a big hit with respect to the reserved symbols displayed in . Therefore, it is possible to keep the player looking forward to the big win for a longer period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal 8 reserved effect of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of operating the operating means (first frame button 22a) is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved symbols h1 to h8. However, the number of times to operate the first frame button 22a is not limited to this, and may be set to a number less than or greater than the number of reserved symbols. Here, when the number of operations less than the number of displayed pending symbols is set, a suggestive display with a high expectation of a big win as a suggestive display mode suggesting the result of prefetching of the prize information stored pending. The reserved patterns h1 to h8 may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of operations in the order in which the mode is set, or the reserved patterns h1 to h8 may be operated in the order in which the suggestive display mode with the low expectation of the big hit is set. It is also possible to variably display only the number corresponding to the number of times.

Further, when the number of times of operation is set to be larger than the number of reserved symbols being displayed, the suggestive display mode of one reserved symbol may be variably displayed a plurality of times. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94(a), all the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are configured to be displayed in the same display mode as the preparation display mode for the normal 8 reserved effect. By making it difficult to predict the content of the suggestive display mode until the player presses the first frame button 22a, an effect is executed to force the player to actively press the first frame button 22a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that allows the player to predict the display mode of the suggestive display mode by the display mode of the preparation display mode may be used, and a plurality of display colors of the preparation display mode may be used. It may be configured to be settable so that the display color of the displayed preparation display mode suggests the display mode of the suggested display mode. For example, when the display color of the preparation display mode is "green", it is preferable to configure so that the suggestive display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed when the first frame button 22a is pressed. With such a configuration, the player can press the first frame button 22a in a state of anticipation of a big win, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is configured to be variably displayed based on the result of prefetching of the corresponding winning information. It is also possible to variably display the display mode of the entire reserved symbols h1 to h8 based on the result of pre-reading of all winning information. In this case, for example, among the reserved patterns h1 to h8, using the display mode of the reserved patterns h1 to h4, the jackpot type when winning the jackpot (game state set after the jackpot game ends and the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is suggested, and the display modes of the remaining reserved symbols h5 to h8 are used to set the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 so as to suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display one suggestion target content by combining the display modes of a plurality of reserved symbols, so that more detailed suggestion information can be provided to the player. In addition, by variably displaying the display modes of all reserved patterns, the player is notified of the effect result of the reserved effect, so that the player can be motivated to operate the first frame button 22a until the end.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which only one operation means (first frame button 22a) is used as the operation means for the player to operate in the normal 8-piece pending effect. , As a preparation display mode corresponding to a reserved symbol in which a suggestive display mode (red) indicating a high expectation of a big hit is displayed, a preparation display mode indicating that an operating means (second frame button 22b) different from usual is operated is displayed. However, the second frame button 22b may be operated when the display mode of the reserved symbol is variably displayed. As a result, a plurality of types of operation means can be operated in one performance (usually, 8 pending performances), so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win can be varied according to the type of operation means, it is possible to make the player interested in which operation means to operate the effect will be executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of operation means, the operation means capable of accepting the operation of variably displaying the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is set so that it is difficult for the player to identify (cannot be identified). Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not to variably display the reserved symbols h1 to h8 according to the operating means operated by the player. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of allowing the player to select the operating means for performing the operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the button effect executed based on the special figure variation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure reserved balls (8 pending effects) are executed in duplicate. The flow of game contents in this case will be explained. FIG. 93 shows the flow of the effect when the button effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure pending balls (8 pending effects) are executed in duplicate. It is a timing chart shown. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 1st control example mentioned above about the content of the button production|presentation performed based on a special figure fluctuation|variation, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, when the number of special pending balls reaches 8, a button effect using the pending patterns h1 to h8 (usually 8 pending effects) is executed. It consists of In addition to this, while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the reserved patterns h1 to h8 are used under looser conditions (the number of special figure reserved balls reaches 7) than the normal 8 reserved effect. It is configured so that the button effect that has been used is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game even while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure variation.

As shown in FIG. 93, while the button effect (button effect A (operation target is the first frame button 22a)) is being executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of special figure pending balls (special figure 1 pending When the value obtained by adding the number of pending memories and the number of pending memories of special figure 2 pending) reaches 7 (see FIG. 93 (a)), instead of button effect A, super pending effect is executed (Fig. 95(a)). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the effect contents of the super suspension effect will be described. There is, and FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect result of the super hold effect.

This super pending effect is a pending effect executed by taking over the effect mode of the button effect A (see FIG. 9A) being executed, and as shown in FIG. A sleeping character 811 is displayed in the same manner as in the button effect A, and an effect is executed in which the operation means (the second frame button 22b) is hit repeatedly in order to wake up the character 811.例文帳に追加Suggestive modes 811a to 811d appear from the character 811 each time the second frame button 22b is pressed. The suggestion modes 811a to 811d are set based on the result of prefetching of the prize information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds in the same manner as the above-described normal eight reserved effects. It is a suggestive mode that suggests a suggestive display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Then, when the second frame button 22b is repeatedly hit and the character 811 stands up, as shown in FIG. It is displayed as a suggestive display mode showing the degree of expectation for the big hit of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. In this way, in the super pending effect, since the suggesting modes 811a to 811d are configured to be displayed for the normal eight pending effects described above, it is not possible to know which pending symbol corresponds to which suggesting mode. , the display mode (color) that can be displayed as the suggestive display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 can be notified in advance to the player.

Therefore, when information (for example, red) indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is displayed as a suggestive mode, the player is eagerly expecting that the suggested display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 will be displayed in red. The 2-frame button 22b can be operated. In this embodiment, all modes displayed as suggested modes 811a to 811d are configured so as not to shift to suggested display modes of reserved symbols h1 to h7. As a result, for example, even if a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is not selected as the suggestive display mode of the reserved symbols set based on the result of the look-ahead of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7, Since the display mode (red) in which the degree of expectation for a big win is simulated can be displayed as the suggestive mode 811, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to let the player know that the super pending effect has been executed by switching to the button effect A, the operation means (the first frame button 22a) to be operated for the button effect A and the super The operation means (the second frame button 22b) to be operated in the pending effect are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same operation means is operated in all button effects. can be configured to

In this way, when one button effect is being executed and another button effect (a button effect that is executed with priority (higher priority) than the button effect being executed) is executed, By constructing so as to execute overlapping (merged) performance (super suspension performance) that inherits the performance contents of the button performance being executed, the performance contents of the button performance are suddenly switched and the performance is difficult for the player to understand. can be suppressed.

Also, even if a button effect with a higher priority than the button effect being executed is realized with a different trigger (a trigger that is not realized at the start timing of the button effect being executed), the button with the higher priority Since the performance can be reliably executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96-99. The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the second embodiment, when setting the presence or absence of the execution of the holding effect using the reserved design and the effect mode of the holding effect, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment The difference is that a referenced pending effect selection table 223aa and a simultaneous effect enable/disable setting area 223ab referred to when determining whether or not to simultaneously execute respective effects given the same priority are added. ing. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the second embodiment, priority is given to various advance notice effect contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 223a. Thus, in the above-described first embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects to be executed are determined based on the priority given to each button effect. In the second embodiment, in addition to the button effect, various notice effects set based on the special figure fluctuation (for example, comment effects, mini character effects, etc.) It is configured such that priority is given to performances that are executed so as to be completed in a specific period (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

By configuring in this way, the button effect and the notice effect are executed in duplicate, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand (for example, when the effect of the button effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win is displayed). At approximately the same timing, a production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed as a result of the announcement production, or the same character that appears in the button production appears in the announcement production, and the character that appeared It is possible to further suppress the execution of an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether it is for the effect.

The reserved effect selection table 223aa is a data table referred to when setting whether or not to execute a reserved effect using a reserved symbol and the effect mode of the reserved effect. It is referred to in the special pending effect processing (see S4523 in FIG. 104) of the pending ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 103) executed when the command is received (S6309 in FIG. 104). Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the pending effect selection table 223aa will be described.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending effect selection table 223aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97, the pending effect selection table 223aa is included in the current number of pending balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) and winning information to be produced. Based on the success/failure determination information and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223v, an effect pattern to be executed (an effect mode of the pending effect) and a priority are defined.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "1 to 3" and the hit/fail judgment information indicates "hit", The acquired value of the second effect counter 223v is specified in the range of "0 to 39" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "40 to 99" , effect pattern “suspension A”, and priority “2” are defined. On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 94". Display)” is defined, and the effect pattern “Hold A” and priority “3” are defined in the range of “94 to 99”.

Next, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "4 to 5" and the hit/fail judgment information indicates "hit", the acquired The value of the second effect counter 223v is defined in the range of "0 to 59" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "60 to 84", the effect A pattern "hold B" and a priority "2" are defined, and an effect pattern "button hold A" and a priority "1" are defined in the range of "85 to 99". On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v within the range of "0 to 89" indicates "do not execute pending effect" ("-" in FIG. 97). Display)” is defined, the effect pattern “hold B” and priority “2” are defined in the range “90 to 94”, and the effect pattern “button hold A” is defined in the range “95 to 99”. , priority "3" is defined.

Finally, when the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of special 1 reserved balls and the number of special 2 reserved balls) is "6, 7" and the win/loss determination information indicates "hit", the acquired The value of the second effect counter 223v is defined in the range of "0 to 29" as "not executing the pending effect (indicated by "-" in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "30 to 69", the effect The pattern "hold C" and priority "1" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and priority "3" are defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, when the success/failure determination information indicates "off", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v within the range of "0 to 79" is set to "do not execute pending effect" ("-" in FIG. 97). Display)” is defined, the effect pattern “hold C” and priority “2” are defined in the range “80 to 97”, and the effect pattern “button hold A” is defined in the range “98 to 99”. , priority "1" is defined.

The simultaneous production permission/inhibition setting area 223ab is a storage area that is referred to when determining whether or not to simultaneously execute each production given the same priority, and a special operation ( When the effect switching operation) is performed, information indicating whether or not simultaneous effect execution is possible is stored. Here, if information indicating that the simultaneous effect is not executed is stored, it is stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab1 (see FIG. 99(a)) of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, which will be described later. Control is performed so that an effect referring to only the effect information that is present is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the second embodiment, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is replaced with the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. is provided, a production level storage area 223ae is provided, and a simultaneous production prohibition flag 223f is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is a storage area for temporarily storing effect information set in various processes of the sound lamp control device 113 according to assigned priority. Here, the contents of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 98(b) shows each memory defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is a schematic diagram which showed an area typically. Also, FIGS. 99(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams for explaining the flow of storing the set effect information.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is composed of a first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. . Each storage area (223ab to 223ad) has a storage area (area) capable of storing performance information of different priorities (priority 1 to priority 4) (see FIG. 98(b)). .

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is provided as a storage area for storing effect information for indicating effects set in each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the priority was configured to be able to store one performance information with a priority of "1", two performance information with a priority of "2", and one performance information with a priority of "3". The embodiment is different in that it is possible to store up to three pieces of performance information with priorities of "1" to "4".

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the flow of processing for storing effect information in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99(a) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, FIG. 99(b) shows the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99c) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ad of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. ing.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a total of 12 areas for storing set effect information (see FIGS. 99(a) to (c)). , at least four processes for setting performance information with priority (FIG. 99(d)). Then, the effects (effects with priority) set in each process shown in FIG. be.

The set effect information is stored (stored) in storage areas indicating corresponding priorities in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. That is, for example, when an effect with a priority level of "2" is set, first, it is determined whether or not effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect level storage area 223ab. , the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab. On the other hand, if the effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect level storage area 223ab, then it is checked whether effect information is stored in the priority level 2 area 223ac2 of the second effect level storage area 223ac. After that, the same processing is executed for the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad.

When the effect information is already stored in the storage area of the corresponding priority level of the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad (when the effect information is set exceeding the storable number), the effect set this time Configured to discard information. In addition, without being limited to this, the oldest effect information may be determined and the effect information to be discarded may be determined based on the determination result, or the effect may be stored in a storage area with a lower priority than the set priority. It may be configured to store information. In this case, for example, the priority of the set effect information may be changed to the priority corresponding to the stored storage area, or the original priority of the effect information stored in the different priority storage areas may be changed. may be temporarily stored, and when the storage area corresponding to the original priority becomes empty, the effect information may be stored in a predetermined storage area.

As shown in FIG. 99(d), in the second embodiment, as an effect that can be given priority, a special figure 1 variation button effect that can set the button effect based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery , Special figure 2 variation button effect, special figure variation display effect, holding change effect (various effects selected by holding effect selection table 222aa), and in each process, set The storage areas capable of storing the performance information are made different. Specifically, the effect information indicating the button effect set as the special figure 1 variable button effect is stored in the priority 1 area to the priority 3 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab1, and the special figure 2 Effect information indicating the button effect set as the variable button effect is an area that can store the priority 1 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab and the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac.

In addition, effect information indicating various advance notice effects set as display effects for special figure fluctuation can be stored in the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. Effect information indicating the pending effect (display effect, button effect) set as the effect for pending change is the priority 2 area to priority 4 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. The area becomes a memorizable area.

In this way, by varying the range of the storage area (storage area) in which the performance information indicating the performance is stored according to the setting trigger of various performances to which the priority is assigned, a predetermined regularity is provided. It is possible to execute a production.

The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is a flag for indicating a state in which the effects given with the same priority are not to be executed redundantly, and is a state in which the effects with the same priority are not to be executed redundantly. It is set to ON when This simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be arbitrarily changed by the player. ), the setting is variably set based on the contents of the player's operation on the operating means (S6605, S6606 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the effects with the same priority are executed in duplicate. Therefore, a player who wants to experience various effects sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae to OFF, and a player who wants to experience a simple effect sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae to ON. Since a desired effect is executed only by playing the game, a game suitable for the player can be easily provided.

In the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is used to enable selection of the execution mode of the effect from two types. , in the effect level storage area group 223aa, the effect level (effect level 1) at which the effect using only the effect information stored in the first effect level storage area 223ab is executed, and the first effect level storage area 223ab. , a performance level (performance level 2) at which a performance using only the performance information stored in the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac is executed, and stored in the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac and the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad. The effect level (effect level 4) at which the effect using the specified effect information is executed, and the priority 1 area and the priority 2 area among the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. A performance level (performance level 5) at which performance using stored performance information is executed, and a priority 3 area and a priority 4 area among the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad. A player may select an arbitrary performance level from among a plurality of performance levels, such as a performance level (performance level 6) at which performance is executed using performance information stored in the .

When configured in this manner, for example, when the performance level 6 is selected, it is possible to easily execute a performance that is normally difficult to be executed by a performance with a high priority, so that a performance different from the usual is played. It can be easily provided to a person, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is divided into a plurality of storage areas (first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad) and priority levels 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect based on the above-described effect level simply by limiting the range of the storage area to be read when executing the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the content of restrictions on the effect to be executed, when setting the effect, the same processing (processing for setting the effect mode) is configured to be executed, and after setting the effect mode , Even if the range (performance level) of the performance to be executed by the player is variably set, the performance corresponding to the performance range (performance level) after the variable setting can be executed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that when setting the performance mode of various performances, the range of performance to be executed (performance level) is discriminated, and whether or not to set the performance mode is determined based on the determination result. This makes it possible to reduce the processing for setting the effect mode.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a special effect mode is set as a high-priority effect (for example, a priority level 1 effect), a low-priority effect related to the special effect mode When a performance (for example, a special related performance with a priority of 4) is set in a storage area, the special related performance is executed with priority over performances stored in other priority 1 to 3 areas. configured so that it can be

In this way, an effect with a low execution frequency (a low-priority effect) can be executed in association with a high-priority effect, thereby providing the player with an effect that is difficult to execute independently , can enhance the performance effect. Further, by correcting the execution timing of the special-related performance with a low priority before the execution timing of the special-related performance with a high priority, when the special-related performance is executed, the special performance is executed after this. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In this case, as the setting (execution) condition of the special effect, a low-priority effect is executed for the player by stipulating a condition that is satisfied when (or will) win a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols. It is possible to enhance the performance effect at the time of

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 109, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. In the second embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the RAM initial value setting process (see S4010 in FIG. 57) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 57) of the audio ramp control device 113, Button effect initial setting processing (see S4012 in FIG. 100) is added and executed, and instead of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 60), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252 in FIG. 101 See) is replaced with the special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61), and the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (see S4254 in FIG. 102) is replaced with the number of pending balls process (see S4208 in FIG. 63) 63) is replaced with variable display setting processing (see S4112 in FIG. 67), and variable display setting processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 105) is replaced with button pressing processing (see S4112 in FIG. 67). 76), button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108) is executed. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the content of the button effect initial setting process (S4012) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of the button effect initialization process (S4012). In the second embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an operating means (effect setting switch) at a position (for example, the back of the pachinko machine 10) that can be operated by the hall clerk but not by the player. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the effect setting switch is turned on, setting information indicating prohibition of simultaneous effect is stored in the simultaneous effect permission/inhibition setting area 222aa. Then, in this button effect initial setting process (S4012), when the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the simultaneous effect is executed based on the setting information stored in the simultaneous effect permission/inhibition setting area 222aa. is executed.

Specifically, when the button effect initial setting process (S4012) is executed, the setting information of the simultaneous effect enable/disable setting area 222aa is read (S4031), and if the read setting information is the setting information indicating simultaneous effect prohibition, The simultaneous effect prohibition flag is set to ON, and if the setting information does not prohibit the simultaneous effect, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag is set to OFF (S4032). By configuring in this way, the initial setting state regarding the simultaneous effect in the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hall staff is configured to be able to operate the effect setting switch provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, A performance setting switch is arranged at a position (for example, inside a sealed base case) where hall staff cannot operate it, and setting is made without varying whether or not simultaneous performance is executed for each type of pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加may be configured. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the same performance mode and having different special symbol jackpot probabilities and jackpot types (so-called pachinko machines 10 with different specs) can perform a large number of performances. The pachinko machine 10 desired to be executed (for example, the pachinko machine 10 with a low jackpot probability) is set to enable execution of the simultaneous performance, and the pachinko machine 10 that is not desired to execute many performances (for example, the jackpot probability is high). In the pachinko machine 10) that is set, it is preferable to set the simultaneous effect to be unexecutable.

By configuring in this way, without changing the contents of processing for setting various effects of the sound lamp control device 113, the amount of effects executed according to the length of the special symbol jackpot interval on the design value can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted to Further, by operating the effect setting switch, it is possible to set not only the presence or absence of execution of the simultaneous effect, but also the range to be read when various effects are executed out of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to easily adjust the amount of performance to be executed according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbols on the designed value.

In addition, as described above, when the effect setting switch is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and the effect amount executed by the pachinko machine 10 is limited, the operation of selecting the effect amount by the player, which will be described later, is performed. (See FIG. 109) may be constructed so as to be executed within the limited effect amount.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 101 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (Figure 4252). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) is different from the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). ), the effect modes to which priority is given are stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, but the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) is executed, first, the same S4301 to S4302 processing as the above-described special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is performed, then variation By referring to the pattern selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (notice effect, etc.) is selected (S4321). Here, in the process of S4321, the information indicating the result of the judgment contained in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (the value is periodically updated). Based on the value of random number), various effects (details of advance notice effect, presence/absence of button effect), execution timing, and priority are set.

After the processing of S4321 is finished, among the effect modes selected this time, the effect mode with priority (notice effect, etc.) is extracted (S4322), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is transferred to the corresponding mode. The priority level 2 area to priority level 4 area are set (stored) in the effect layer storage areas (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) (S4323). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the process of S4322 is the display effect for the special figure variation (see FIG. 99(d)), the effect information is stored within the storage range as shown in FIG. are the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4323 is finished, the same processing of S4304 to S4306 as the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S4254) will be described. Figure 102 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S4254) is different from the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61). etc.), the difference is that the process for storing the effect mode to which the priority is given in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S4254) is executed, first, the same S4351 to S4352 processes as the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) are executed, and then the fluctuation pattern By referring to the selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (announcement effect, etc.) is selected (S4371). Here, in the process of S4371, the information indicating the result of the determination, the information indicating the fluctuation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (the value is periodically updated) included in the received variation pattern command. Based on the value of random number), various effects (details of advance notice effect, presence/absence of button effect), execution timing, and priority are set.

When the process of S4371 is finished, the effect mode (notice effect, etc.) with priority is extracted from the effect mode selected this time (S4372). Priority level 2 area to priority level 4 area are set (stored) in the effect layer storage area (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) (S4373). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the process of S4372 is the display effect for the special figure variation (see FIG. 99(d)), the effect information is stored within the storage range as shown in FIG. are the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4373 is finished, the same processing of S4354 to S4356 as the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 61) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the pending ball count process 2 (S4258) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count process 2 (S4258). This pending ball number processing 2 (S4258) is different from the above-described pending ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. The difference is that the process of selecting the pending effect is executed when the upper limit value is not reached. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the reserved ball count process 2 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4501 to S4504 as the above-described reserved ball number process (see S4208 in FIG. 63) are executed. Here, in the processing of S4503, if it is determined that the number of pending balls (the number of special pending balls) is not the upper limit value (8) (S4503: No), special pending effect processing is executed (S4523), and S4507 , and terminate this process. Details of the special holding effect processing executed in S4523 will be described later with reference to FIG. A holding effect selection process in the case is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the pending effect in the processing of S4504 (S4504: Yes), then the effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending effect is set using the pending effect selection table 223aa (S4521) and set. Information (effect information) indicating the effect mode of the pending effect is set (stored) in the corresponding storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 222aa (S4522), the process proceeds to S4507, and this process ends.

Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the effect mode set in the process of S4521 is the effect for change to hold (see FIG. 99(d)), as shown in FIG. 99(d), the effect information is the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the special hold effect processing (S4523) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special holding effect processing (S4523). This special pending effect process (S4523) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the number of pending balls is not the upper limit (8) in the number of pending balls process 2 (S4258 in FIG. 103). This is a process for setting a pending effect. That is, it is a process for setting the pending effect when the number of special figure pending balls is not the upper limit value.

When the special holding effect processing (Fig. 4523) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect is being executed (S6301), and if it is determined that it is being executed (S6301: Yes), then , It is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect being executed is the button effect stored in the priority 1 area (S6302). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is priority 1 (S6302: Yes), it is not possible to execute a new pending effect during that period, so this process ends as it is do.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is not priority 1 (S6302: No), (S6303), and if it is determined to be "7" (S6303: Yes), the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab It is determined whether the effect information is already stored (S6304), and if it is determined that the effect information is not stored (S6304: No), the information (effect information) indicating the special pending effect (super pending effect) is It is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S6304, if it is determined that the effect information is already stored in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab (S6304: Yes), the effect information to be preferentially executed is set. Since it is in the state of being held, this process is terminated without executing this suspension effect (super suspension effect). Also, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect is not being executed in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), or if it is determined that the number of pending balls is not 7 in the process of S6303 (S6303: No) , S6306, and selects (determines) whether or not to execute a pending effect and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the pending effect based on the pending effect selection table 223aa.

Then, as a result of the process of S6306, when the pending effect is selected (S6307), the information (effect information) indicating the determined pending effect is set in the corresponding storage area in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6308). ), the process ends. Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the pending effect set (determined) in the process of S6306 is the effect for the pending change (see FIG. 99(d)), as shown in FIG. 99(d), The storage range of the performance information is the priority 2 area to priority 4 area of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third performance hierarchy storage area 223ad.

As described above, in the second embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence and content of various effects set at other opportunities, various effects are set at each trigger, and selection ( Various effects set) are set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and among a plurality of effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, only effects that satisfy execution conditions are displayed. configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute determination processing when setting various effects (processing for determining the setting state of effects at another opportunity), so the processing load can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). This variable display setting process 2 (S4162) is, for the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), an effect for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation The difference is that mode setting processing (S5321 (S5322)) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 106, the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S5321) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process (S5321). This production mode setting process (S5321) is, in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 105), when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S5301: Yes), When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S5306: Yes), it corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation A process that is executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance to be performed, and at the timing of starting the variation of each special figure, the performance that satisfies the execution condition among the various performance information stored in the performance hierarchy storage area group 223aa. This is a process for setting an effect mode based on information (high-priority effect information).

When the effect mode setting process (S5321) is executed, first, the effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is read (S6401), and the related effect setting process is executed (S6402). Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the related effect setting process (S6402) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the contents of the related effect setting process (S6402). In this related effect setting process (S6402), the effect information of low priority (priority 1 to 4) to be executed in association with the effect information set to high priority (priority 1) is determined. and a process for determining non-priority effect information to be discarded in association with effect information set to high priority (priority 1).

When the related effect setting process (S6402) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is effect information indicating a specific effect having a related effect in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. Determine (S6501). In other words, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed with the highest priority is a specific effect that defines a related effect (other effects to be executed in association, or other effects to be discarded in association). In the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the effect information indicating the specific effect is not stored (S6501: No), since there is no need to perform the processing related to the related effect, this process is terminated as it is, and the effect mode setting process ( Return to S5321) in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the effect information indicating the specific effect is stored (S6501: Yes), then the effect information associated with the specific effect is stored in any of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (S6502), and if it is determined that it is not stored (S6503: No), there is no need to perform processing related to related effects. Return to the mode setting process (S5321 in FIG. 106).

In the processing of S6502, if it is determined that the effect information associated with the specific effect is stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6502: Yes), then the related effect is associated It is determined whether it is a tied effect executed by (S6503), and if it is determined that it is a tied effect (S6503: Yes), the execution timing of the tied effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap. (S6504).

Here, if it is determined that the execution timing of the tied effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap (S6504: Yes), the execution timing of the tied effect is different from the already stored execution timing. As a process for correcting to a different execution timing, the execution timing of the tied effect is rewritten (5 seconds before) the execution timing of the specific effect (S6505), and the priority of the tied effect is set to 1.5. (S6506), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6504, if it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect do not overlap (S6504), since there is no need to correct the execution timing of each effect, Skip the process and end this process.

In other words, if the performance information corresponding to the linked performance is stored among the related performances stipulated in the specific performance, the execution timing of the linked performance included in the performance information is set to the execution timing of the specific performance. Prior to the timing (timing to the extent that the specific effect is executed after the end of the tied effect), the priority included in the effect information corresponding to the tied effect is set to the specific effect A process of rewriting and setting to a special priority (1.5 in this embodiment), which is the next highest priority, is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a low-priority production (linked production) independently with a high-priority specific production, so that only high-priority production is executed, It is possible to solve the problem of getting bored with the game early. Furthermore, by correcting the execution timing so that the tied performance with a low priority is executed before the specific performance, when the tied performance is executed, the specific performance is executed after this. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and to enjoy playing the game while predicting the content of the performance to be executed in the future.

In addition, for a player who has experience of executing a low-priority tie effect alone, by grasping that the execution timing of the tie effect is different from before, the execution timing of the tie effect is corrected. Since it is possible to determine in advance that the player is in the game, a sense of superiority can be given to the player who has been playing for a long time. In order to make this effect stronger, it is preferable to execute the correction process so that the execution timing after being corrected by the process of S6505 becomes an execution timing that cannot be set when executed alone. Also, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the execution timing has been corrected.

In the present embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect after the end of the tied effect, the process of correcting the execution timing of the tied effect is executed. The timing may be corrected (delayed), or a specific performance may be executed after the end of the tied performance by performing correction for shortening the performance period of the tied performance. Also, it is sufficient that the tied effect is executed before the specific effect is executed, and the execution timing and the effect period may be corrected so that the specific effect is executed during the execution of the tied effect.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description continues. In the processing of S6503, when it is determined that there is no tied effect (S6503: No), that is, it is determined that the related effect stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is not a tied effect. Then, it is determined whether the related effect is an exclusion effect (S6507), and if it is determined that it is an exclusion effect (S6507: Yes), the effect information corresponding to the exclusion effect is stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group. 223aa is cleared (discarded) from the storage area, and this processing ends. In the process of S6507, when it is determined that the effect is not the elimination effect (S6507: No), the process of S6508 is skipped and the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different triggers (the trigger for setting the variable effect of the special figure 1, the trigger for setting the variable effect for the special figure 2, the trigger for setting the pending effect when the number of pending balls is variable), namely Since various effects (button effects, display effects) are set at different timings, the execution timings of the various effects set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are variously set according to the establishment timing of each opportunity. By discriminating the performance mode, priority, and execution timing of various performances set irregularly in this manner and determining the performance to be actually executed, the performance setting processing at each opportunity can be simplified.

In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode (execution timing of each effect) that is executed only when the timing at which specific effects are executed coincidentally overlaps, separate and independent setting triggers can be used in a composite manner. It is possible to execute the production that was used. Therefore, it is possible to execute various patterns of effects that cannot be easily predicted by the player, and to enhance the effect of the effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, a combination of effects that are not desired to be executed during one variable effect is defined in advance, and when one effect is executed, the other effect is excluded. Since it is configured to execute processing, it is possible to suppress the execution of a combination of effects that gives the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description continues. After the processing of S6402 is completed, it is next determined whether the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S6403: No), the effect hierarchy storage area If the processing of S6404 to S6406 for setting the effect mode is executed for the effect information stored in all the storage areas of the group 223aa, and it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403: Yes), out of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223a, the processing of S6407 and S6408 for setting the effect mode is executed only for the effect information stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and S6409 to process.

Here, in the processing of S6404, the effect execution period of each effect is determined from each effect information set (stored) in the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad. (S6404), the storage areas in which the performance information is set to the priority 1 area are specified in the order of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ad, and the performance An effect mode corresponding to the effect information of each priority 1 area is set so that the execution periods do not overlap (S6405).

That is, in the present embodiment, priority is also defined for a plurality of storage areas, and priority is given in the order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. is stipulated. Therefore, when performance information with overlapping execution periods is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first performance hierarchy storage area 223ab and the priority 1 area 233ac1 of the second performance hierarchy storage area 223ac, , an effect mode corresponding to the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is set.

On the other hand, when the performance information set (stored) in the priority 1 area of each storage area defines a different execution period, a performance mode corresponding to all the performance information is set. Thereby, in the variation performance corresponding to one special figure variation, first, only the performance mode with the highest priority is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with an effect that should be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, priority is defined in order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When setting, the priority may be configured to be set at random. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presentation mode to be preferentially executed, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

When the processing of S6405 is finished, next, the effect information to be executed is selected from the stored effect information in the order of the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area so that the effect execution period does not overlap, and the selected effect information (S6406). It should be noted that, at this time point, the tying effect set in the process of S6402 is set prior to other effect information. Also, the effect information excluded (cleared) in the process of S6402 is excluded from the selection targets. Then, a display command indicating a variable effect corresponding to each effect mode set in the processes of S6405 and S6406 is set (S6409), and this process ends.

Next, in the process of S6407, the effect execution period included in the information set in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is extracted (S6407), and the effect information in which the effect execution period does not overlap is selected in descending order of priority. , the effect mode corresponding to the selected effect information is set (S6408), the process proceeds to the process of S6409 described above, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853). This button pressing process 2 (S5853) is configured such that effect level selection processing (S6221) is added to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) of the first embodiment described above and executed. different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the button pressing process 2 (S5853) is executed, first, the effect level selection process (S6221) is performed, and then the same processes of S6201 to S6209 as the above-described button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) are performed. and terminate this process. Here, the contents of the effect level selection process executed in the process of S6221 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect level selection process (S6221). In this effect level selection process (S6221), a process is executed for the player to select the amount (level) of effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set (store) effect information indicating various effects in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and to what extent of the set (stored) effect information is set (stored) the effect information. It is configured so that the player can select whether to use it to determine the effect to be actually executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, by executing a plurality of effects at various timings (including overlapping), a player who prefers lively effects can set (store) in more storage areas. ) is used as a target for determining the effect to be executed, and a player who prefers a simple effect to be executed executes the effect information set (stored) in a small storage area. It can be used as a target when determining the effect, and the amount of effect desired by each player can be executed.

When the production level selection process (S6221) is executed, first, the current is in the demo screen (a state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed and the standby condition (for example, the state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed continues for 3 seconds or more (S6601), and if it is determined that the demo screen is displayed (S6601: Yes), next, whether the first frame button 22a is ON. (Whether it is pressed) is determined (S6602).

In the process of S6602, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a is on (S6602: Yes), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22b is on (depressed) (S6603). When it is determined that it is (S6603: Yes), it is determined whether the current simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6604). In the process of S6604, when it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6604: Yes), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to OFF (S6605), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S6604: No), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6606), and this processing is executed. finish.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the predetermined state (in the demo screen), a special operation (an operation of simultaneously pressing the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is executed on the operating means. By doing so, the setting of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be switched. This allows the player to easily set a desired level (amount) of effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the setting status of the current simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, that is, the effect amount to be executed is displayed in an area where the player can easily visually recognize such as the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Effect level information for indicating (effect level) is displayed. As a result, the player can variably set the effect level based on the amount and content of the effect actually executed and the displayed effect level information. In addition, as a display mode displayed on the demonstration screen, a method for variably setting the effect level is displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the information of various effects to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set with various setting triggers, and the sound lamp A display command corresponding to the effect to be actually executed is displayed based on the information stored in the storage means (effect level storage area group 223aa) of the control device 113, and based on the information stored in the storage means at the execution timing of each effect. Although a configuration for outputting to the control device 114 is used, without being limited to this, a command indicating information of various effects set at various setting opportunities is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 The storage means (storage means corresponding to the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa) possessed by the side is stored, and the effect to be executed in accordance with the execution timing of the effect is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. Also good.

Further, in this case, information indicating the content of the execution effect set on the display control device 114 side is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the information received from the display control device 114 It is preferable to configure so as to set a new effect. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a new effect according to the situation of the effect that is actually being executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is shown in which the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as operation means that can be operated by the player. A touch sensor whose detection range is set at a position facing the display screen of the display device 81 (position in front of the display screen) may be used. The touch sensor is a non-contact type detection means, and is an operation means for determining that an operation has been performed by detecting that the player's hand has entered the detection range.

When such a touch sensor is used, the detection range of the touch sensor is provided at a position facing the display screen. By displaying a comment and a character and setting the display position of the character to a position that overlaps the detection range of the touch sensor, the player can actively operate the operation means (touch sensor). .

Furthermore, when the game machine provided with the touch sensor described above is provided with a decorative variable member that can be changed to a position that covers the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, that is, at least a predetermined first position (initial position ) and a second position (operating position). , the decorative variable member moved to the second position enters the detection range of the touch sensor, and the button effect using the first frame button 22a (the decorative variable member There is a problem that the button effect using the touch sensor cannot be executed during the execution of the effect to cause the button to be activated.

In such a case, it is preferable to rewrite part of the information of the effect content of each button effect that is set redundantly so as to execute the duplicate button effect. Specifically, at the timing of executing each button effect, the position of the decorative variable member and the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are determined, and based on the determination result, It is preferable to rewrite the operation means to be operated and the information indicating the operation contents of the operation means among the effects modes of the predetermined button effects. As a result, the button effects can be overlapped and executed without changing the display mode of the button effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect mode (effect content, execution timing, execution period, priority, etc.) of each effect is set independently at each setting trigger, and the effect based on the information indicating the set effect mode However, it is preferable to perform the execution timing correction process for correcting the execution timing of the performance mode independently set at each setting opportunity, and then execute the execution timing correction process. By configuring in this way, for example, when button effects are set in a plurality of setting triggers and the plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation effective period set corresponding to each button effect is 0. If there is a 0.1 second deviation, the 0.1 second deviation can be corrected, and at the same time, an effect can be executed in which the operation effective period is set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. Further, instead of correcting the effect mode of each effect actually set, only the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is corrected, and for example, the operation effective period is notified to the player. The timing of displaying the display mode (gauge 817a) for the purpose may be synchronized.

In addition, in the case where the effect mode of the button effect is to variably operate the above-described decorative variable member, before the button effect is executed, the decorative variable member is positioned in advance at the initial position. It is necessary to execute processing (preparation processing) and processing (origin confirmation processing) for determining whether or not the decorative variable member is positioned at the initial position. Also, if the button effect is switched to another button effect (higher priority button effect) while the decorative variable member is in a variable state (positioned at the operating position), the player may In addition, if the variable member for decoration is located at a position covering the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it interferes with other performances, and the whole pachinko machine 10. There is a possibility that the directing effect as is remarkably deteriorated.

Therefore, a high priority (priority 1) is set for the button effect in which the effect mode of varying the decorative variable member is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is remarkably lowered due to the execution of another button performance. In addition, without being limited to the above-described configuration, only various effects for moving the decorative variable member are stored in separate storage areas (variable effect storage areas) having a plurality of different priorities, and are stored in the variable effect storage areas. It is also possible to preferentially discriminate the existing effect information and determine whether or not to execute various effects stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa based on the result of the determination. As a result, the variable performance for varying the decorative variable member can be executed with priority over other performances, and the execution priority can be given among the variable performances.

In addition, in the above-described first and second embodiments, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the player is informed of the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation means is operated within the operation effective period. In addition to this, a special button effect executed based on the player's operation of the operating means may be provided. Specifically, when the operation means is operated during a part of the period during which the button effect is not executed without informing the player of the operation valid period, the display screen of the 3 symbol display device 81 A special button effect may be provided in which an effect (lively effect) is executed to change the various effect modes being executed.

In this case, a special timer other than the button valid timer set based on the execution of the above-mentioned button effect is provided, and it is determined that the predetermined button operation is executed while the predetermined period is set by the special timer. In this case, the special button effect may be executed, or the special button effect may be duplicated for each button effect. As described above, since the special button effect does not notify the player of the operation effective period, even if it is executed in duplicate with other button effects, the overlapping effect will not give the player a sense of incongruity. can be executed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 124. FIG. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of game state set according to the special symbol lottery result, the configuration of the main controller 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

In the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are simultaneously (parallel ) was configured to run. On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, the difference is that the special figure 2 lottery is preferentially executed with respect to the special figure 1 lottery.

Then, in the third embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable state (until the next jackpot is won) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win. and time-saving state (until the special figure variation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won) is set.

That is, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next big hit is won, so the variable probability state is set. And the possibility of being able to win many prize balls was remarkably increased. Here, the recent pachinko machine 10 is configured to continue the variable probability state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning many prize balls, the gambling property of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, measures to reduce the probability that the probability variable state continues (for example, the rate of the probability variable state continuing to 65% or less) are being considered.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not make the player have excessive expectations for prize balls. Among the performances used in the pachinko machine 10 that continue with a probability (for example, 80%) (performance for showing the lottery result of special symbols), the performance effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is lowered.

Specifically, during the jackpot game, if your character battles with the enemy character and wins the battle, in the battle production that notifies that the variable probability state is set after the end of this jackpot game. , If the rate at which the probability variable state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle production executed during the jackpot game will decrease, and the player's expectation when the battle production is executed (the probability variable state is set There is a problem that the sense of anticipation for the game is weakened and the desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, a continuous battle effect that continues the battle effect until a predetermined end condition (for example, special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times) is established after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot is won during a period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined termination condition, the performance of winning the battle is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle presentation, and to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot (a jackpot in which a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a battle production is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot A continuous battle effect is executed only when winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the game. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, it is configured so that the production result of the continuous battle will be different according to the type of the winning jackpot. It is constructed so as to execute the battle rematch production when winning the time-saving jackpot during the continuous battle production. As a result, execution of a defeat performance in which the player loses the battle is suppressed when the time-saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the defeat effect is executed after the battle effect is executed, so that the proportion of battle wins can be relatively increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is positioned below the game area with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that instead of the ball entry unit 64, a first ball entry port 164 is arranged. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 164 by a left-handed game is performed, and a special figure 1 lottery is performed. A game aiming for a big win is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won and the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state, a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game is performed.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111 to FIG. 114, the characteristic performance contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects executed during the special figure variation after the jackpot game is finished. As shown in FIG. 111, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, a battle effect (probability-variable suggestion effect) for suggesting to the player the game state after the jackpot game ends is executed, and according to the type of the jackpot , the execution period of the battle performance is made different to increase the performance success rate (battle winning rate) in the battle performance, and to increase the expectations of the players for the battle performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(a), if the probability variable jackpot is won, the battle is performed during the jackpot game (see FIG. 111(A)) to win the battle. (See FIG. 111(B)) is executed. Here, the contents of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the battle effect is executed, and FIG. 112(b) is a display displayed when the battle is won in the battle effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the content. Note that FIGS. 112A and 112B are schematic diagrams showing display examples executed during the time saving state, so the display modes of the small regions Dm1 and Dm2 show the time saving state. 112(a) and (b), the mode of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm is the same as the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. Further, among the elements of the display screen shown in FIG. 112(a), the elements that are the same as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the battle effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a battle effect is executed between a friendly character 817 imitating a hero and an enemy character 818 imitating a monster. Then, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 and the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 are displayed, and an effect is executed in which the character whose physical strength gauge reaches 0 first loses.

On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a victory notification mode Dm7, a rematch notification mode Dm8, and a defeat notification mode Dm9 are displayed as result notification modes for reporting the result of the battle effect. These notification modes Dm7 to Dm9 are all displayed as shown in FIG. is configured such that the corresponding notification mode is hidden. Thereby, the player can predict the effect result of the battle effect before the effect result of the battle effect (victory of the battle) is notified.

In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a prize ball display area Dm5 in which prize ball number information for indicating the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game is displayed, and a value of "1000" is displayed. ing. Further, a round number display area Dm6 for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is formed on the right side thereof, and a value of "8" is displayed. In addition, as described above, FIG. 112(a) shows the display contents of the battle production (continuous battle production) during the time saving state, and therefore, the game state in which the jackpot game is actually finished.

In such a game state, by displaying the prize ball display area Dm5 and the number of rounds display area Dm6, it is possible to inform the player that the player is currently playing a jackpot game (for example, during the interval period between round games or during the ending period). The player can be made to think that the battle effect being executed is the effect being executed during the jackpot game. In addition, in FIG. 112(a), the small areas Dm1 and Dm2 are displayed large in order to explain the current game state in an easy-to-understand manner. It is displayed in a size that is difficult to identify.

At the time of FIG. 111(B), the effect of winning the battle shown in FIG. 112(b) is executed. In FIG. 112(b), the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 becomes 0, an effect that the character 818 is defeated is displayed, and only the victory notification mode Dm7 is displayed. By executing this battle victory effect, the player is notified that a variable probability state is set as the game state.

Returning to FIG. 111, the description continues. After winning the battle, the production in the variable probability state is executed, and if the jackpot is won again during the variable probability state (short-time jackpot), the battle production (continuous battle production) is executed until 30 times the short-time after the jackpot game ends. (See FIG. 112(a)). Then, when the special figure variation is executed 30 times after the time-saving state is set, the production of losing the battle (defeat production) is executed (see FIG. 111(C)). Here, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the contents of the effect when the player is defeated in the battle effect will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the battle is defeated.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 becomes 0, an effect that the character 817 is defeated is displayed, and only the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By executing this battle defeat effect, it is notified that the time saving state is set as the game state. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, of the 100 time reductions set as the time reduction state at the time the battle defeat production is executed, since 30 times have passed, after FIG. 113 (a) is displayed , as a display during the time saving state (see FIG. 111 (D)), as shown in FIG. value is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period from when the time saving state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, since it is configured to execute the battle production, the probability that the victory production is executed in the battle production can be increased (increased by the probability of winning a certain variable jackpot within 30 times of the time saving state), and the number of time saving times executed after the defeat effect is executed in the battle effect can be reduced, so the special pattern is low. It is possible to shorten the period of the time-saving game performed in the state that the probability state is set, and to suppress the player's willingness to play.

Returning to FIG. 111, the description continues. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), during the continuous battle production (in the special drawing lottery of the 25th turn after the time saving state is set), if you win the probability variable jackpot, the battle wins during the probability variable jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 112(b)). As a result, internally, after moving to a time-saving state once (in the past, after the defeat effect was executed in the battle effect), the battle Only the victory presentation can be executed without executing the defeat presentation of the presentation. Therefore, it is possible to relatively increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), since it shows an example of winning a small number of rounds as a probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot (2R)), the effect result of the continuous battle production is displayed during the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in the case of winning a definite variable jackpot with a large number of rounds (16R), if it is determined that the 16 round definite variable jackpot is won by the result of the look-ahead, It may be configured such that the victory presentation of the continuation battle presentation and the jackpot presentation are executed, and then the victory presentation is executed again in the battle presentation executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, the interval period set after the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game is completed is set longer than other interval periods (for example, 1 minute), and the effect result of the continuous battle effect is displayed by the 8th round of the first half. After that, in the interval period of the 8th round, a performance result indicating that a jackpot is won is displayed in a pseudo performance of pseudo-executing a special figure variation, and the jackpot game is played using the latter 8 rounds. may be configured to execute the battle production. By configuring in this way, more winning effects can be executed.

In this case, the interval period after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game may be configured to vary according to the game state. In the non-working state), an interval period of the same length as the other interval periods is set, and only in the state in which the time saving state is set, a long interval period is preferably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an unnecessarily long interval period is set in the 16-round probability variable jackpot won during the probability variable state and the game efficiency is lowered.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, only the 16-round probability variable jackpot won within 30 special figure fluctuations after the time-saving state is set is preferably configured so that a long interval period is set. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when winning the time-saving jackpot (2R) during the continuous battle production (20th special figure fluctuation after the time-saving state is set), the rematch production as the production result of the continuous battle production is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 113(b), the content of the rematch presentation will be described. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the effect result of the battle effect is a rematch. As shown in FIG. 113(b), the character 817 is displayed in a fighting posture once more, and a "one more game" command 816 indicating that the battle effect will be executed again is displayed with the physical strength gauge 817a remaining. and the rematch notification mode Dm8 is displayed. In this case, the small display area Dm2 displays the display mode of "222" indicating that the jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the above-described continuous battle production, when the special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, the defeat production is configured to be executed, so during the continuous battle production , an effect is executed in which the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 decreases according to the number of executions of the special figure variation. Then, when the time reduction number of times of 30, which is the end condition of the continuous battle effect, approaches, the display contents shown in FIG. 114(a) are displayed. FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of time reductions reaches the 30th time during continuous battle production.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), during the continuous battle production, the physical strength gauge 817a decreases according to the number of special figure fluctuations executed, suggesting defeat of the battle (in FIG. 114 (a), shaking mode), the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By configuring in this way, the 30th time-saving variation can be executed in a state in which the physical strength gauge 817a is low, so that the player can execute the defeat performance of the battle without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the continuous battle production (battle production performed during the time saving state), the number of times of time saving is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 30 times). Although the case is set as the end condition, it may be configured to variably set the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is established by the effect lottery means without being limited to this. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle performance is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle performance.

In addition, as a guaranteed period notification effect for notifying the player of a period in which the continuous battle effect will not end (battle effect guaranteed period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, the character 817 does not lose. It is also possible to construct an effect indicating the invincible mode so that it can be executed, and to notify the period during which the invincible mode continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set the end condition of the continuous battle production based on the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win a small win that can give the player a privilege less than the big win game (a privilege different from the big win game), based on the small win winning (executing the small winning game During), it is preferable to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as a small winning game to be executed when winning a small winning, it is preferable to execute a small winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big winning game is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is being opened, so that the player can experience the defeat effect as if during the jackpot game. I can make you think.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle production is terminated based on the condition that is established first, whether the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or the small winning is won. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle effect indefinite.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are changed.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPI 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, the ROM 202 of the third embodiment replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and replaces the first winning random number table 202a with the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the table 202d, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 203ba. As shown in FIG. 116, the first winning random number 3 table 203ba is the same except for the values defined for the above-described first winning random number table 203a. Specifically, when the gaming state is low probability (low probability state of special symbols), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as a big hit in the range of "0, 1", and the gaming state is In the case of high accuracy (high probability state of special symbols), the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is specified in the range of "2 to 11".

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb will be described. Figure 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb, Figure 117 (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb has It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the selection table 202bb1, and FIG. 117(c) shows the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb has. It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is a special figure 1 jackpot type for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202bb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern (special figure 2), and the jackpot is selected. It is configured so that different jackpot types are selected according to the types of special symbols that have been won.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202bb1 is, as shown in FIG. Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A", "50 to 64", "jackpot B", and "65 to 99" A "jackpot C" is defined.

Here, the jackpot type "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type “jackpot B” is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to “10000”. ” is the jackpot type that is set. The jackpot type "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "100". ” is the jackpot type that is set.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends with a probability of 65%, and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35%. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle performance executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is 65% at the maximum.

The special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 is, as shown in FIG. Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot D", "25 to 34", "jackpot E", and "35 to 64" A "jackpot F" is defined, a "jackpot G" is defined in the range of "65 to 89", and a "jackpot H" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the jackpot type "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which two rounds of the jackpot game are executed and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "jackpot E" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-described "jackpot A", and the "jackpot F" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-described "jackpot B".

"Jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which 2 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the variable probability flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "100". It is a jackpot type to be set, and "jackpot H" is the same jackpot type as the above-described "jackpot C".

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the probability is 65%, which is the same as when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1. The time saving state is set with . Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle performance executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is 65% at the maximum.

In addition, the ratio (30%) of selecting the "jackpot F", which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, is the "jackpot B" (jackpot type with the same contents as the "jackpot F") in the special figure 1. It is set higher than the ratio (15%) Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 203 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM203 in the third embodiment differs from the RAM203 in the first embodiment described above in that a probability variation flag 203ba is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. This probability variation flag 203ba is a big hit ("jackets A, B, D, E, F"), it is set to ON, and it is set to OFF when a big win is won and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the big win (when a big win game is started).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, this embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a battle in-progress flag 223ca is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The in-battle flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that a battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed, and is set to ON when the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed. . This in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON when a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot won in a state where the battle effect is not being executed is started (see S6704 in FIG. 128), and the sound lamp control device 113 When setting various effects in , it is referenced to determine whether the current battle effect is in progress. Then, in the battle production update process (see S4651 in FIG. 126) of the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125), the condition for ending the battle production is satisfied (the number of remaining time reductions reaches 70 times (special in the time reduction state When the figure fluctuation count reaches 30), it is set to OFF (see S6657 in FIG. 126).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124, the details of the control process executed by main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are not executed at the same time (in parallel), The control process of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment is greatly different in that the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 is preferentially executed. Other contents are the same. Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the content of the control processing related to the above-described differences will be described, and the description of the other content will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S131) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is being changed, the special figure 1, and the process of updating the game state (updating the value of the counter 223h during time saving) is performed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. It is different in that it is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol instead of the timing.

First, with reference to FIG. 120, special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 3, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting a big hit (S251). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S251: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S252: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (The number N2 of holding the variable display in the second special symbol) is acquired (S253). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S254), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e must be 0. If (S254: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S255), and the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation A command is set (S256). The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2401) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 58), It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223d.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S256, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S257). In the process of S257, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S257 is executed, the second special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S258), and this process ends. The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S254, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S254: No), then the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S259). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S259: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S259, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S259: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S260), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S261). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S261, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S262). In the process of S262, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the first special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S263). The first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed is determined (S264). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S264: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S264, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S264: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). The stop symbols are set in advance by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) and the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) which will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) is executed, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common with 203b, a special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S266 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). Then, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the second special symbol variation start processing 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start processing 3 (S263) It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S267). If the current lottery result is a special pattern jackpot (S267: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set, the variable probability flag 203ba is set to OFF, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S268), and a jackpot middle flag is set. 203m is set to ON (S269). Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S267, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S267: No), game state update process 3 (S271) is executed. The game state update process 3 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258). This second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a second special symbol reserved ball. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 81 .

In the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258), first, various data (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter Each value of CS1) is acquired (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S1602). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203ba is ON. This variable probability counter flag 203aa is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpots A, B, D, E, and F. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the odds are changing (S1602: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state, so the process proceeds to S1603. In the process of S1603, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S1601 and the special symbol big winning random number table (first winning random number table) 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained. (S1603). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first winning random number table) 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the special symbol jackpot in the variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 15(a)). When the value of the random number counter C1 per one coincides with the random number value to be the winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols (S1602: No), the processing of S1604 is executed. In the process of S1604, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S1601 and the special symbol big winning random number table (first winning random number table) 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (S1604). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first winning random number table) 202a. Two random numbers of "0, 1" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these winnings. When the random number value matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the process of S1605, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S1603 or S1604 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table ( 1st per random number table) 202a match with the judgment value set) is determined (S1605), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S1605: Yes), acquired by the processing of S1601 Based on the value of the big hit type counter C2, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S1606). More specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1601 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2, and the jackpot type (DH) is what. determine whether

In the process of S1606, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type. Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S1607). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1607, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "short failure", "long failure", various types of "missing normal reach", and various types of "missing super reach" are defined. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S1605: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S1608). In the process of S1608, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Based on the value, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1609). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S1608, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach.

When the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1610). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1611). When the processing of S1611 ends, the process returns to special symbol variation processing 3 (S131).

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S263). In this first special symbol variation start process (S263), the type of special symbol to be processed is changed from special figure 1 to special figure 2 with respect to the above-described second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258). It is different in points, and according to the difference, it is different in that various counters, tables, etc. for special figure 2 are changed to various counters, tables, etc. for special figure 1. Since other contents are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, the game state update process 3 (S271) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the game state update process 3 (S271). This gaming state update process 3 (S271) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h. is executed, the game state is updated based on the subtracted value, and a state command indicating the updated game state is set.

When the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of normal symbols. (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S851: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S852), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0. (S853).

Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S853 (S853: Yes), the game state corresponding to the game state storage area is set (S854), and the current game state (the time saving counter 203h value, the setting state of the variable probability flag 203ba) is set (S871), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S851: No), or in the process of S853, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 ( greater than 0) (S853: No), the process proceeds directly to S871.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in which the probability variation flag 203ba is set to ON after the jackpot game ends, "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variation flag 203ba is set. When a jackpot that is not set to ON is won, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in which the variable probability flag 203ba is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability for normal symbols) until the next jackpot is won after the end of the jackpot game. state) is set, and if you win a jackpot where the probability variation flag 203ba is not set to ON after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state (special symbol low probability state) until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends , High probability state of normal design) will be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the contents of the jackpot ending process 3 (S2551) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 3 (S2551). In this jackpot end processing 3 (S2551), according to the jackpot type won, the setting of the probability variation flag 203ba and the value of the time saving counter 203h are set when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of this time is "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751), "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: Yes), set the variable probability flag 203ba to ON (S2752), set the value of the time saving counter 203h to "10000" (S2753), turn off the jackpot flag (S2754), sets a command indicating a change in the game state (command indicating the current game state) (S2704), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that this jackpot type is not "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: No), set "100" to the value of the time saving counter 203h ( S2755), the process proceeds to S2754.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, state command reception processing 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125) is performed in place of the state command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 64) in the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) Instead of the special figure fluctuation start process (see S4291 in FIG. 127), the point of executing The difference is that the jackpot start process (see S4212 in FIG. 128) is executed as a subroutine of the jackpot related process (see S5002 in FIG. 66). Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 125, the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process 3 (S4252). This state command reception process 3 (S4252) is different from the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above in that a battle effect update process (S4651) is added and executed. do. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 3 (S4252) is executed, first, the battle effect update process is executed (S4651), and then the same processes of S4601 to S4604 as the state command reception process described above (see S4212 in FIG. 64). to run. Here, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the game state has changed to a state other than the normal state (S4602: No), then it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4652), (S4652: Yes), since the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being displayed, the change processing of the display contents accompanying the game state transition is not executed, and S4610 is performed. and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4652, if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4652: No), the process of S4605 to S4610, which is the same as the above-described status command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the details of the battle effect update process (S4651). In this battle effect update process (S4651), in the battle effect (continuous battle effect) during the time saving state, the process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the update of the number of times of time saving is executed.

When the battle effect update process (S4651) is executed, first, it is determined whether the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6651), and it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). In this case, since there is no need to update the battle effect, this processing ends. On the other hand, the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON. That is, if it is determined that the battle is currently being produced (S6651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is in the time saving state (S6652).

The process of S6652 is executed by reading information indicating the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k. In the process of S6652, if it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state (S6652: No), since the current jackpot game is in progress, there is no need to execute the process of updating the battle effect, so this process ends as it is. do. If it is determined that the current is in the time saving state (S6652: Yes), then information indicating the remaining period of the time saving state included in the state command received this time (information indicating the number of remaining time saving) Based on The value of the remaining time reduction count is updated and set in the sub-state setting area 223k.

When the processing of S6653 is finished, as a result of updating the value of the number of times of remaining time reduction, it is determined whether the number of times of remaining time reduction has reached 70 times (S6654). If so (S6654: No), a display command indicating a physical strength gauge value corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions set this time is set (S6655), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S6655, as shown in FIG. The image data of the display mode is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S6654, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reduction has reached 70 times (S6654: Yes), based on the completion conditions of the battle production (continuous battle production) to be executed during the time reduction state Then, a display command indicating battle defeat is set (S6656), the in-battle flag 223ca is set to OFF (S6657), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S6656, as shown in FIG. 113(a), a defeat effect is executed in which the character 817 is defeated in the battle effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) will be described. Figure 127 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing (S4291). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) is executed instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above. It is what is done. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so for each special figure While each was configured to execute the variation start process, in the third embodiment, each special figure lottery (variation) is configured not to be executed at the same time (in parallel), so the start of the special figure variation The processing to be executed at the timing is made common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

When the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) is executed, first, the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S4371), then the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) Same as The processing of S4352 and S4353 is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the special figure variation (lottery) of this time has been elected to the jackpot (S4381). In this process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the process of S4381, when it is determined that the special figure variation (lottery) of this time has not won the jackpot (S4381: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that this special figure variation (lottery) has won a jackpot (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4382). In other words, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation executed during the execution of the battle production is the winning of the jackpot.

In the process of S4382, if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4382: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4382: Yes), then, it is determined whether the jackpot won this time is a time-saving jackpot (S4383). (S4384), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4383, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving jackpot (it is a variable probability jackpot) (S4383: No), the processing of S4384 is skipped and this processing ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4384, image data corresponding to the rematch effect shown in FIG. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212). In this jackpot start processing (S4212), various settings are performed based on the production situation (whether or not the battle is being produced) at the timing of the start of the jackpot game and the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time.

When the jackpot start process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701). When it is determined that a jackpot game has been executed (S6701: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S6702). In the process of S6702, determination is made based on the jackpot type stored in the secondary state setting area 223k.

In the process of S6702, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is determined (S6703: Yes), a display command indicating battle victory is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (S6703), and a flag during battle is set. 223ca is turned on (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6709. On the other hand, in the processing of S6702, if it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is not (the time-saving jackpot) (S6702: No), a display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. (S6705), the above-described processes of S6704 and S6709 are executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S6701, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot (S6706), and it is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined (S6706; Yes), set a display command indicating battle victory (S6707), proceed to the processing of S6709, and if it is determined that it is not a probability variation jackpot in the processing of S6706 (S6706: No), A display command indicating battle continuation is set, and in the process of S6709, a display jackpot start command is set, and this process ends.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable state (next jackpot (until a jackpot is won) or a time-saving state (until a special figure variation is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot, or until a jackpot is won) is set.

That is, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next big hit is won, so the variable probability state is set. And the possibility of being able to win many prize balls was remarkably increased. Here, the recent pachinko machine 10 is configured to continue the variable probability state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning many prize balls, the gambling property of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, measures to reduce the probability that the probability variable state continues (for example, the rate of the probability variable state continuing to 65% or less) are being considered.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not make the player have excessive expectations for prize balls. Among the performances used in the pachinko machine 10 that continue with a probability (for example, 80%) (performance for showing the lottery result of special symbols), the performance effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is lowered.

Specifically, during the jackpot game, if your character battles with the enemy character and wins the battle, in the battle production that notifies that the variable probability state is set after the end of this jackpot game. , If the rate at which the probability variable state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle production executed during the jackpot game will decrease, and the player's expectation when the battle production is executed (the probability variable state is set There is a problem that the sense of anticipation for the game is weakened and the desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present third embodiment, a continuous battle effect that continues the battle effect until a predetermined end condition (for example, special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times) is established after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot is won during a period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined termination condition, the performance of winning the battle is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle presentation, and to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot (a jackpot in which a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a battle production is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot A continuous battle effect is executed only when winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the game. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, it is configured so that the production result of the continuous battle will be different according to the type of the winning jackpot. It is constructed so as to execute the battle rematch production when winning the time-saving jackpot during the continuous battle production. As a result, execution of a defeat performance in which the player loses the battle is suppressed when the time-saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the defeat effect is executed after the battle effect is executed, so that the proportion of battle wins can be relatively increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition of the continuous battle production (battle production performed during the time saving state), the number of times of time saving is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 30 times). Although the case is set as the end condition, it may be configured to variably set the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is established by the effect lottery means without being limited to this. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle performance is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle performance.

In addition, as a guaranteed period notification effect for notifying the player of a period in which the continuous battle effect will not end (battle effect guaranteed period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, the character 817 does not lose. It is also possible to construct an effect indicating the invincible mode so that it can be executed, and to notify the period during which the invincible mode continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to set the end condition of the continuous battle production based on the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win a small win that can give the player a privilege less than the big win game (a privilege different from the big win game), based on the small win winning (executing the small winning game During), it is preferable to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as a small winning game to be executed when winning a small winning, it is preferable to execute a small winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big winning game is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is being opened, so that the player can experience the defeat effect as if during the jackpot game. I can make you think.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle production is terminated based on the condition that is established first, whether the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or the small winning is won. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle effect indefinite.

<First modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133, a first modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so each variation for each special figure It is configured to execute the start process, and as shown in FIG. 9(a), only the variation effect corresponding to any special figure variation (special figure 1 variation in FIG. 9(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device. It was configured to display in the 81 main display area Dm.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, since the variation effects corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations are not simultaneously executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can use the third symbol display device 81 Although it was possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the variation effect to be executed was confusing, it was difficult to understand that multiple special symbol variations were being performed at the same time (in parallel), and multiple There is a problem that the game is played without the player understanding the characteristic game property that the special symbol variations are executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the first modification, one special figure variation is the main variation display, the other special figure variation is the sub-variation display, and the variation effect (main variation effect) corresponding to the main variation display is also the sub-variation A variable effect (subordinate variable effect) corresponding to the display is also configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the variable performance corresponding to the main variable display is configured to be more conspicuous than the variable performance corresponding to the secondary variable display.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in the first modified example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen of the third pattern display device in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 130(a), in the first modified example, the main display area Dm of the display screen is divided into the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb, in contrast to the display screen of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the main variation effect is executed in the main variation area Dma, and the sub-variation effect is executed in the sub-variation area Dmb, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), the first modification is configured such that the main variation area Dma is formed larger than the secondary variation area Dmb, and the main variation effect is presented to the player. It is configured so that it can be executed more conspicuously than the variable production. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to one variable performance among the plurality of variable performances being executed.

In the first modified example, when a specific variation performance (variation performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, super reach performance)) is executed as the variation performance executed on the sub-variation region Dmb side, the main variation region Dma and a variable effect executed in the sub-variation area Dmb can be executed. As a result, when a variable performance that the player should pay attention to is executed, the player can be notified of the variable performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, at the time when a specific variable effect (variable effect of winning a jackpot (for example, super reach)) is set as a variable effect to be executed on the sub-variation area Dmb side, even in the main variation area Dma (expecting to win a jackpot When a highly variable performance (for example, super reach) is being executed, the variable performance being executed in the main variable area Dma is suddenly switched, and the performance is provided incomprehensibly to the player. There was a problem of hoarding.

In addition, for the player who wants to see the specific variable performance being executed in the main variable area Dma, which is a variable performance that is difficult to execute, and who wants to see the performance to the end regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, There is a possibility that the sudden switching of the variable presentation may cause dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when executing (setting) the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma, in the sub-variation area Dmb stored withholding It is configured to discriminate the result of pre-reading of winning information corresponding to the variable performance (special figure 2 variable performance) to be executed, and to determine whether or not there is winning prize information for winning a big hit. Then, when it is determined that there is winning information for winning a jackpot, the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 can set a specific variation effect (for example, a winning super ready-to-win effect). (For example, if it is a deviation fluctuation pattern indicating a fluctuation time of 90 seconds), it is not a specific fluctuation production, but a normal fluctuation production (for example, a short-time deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (see FIG. 18) It is configured to execute a special variable performance that executes the variable performance set corresponding to the number of times.

By configuring in this way, even if the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is switched from the special figure 1 variation effect to the special figure 2 variation effect, in the main variation area Dma before switching, the normal deviation fluctuation Since the corresponding variable performance is only executed, the variable performance can be switched smoothly without making the player feel uncomfortable or dissatisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of rendering in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing the flow of each effect when switching between the variable effects that are variably displayed between the main variation area Dma and the sub-variation area Dmb. As shown in FIG. 129, the timing of setting the variation performance (special figure 1 variation performance) of the special figure 1 variation (the variation of the lottery result is out and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation area Dma ( At the timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation, or the fluctuation display is executed next It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 has the information indicating the winning of the jackpot.

As a result of the determination described above, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has information indicating the jackpot winning, the special figure As the variation performance of one variation, a special variation performance is set and executed for continuously executing a variation performance (short-time deviation variation performance) selected when the variation time is 10 seconds. Thereby, the second variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and at the production switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation production in the main fluctuation area Dma, the variation of the special figure 1 fluctuation Since the short-time off variable performance is executed as the performance, the variable performance can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Also, at the timing of setting the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation, even if you do not accurately grasp the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation being executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be performed in the future, etc. At the production switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 fluctuation production in the fluctuation area Dma, since it is possible to execute normal deviation fluctuation, the processing when setting the fluctuation production can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130(b) and FIG. 131, description will be given of the effect contents displayed when switching the variable effect displayed between the main variation area Dma and the sub-variation area Dmb. Figure 130 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content at the time when the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation is executed in the main variation area Dma, Figure 131 is a variation display of the special figure 2 variation is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when is being executed in the main variation area Dma.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b), before the switching timing of the variation display, the variation performance of the special figure 1 variation (short-time deviation variation performance) is executed in the main variation area Dma, and the sub-variation area Dmb Then, the variation production (reach generation) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. After that, when the variation display of the special figure 2 variation develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. A super reach effect (a effect in which a fish swims within the display area) is executed.

On the other hand, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation is displayed by switching to the sub-variation area Dmb. Note that the example shown in FIG. 131 shows the point in time when one of the short-time out-of-variation effects that are pseudo-executed multiple times ends, and the third symbol displayed in the sub-variation area Dmb is in the temporary stop mode ( In FIG. 131, it is displayed as "swing stop"). In this way, when the pseudo short-term fluctuation effect is executed a plurality of times, the third symbol is displayed in a temporary stop mode at the end of each short-term fluctuation effect, so that the player can It is possible to make it seem that special figure 1 variation is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, in the first modification, the display position where the special figure 1 variation effect is executed (left side of the main display area Dm) and the display position where the special figure 2 variation effect is performed (right side of the main display area Dm) , the main variable region Dma and the sub-variable region Dmb are variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which special symbol the executed variable effect corresponds to. In addition, without being limited to this, the display position of the special figure 1 fluctuation production and the display position of the special figure 2 fluctuation production are changed without changing the position of the main fluctuation area Dma and the position of the secondary fluctuation area Dmb. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to fix the position where the variable effect that the player should pay attention to is executed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, in the first modified example, before and after the switching timing of the variable display, the main variable region Dma and the secondary variable region Dmb are formed without changing the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after switching the variable display, it is preferable to form the main variable area Dma larger than before switching and the secondary variable area Dmb smaller than before switching. As a result, the variation performance executed in the main variation area Dma after switching can be emphasized more, and the player can be interested. In addition to the configuration in which the size of each variable region is variable, for example, the frame mode for partitioning each variable region may be varied. may be colored red, or the shape of the frame may be circular.

Furthermore, in the first modification, when setting the variation effect of the special figure variation executed on the main variation area Dma side, it is determined whether or not the big hit is won based on the winning information of other special figure variations (preliminary discrimination), and based on the discrimination result, the production mode of the variation production is set. And, it may be configured to discriminate the timing at which the special figure is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit and the timing to switch the variable performance, and to set the variable performance based on the determination result.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In the first modification described above, the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb are formed, and each variation area is configured so that the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation is executed, and the secondary variation area Dmb side When a specific variation performance is executed in the special figure variation, a special design corresponding to the variation performance performed in the main variation area Dma, and a special design corresponding to the variation performance performed in the sub-variation area Dmb It was to execute a variation effect switching process to switch between.

On the other hand, in the second modification, when a specific variation effect is executed in the special figure variation on the side of the secondary variation area Dmb, the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb are combined into a special It is different in that it is configured to form a variable area and execute a variable effect corresponding to a plurality of special figure variations within the special variable area. Other elements are the same as those of the first modified example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modified example, the variable display shown in FIG. 130(a) of the first modified example described above is executed in the normal varying state. Then, as in the first modification described above, the special figure 1 variation executed in the main variation area Dma (the lottery result is out, the variation time is 60 seconds) variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) At the timing (timing of FIG. 129 (a)) to set, read the winning information of the special figure 2 from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the special figure 2 variation being executed is a jackpot variation, or next variation It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 to be displayed has the information indicating the winning of the jackpot.

As a result of the determination described above, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has information indicating the jackpot winning, FIG. Special variable regions Dma to Dmd shown in (a) are formed. Here, with reference to FIGS. 132(a) to 133(b), the contents of the effect in the second modified example will be described.

FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the special variation areas Dma to Dmd, and FIG. 132(b) is the special variation area Dma at the time when the special figure 2 jackpot variation is started. Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of ~ Dmd, Figure 133 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation, Figure 133 (b) is a special FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when a combination indicating a big win is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are formed from four variation display areas. The variation performance corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is configured such that the decoration variation performance of the pseudo pattern is executed in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd. Then, a comment "multi-reach" indicating that the special variation areas Dma to Dmd have been formed is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

After that, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed while the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are displayed, the state shown in FIG. 132(b) is obtained. In FIG. 132 (b), the display mode "351" indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuation is out is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma, and the reach display indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is in the reach state It is displayed in the special variable area Dmb. In addition, in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd, decoration variation display is performed to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit of the special figure 2 variation being executed, and the reach display is displayed in the special variation area Dmc. there is

In addition, the display area of the special variation area Dma becomes smaller based on the stop display of the missing symbol in the special variation area Dma indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation, the special variation area Dmb which is in the reach state, and The display area of the special variable area Dmc is formed large. In this way, by varying the size of each variable region in the special variable regions Dma to Dmd according to the state of variation in each variable region and the result of variation, the player is notified of the region to be watched in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

After that, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display progresses, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), only the special fluctuation area Dmb becomes the reach state, and the display mode indicating the deviation is displayed in the other fluctuation areas, and in the sub display area Ds and the comment "Last Chance" is displayed. In this state, the special figure 1 variation is displayed as the next variation, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the result of the previous special figure variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the special variation area Dma. maintained in good condition.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is newly executed, there is no sense of incongruity in the multi-reach production using the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd. In addition, when the newly executed special figure 1 variation is a big hit, for example, from the state shown in FIG. It may be configured to As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the multi-reach using the special variable areas Dma to Dmd will continue in what manner, and to enhance the effect of the performance.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, as shown in FIG. Along with the comment, the third symbol "555" indicating the big win is stopped and displayed. In this state, since the special figure 1 variation being executed is forcibly stopped, "351" indicating that the special figure 1 has come off and stopped is displayed in the special variation area Dma.

In addition, the decoration variation display executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd is variably displayed in a production mode for suggesting the expectation of winning the special figure 2 variation, and the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation, Based on the interval of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop timing, it is configured so that the fluctuation period of each fluctuation display is set.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation is executed and the multi-reach is displayed, that is, at the time when the special figure 2 variation that becomes the jackpot variation is not started, the decoration performed in the special variation area Dmc and Dmd The variable display is displayed in a state where the effect mode is not set. Then, at the timing when the special figure 2 jackpot variation is executed, the difference between the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation and the variation time of the jackpot variation is calculated, and based on the calculation result, the special variation area Sets the variation time of decoration variation display executed by Dmc and Dmd.

By configuring in this way, even if the period from the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma to the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation area Dmb is short , even if it is long, the multi-reach performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of incompatibility. In addition, the configuration of the multi-reach effect is not limited to this, for example, if the difference between the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed and the variation time of the jackpot variation is within a predetermined time, special variation The areas Dmc and Dmd may be merged to execute one decorative variable display, or the decorative variable display may be executed only in the special variable area Dmc, and a mini-character may appear in the special variable area Dmd. It may be configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit of medium multi-reach.

In addition, in each of the above modifications, while a special variation effect (a variation effect in which a plurality of pseudo short-term fluctuation patterns are continuously executed during one variation period) is being executed Also, the fourth symbols displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are configured to be displayed in the usual manner. That is, in the special variation effect, even while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol in which the special variation effect is being executed is configured to continue the variable display, but this is not the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, in synchronism with the temporary stop period during execution of the special variation effect, the corresponding fourth symbol may also be temporarily stopped. By configuring in this way, even if the player visually recognizes the fourth symbol during execution of the special variation performance, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether or not the special variation performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unnatural display content in which the fourth symbol continues to be variably displayed despite the fact that the third symbol is temporarily stopped before and after the switching timing of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, for example, the fourth symbol may be difficult to be visually recognized at least during the temporary stop period during execution of the special variation effect. More specifically, for example, the fourth pattern is hidden, the fourth pattern display area is displayed in a reduced size, or a predetermined role is displayed at a position where the fourth pattern display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) is hidden. It may be configured to operate. By configuring in this way, the display control of the fourth symbol can be simplified as compared with the case of synchronizing the display mode of the fourth symbol during the temporary stop period of the special variation effect.

In addition, as a method for making it difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is being executed, for example, at least during the temporary stop period, by making the back image around the fourth symbol display area the same color as the fourth symbol. , it may be configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize whether the fourth symbol is variably displayed or stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fourth pattern difficult to see by the extremely simple control of changing the rear image, so that the display control can be further simplified. In addition, by changing the back image, it is possible to make the player feel as if a performance different from usual is being executed, so that the expectation for the big win can be heightened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, for example, the main variation area Dma and the secondary variation area Dmb are switched, and while the special figure 2 variation display is being performed in the main variation area Dma, the special figure 2 variation display with the display area enlarged Depending on the content, the fourth symbol display area may be shielded. That is, in the example of FIG. 131, the image of the fish that is displayed as it develops into Super Reach is also displayed in the fourth pattern display area (the image of the fish is displayed in the layer in the hierarchy before the display layer of the fourth pattern). may be displayed), or a configuration may be adopted in which characters "Reaching has occurred!" are displayed in the fourth pattern display area to make the fourth pattern difficult to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special variation effect is being executed at least after the switching of the variation area. Further, for example, during the execution period of the special variation effect, the meaning of the fourth pattern can be understood by changing the display position of the fourth pattern display area or reversing the arrangement of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. By making it difficult, it may be indirectly made difficult to recognize whether or not it is the execution period of the special variation effect. Further, by periodically or irregularly varying the display mode of the fourth pattern (the display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed and the display mode indicating that the stop display is being performed), the A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to understand whether or not the variable display is being performed from the display mode, and indirectly it is difficult to recognize whether or not the special variable effect is being executed. Specifically, for example, the first display method indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by performing a variable display, while the symbol is stopped to indicate that the symbol is being displayed in a stopped manner; a second display method indicating that the entire pattern display area is white to indicate that the variable display is in progress, while the entire pattern display area is black to indicate that the stationary display is in progress; The left half may blink to indicate that the variable display is in progress, while the right half blinks to indicate the variable display in the third display method. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the special variable display is being executed.

In each of the above modifications, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 were separately displayed with respect to the fourth symbol display area, but not necessarily to the special figure 1 It is not necessary to display both the corresponding 4th design and the 4th design corresponding to the special figure 2. - 特許庁For example, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the third symbol being executed in the main variation area Dma may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area. By configuring in this way, not only the third pattern but also the fourth pattern to which the player should pay attention becomes clear, so that the player's convenience can be improved. Also, after the display switching process is executed, only the fourth pattern corresponding to the special pattern different from the special pattern on the side where the special variation effect is being executed is displayed in the fourth pattern display area. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the aspect of the fourth symbol.

In each of the above modifications, when executing a variation effect corresponding to a specific variation type in the main variation area Dma, each reserved ball (winning Information) lottery results are read in advance, and when it is determined that there is a reserved ball (winning information) corresponding to a big hit, the variable performance to be executed in the main variable area Dma is set to a special variable performance. It is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the held ball (winning information) contains a variation type with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (for example, super reach, etc.), a predetermined ratio (for example, 1 A ratio of /5) may be configured such that the special variation effect is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the player notices that the player is temporarily stopped (the third symbol is swinging) during the temporary stop period in the special variation performance, the big win is confirmed. Therefore, even after the change effect (special change effect) executed in the main variation area Dma and the change effect executed in the sub-variation area Dmb are switched by the display switching process, the main change area Dma It is possible to pay attention to the change performance after switching to the end. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example, when the multi-reach effect is executed, the decoration variable display is executed in the special variable regions Dmc and Dmd. That is, the variation period is set according to the interval between the variation stop timing of the variation performance executed in the special variation region Dma and the stop timing of the variation performance executed in the special variation region Dmb. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be synchronized with the fluctuation display period of the special figure fluctuation based on each held ball held at the start of the multi-reach production. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation stop period of the fluctuation performance executed in each of the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd can be matched with the fluctuation stop period of the fourth symbol, so that a more natural-looking production mode can be achieved. can provide.

<Regarding the ball entering unit 64 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 134, FIGS. 134(a) and (b) for explaining the ball entry unit 64 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment schematically show the internal structure of the ball entry unit 64. It is a schematic diagram. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

In the upper part of the ball entry unit 64, a passage opening through which a game ball can enter is provided, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage opening is arranged. there is A game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the entering game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 134(a)), and the game ball is first entered. It is guided to the mouth 64b1. Here, each of the distribution members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900c.

A magnet 900b of a distribution member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back side of the entering ball unit 64, and a base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also made of a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. Then, either one of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) for receiving the game ball entering the first ball-entering device 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, by receiving the entered game ball in one of the accommodation parts 900a and 900c, the game ball can be properly inserted into either the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2. can be distributed.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64b1, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball entered into the ball entry unit 64 is received by the accommodation portion 900b. The distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left second ball inlet 64b2. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the ball entering unit 64 to the first ball entering port 64b1 and the left second ball entering port 64b2. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 to win a prize, and a lottery game (particularly 1 lottery game) and the lottery game (special figure 2 lottery game) resulting from winning the second left ball entrance 64b2 can be executed efficiently.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment performs the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) at the same time (in parallel are configured to be executable. Therefore, the ball passing through the passage port of the entering ball unit 64 alternately alternates between the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery and the left second ball entrance 64b2 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery. By providing the distribution member 900 so as to be distributed to , the lottery (fluctuation) of each special symbol can be efficiently performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has flowed into the specific area formed on the game area) is placed in the first ball entrance 64b1 (the starting A distribution member 900 (distribution means) that alternately distributes between the winning opening) and the second left ball entrance 64b2 (starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of special figure 2) is provided, but it is limited to this. There may be provided a distribution means for regularly distributing the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 at different ratios (for example, 2 to 1). It is preferable to configure so that the distribution ratio is high for the entrance corresponding to the special figure type on the side where the short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, each special figure variation can be executed efficiently.

Furthermore, the ball that has flowed into the ball entrance unit 64 can be distributed to the first ball entrance 64b1, the second ball entrance 64b2, and other ball entrances (for example, the general ball entrance 63). A member 900 (dividing means) may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 surely enter each ball entrance. A configuration may also be adopted in which the ball is distributed to a flow path in which the ball can enter.

Also, it may be configured so that the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member 900 can enter a plurality of ball entrances. 80% of the balls distributed to the first flow path go to the first ball entrance 64b1, and 10% go to the left second ball entrance unit 64b2. It may be configured so that the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 at a rate of 10%. In this case, the ball distributed to the first flow path and the ball distributed to the second flow path may have a different rate of entering each ball entrance. Even if there is, a ball can be sorted into a channel in which the ball can (easily) enter the first ball entrance 64b1 and a channel in which the ball can (easily) enter the left second ball entrance 64b2. Included in the concept of means.

In addition, a rolling area is provided in which the ball that has flowed into the ball entering unit 64 can circulate, and a plurality of passage holes are formed in the rolling area. It may be configured such that a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers the lottery, the second left ball entrance 64b2 that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, and the general ball entrance 63). When such a configuration is used, the passing opening through which the ball that rolls in the rolling area passes can be changed according to the momentum of the ball rolling in the rolling area. can be made to pass irregularly through each passage opening, and the number of balls entering the entrance opening, which is advantageous to the player, is greater than the number of balls entering other entrance openings. can make it possible. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying which passage port the ball that has flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 passes through, and by extension, which ball-entering port the ball enters. Note that such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which the balls that have flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 are irregularly distributed toward a plurality of ball-entering openings, is also included in the concept of the distribution means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means is provided with one distribution member 900 that changes the distribution destination based on the passage of the ball. Alternatively, a plurality of distribution means may be used to vary the distribution destination of the balls. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball-entering means is provided so that only the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can enter the ball. A ball entry port may be arranged at a position where a ball that is not sorted by the sorting member 900, that is, a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can also be entered. In this case, it is assumed that the balls that have flowed into the ball entering unit 64 (the balls that have been sorted by the sorting member 900) are more likely to enter the ball entering port than the balls that have not flowed into the ball entering unit 64. good.

By configuring in this way, players can keep an eye on the ball flowing down the game area while expecting the ball to flow into the ball entering unit 64, thereby providing a game that is never boring. In addition, since there is a possibility that a ball that has not flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 will also enter the ball-entering opening, expectations can be given to the ball that has not flowed into the ball-entering unit 64 until the end. .

Furthermore, when the number of balls that have flowed into the ball entry unit 64 reaches a predetermined number or more within a predetermined period, the distribution means distributes the balls to a specific ball entrance that is more advantageous to the player than other ball entrances. You may configure so that it becomes easy. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to play (shoot balls) in order to cause many balls to flow into the ball-entering unit 64 in a short period of time.

Although the distribution means (distribution member 900) having various technical ideas has been described above, a distribution means may be provided in which each of the technical ideas described above is appropriately combined.

<Third modification>
Next, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the battle production executed during the jackpot game is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of special figure fluctuations in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (30 times) It was configured to run continuously. Then, when the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (30 times), the battle production is terminated, and the production of entering the time saving state (see FIG. 114 (b)) is executed. was

On the other hand, in the third modification, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in some of the lottery results other than the big win, benefits different from the big win game executed when the big win is won are given. It is constructed so as to be able to win a small prize in which a small prize game is executed. Furthermore, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set to a predetermined end condition (special figure fluctuation Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning a small prize) as a lottery result of a special pattern is established, execution is continuously performed, and an end condition is satisfied. After that, a time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135(b)) indicating that the time saving state has been set is executed. By comprising in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state was set at the timing when end conditions were satisfied. In addition, regarding the control of winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the control object for the big win winning in each embodiment described above is changed to a small hit, and the winning determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) is set to When the range is set to be different from the range corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the small win game is executed, a small win operation scenario different from the big win operation scenario (for example, the round game is one round and the variable winning device 65 is A round game to be opened is performed, and the variable prize winning device 65 is operated based on the condition that either five balls win a prize or the opening period has passed for 0.5 seconds as the round end condition of the round game. Since the points are different and the rest is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the third modified example, as a predetermined end condition, it is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) whose establishment timing is irregular. By configuring in this way, even if a certain number of times of time saving state (for example, 100 times of time saving state) is set internally, various times of time saving state depending on the timing when the time saving rush production is executed. can be made to think that is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the effect content of the third modification will be described. FIG. 135(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen having a display mode that can be executed during the jackpot game displayed after the jackpot game ends (during the time saving state), and FIG. 135(b) It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the time saving rush screen. In addition, in each element displayed in each figure, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the ending screen displayed on the ending screen of the big win game is continuously displayed. In this ending screen, a display mode Dm5 showing the number of prize balls won by the player during a period (continuous chance period) in which the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. Then, a display mode Dm10 showing the number of times of the jackpot game executed during the consecutive chance period is displayed. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) is internally a time saving state, so the variation display mode (arrow) indicating that the special figure 2 variation is being performed in the small display area Dm2 is displayed. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is continuing in spite of the fact that the time saving state is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured so that the game executed during the time saving state and the game executed during the jackpot game are the same game (right-handed game). Also, the current game state is not determined by the player depending on the game method.

Next, when the end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, the time saving rush effect is executed as shown in FIG. 135(b). Here, in the third modification, when the end condition is satisfied by winning a small win, the number of remaining short times at that time is determined, and the determined number of short remaining times is a good value (for example, the last digit is "0"), the number of times of correction obtained by correcting the actual number of times of shortening remaining time is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the number of times of time saving (number of times of remaining time) displayed when the time saving rush production is executed can be set to a good value, so the time saving state is set at the time when the time saving rush production is executed. It can make you think of the timing.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 135(b), 80, which is the number of corrections, is displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm11. Then, in the small display area Dm2, a display mode of "341" indicating that the special figure 2 has been won is displayed. In the third modified example, a winning game is executed in which the same variable winning device 65 is changed depending on whether a small win is won or a big win is won. Therefore, when the time-saving rush effect is executed based on the small winning, the time-saving rush effect is executed based on the execution of the winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is varied. On the other hand, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be reminiscent of the time when the time-saving rush production is executed.

In addition, in this modification, when the small winning game is completed, it is configured to execute the time saving rush effect shown in FIG. You may comprise so that a time saving rush production may be performed sometimes.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the electrical configuration of the third modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the third modification differs from the above-described third embodiment in that a battle end flag 223ca, a corrected flag 223acb, and a correction count storage area 223cc are added. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, in the present third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends, the "jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a))" is used. point, it is different from the above-described third embodiment (of the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "battle effect screen" is displayed as a display mode that is displayed even after the jackpot game ends), but for convenience of explanation, Description will be made using flag names (in-battle flag 223ba, battle-end flag 223ca) used in the third embodiment. That is, in the third modification, when the in-battle flag 223ba is set to ON, it indicates that the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a)) is displayed, and the battle end flag 223ca, which will be described later, is displayed. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the condition for terminating the display of the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135(a)) is satisfied.

The battle end flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the end condition is satisfied based on the small winning, and is set to ON when the ending condition is satisfied by the small winning.

The corrected flag 223acb is a flag for indicating that the number of times of shortening remaining time displayed has been corrected, and is set to ON when the number of times of shortening remaining time is corrected. By setting this corrected flag 223acb to ON, as a variation production of the special figure fluctuation, an effect mode (correction effect mode) for adjusting the difference between the corrected number of times of time saving and the actual number of times of time saving is executed. .

The corrected number of times storage area 223cc is a storage area in which a value indicating the corrected number of remaining reduced working hours after correcting the number of remaining reduced working hours and a value indicating the difference between the corrected number of reduced remaining working hours and the actual number of reduced remaining working hours are stored. Based on the value stored in this correction frequency storage area 223cc, a correction effect mode is set as a variable effect of the special figure fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIGS. 137 to 141, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third modification will be described. In the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification, with respect to the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described third embodiment, the small winning end processing during the small winning game is changed. , the battle effect update process is changed to the battle effect update process 4, and the special figure fluctuation start process is changed to the special figure fluctuation start process 4. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, as described above, in the third modification, in contrast to the above-described third embodiment, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends is changed to the "battle effect display". , but for the convenience of explanation, the processing relating to the battle presentation in the above-described third embodiment is used as it is. In the third modified example, when the process related to the battle effect is executed, the process related to the jackpot ending screen is executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 137, the contents of the small winning end processing 4 (S2571) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit ending process 4 (S2571). When the small hit end processing 4 (S2571) is executed, first, in order to determine whether the battle is being produced at the present time, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ba is set to ON (S2791). If it is determined that there is (S2791: Yes), the in-battle flag 223ba is set to OFF (S2792), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is off (S2791: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651) will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle presentation update process 4 (S4651). In this battle effect update process 4 (S4651), it is determined that the first end condition (the number of remaining times reaches 70) has not ended while the battle effect is being executed, in contrast to the above-described battle effect update process. If so (S6654: No), it is determined whether the battle end flag 223ca is set to ON (S6671), and if it is determined to be ON (S6671: Yes), the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the number of times correction processing (S6672) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the content of the number of times correction processing (S6672). In this number of times correction process (S6672), a process for correcting the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the battle production ends to a good number of times is executed.

When the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed, first, the remaining time number of times is extracted (S6691), and it is determined whether the last digit of the extracted remaining time short number of times is "0" (S6692) and "0" If so (S6692: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last digit is not "0" ("1 to 9") (S6692: No), the number of corrections (correction remaining number of hours) is set (S6693), the set number of corrections is stored in the correction number storage area 223cc (S6694), the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6695), and the process ends.

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start process 4 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 140 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4291). This special figure fluctuation start process 4 (S4291) is different from the special figure fluctuation start process described above in that the correction number corresponding process (S4391) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the correction number handling process (S4391) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the correction count handling process (S4391). In this correction count corresponding process (S4391), when the number of remaining time reduction displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the corrected remaining time reduction count, the difference between the corrected remaining time reduction count and the actual remaining time reduction count. A process for setting a variable effect for setting the to 0 is executed.

When the correction count correspondence process (S4391) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6801). is 30 seconds or longer (S6802). When it is determined that it is 30 seconds or longer in the process of S6802 (S6802), the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc and the actual remaining time reduction number are read (S6803), and the difference is calculated (S6804).

Then, the display mode corresponding to the difference value referred to in the process of S6804 is set (S6805), and the value (difference value) stored in the correction number storage area 223cc is updated according to the selected display mode ( S6806), it is determined whether the difference value after updating is 0 (S6807). When it is determined that the difference value is 0 (S6807: Yes), since there is no need to set the correction effect any more, the corrected flag 223acb is set to OFF (S6808), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if S6801: No, S6802: No, S6807: No, then this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S6802, it is a process to determine whether or not it is possible to execute the number of times of remaining time reduction correction effect (effect of bringing the number of times of remaining time reduction on display close to the actual number of times of remaining time reduction) as the variable effect of this time. In this modification, the execution condition of the remaining time reduction number correction effect is that the fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds or more. You may comprise so that the production|presentation aspect (range of the value of the number of remaining time reductions to update) may be changed.

As described above, in the third modification, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. During the time saving state, it continues until a predetermined end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (30 times), or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is elected as a lottery result of a special symbol) is established. After the termination condition is established, the time saving rush performance (see FIG. 135(b)) indicating that the time saving state has been set is executed. By comprising in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state was set at the timing when end conditions were satisfied.

Furthermore, in the third modified example, as a predetermined end condition, it is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) whose establishment timing is irregular. By configuring in this way, even if a certain number of times of time saving state (for example, 100 times of time saving state) is set internally, various times of time saving state depending on the timing when the time saving rush production is executed. can be made to think that is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third modification, when correcting the number of times of remaining time reduction, a correction process is performed to correct the number of times of remaining time reduction to a value smaller than the actual number of times of remaining time reduction. A correction process may be performed to correct the reference value (for example, the last digit is "0" or "5") to the value with the smallest difference. In this case, the number of times of reduced time after correction (number of times of reduced remaining time) may be greater than the actual number of reduced times of remaining time, but in this case, it is displayed during one variation performance as a variation effect of special figure variation. The value of the number of times of reduced remaining time (the value of the number of times of reduced remaining time) may be configured to execute a variable performance for subtracting a plurality of times. Specifically, once the variation performance (for example, 60 seconds) is performed twice, the third pattern is temporarily stopped after 30 seconds, and the variation performance is restarted. Then, the value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed in accordance with the temporary stop timing may be decremented by one. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions on the display can be brought closer to the actual number of time reductions without causing discomfort.

In addition, in the third modification, the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) in which the time reduction state is set is used to notify the player by the time reduction rush production, but not limited to this, for example, production mode The game state is changed from the time saving state to the probability variable state, and the probability variable state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 times). You may use the structure which alert|reports by rush production|presentation.

Furthermore, when the special drawing is executed in the state where the variable probability state is set, a falling lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to end the variable probability state is provided separately from the jackpot lottery means for performing the jackpot lottery, In the period in which the variable state is set (for example, 100 times), in addition to the first end condition (30 special figure fluctuations) and the second end condition (small winning), the third condition (falling election) Each condition It may be configured to vary the mode of presentation executed in accordance with the establishment of.

In this case, for example, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is executed, and if the third condition is satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is changed. It is good to constitute so that the reduction in working hours information production mentioned above may be performed. Further, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the fixed notification performance is not executed, and only when the third condition is satisfied, the short time notification performance is executed. You can

In addition, in the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "jackpot ending screen (Fig. 135(a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends. Any display mode may be used as long as it makes the player think that the player is currently playing the jackpot game. For example, an interval screen displayed during the interval period may be displayed, or a display displayed during the jackpot game. A dedicated display mode having at least a part of the mode (for example, a display mode displayed in the small area Dm5 or the small area Dm6) may be used.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a further modified example of the battle effect in the third modified example described above will be described. In the third modification described above, when the time-saving jackpot is won, after the jackpot game ends (after the time-saving state is set), a predetermined end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations is a predetermined number (30 times) or until a predetermined lottery result (e.g., winning a small prize) is established as a lottery result of a special pattern, and the probability is changed during the battle performance in the time-saving state. It is configured to execute a battle victory performance (battle victory performance) when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the performance of losing the battle at the end of the time-saving jackpot game (battle defeat performance) is suppressed, the winning rate of the battle performance (the execution ratio of the battle victory performance) is increased, and the player It was intended to make it possible to make the audience interested in the performance results.

However, in the third modification described above, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the battle production in the time-saving state, the rematch production is executed, so the period of one battle production is extended. I had a problem with getting bored. In addition, there is a risk that victory or defeat will not be displayed as a result of the battle presentation even though the jackpot has been won multiple times, resulting in an presentation that is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the time saving state is set is changed 30 times after the time saving state is set (as the end condition of the battle production The set special figure fluctuation number) is configured so that different fluctuation times are selected between the first short period of time until the elapse and the second short period of time after that, and a jackpot is won during the first short period of time. In this case, a variable time (30 seconds) that can be set is selected for the winning performance period in the battle performance and the pseudo variable probability performance period for pseudo-executing the variable probability performance during the variable probability state. ing.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won during the first time period (during the battle production), regardless of the type of the winning jackpot (variable jackpot, short-time jackpot), the result of the battle production being executed. As a result, the effect of winning the battle (battle victory effect) can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the winning rate of the battle effect (percentage of the execution of the battle winning effect) and make the player interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, it is configured to execute different effects according to the type of jackpot won during the short period of the first time. Specifically, when winning a high probability jackpot (8 rounds, 16 rounds) during the short period of the first time, a performance for winning a jackpot is executed during the above-described pseudo variable probability performance period, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. Then, a new battle effect (battle victory effect) is executed in the jackpot game executed thereafter. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot (2 rounds) is won during the short period of the first time, during the jackpot fluctuation, the pseudo battle performance period is set after the pseudo probability variable performance period, and the jackpot is won during the pseudo probability variable performance period. After the production is executed, a pseudo-battle production is executed, a jackpot game is started during the battle production, and the production result of the pseudo-battle production (battle victory production) is displayed during the short jackpot game period of two rounds. It consists of As a result, if the probability variable jackpot is won during the first short period of time, the battle victory effect can be executed twice by the end of the probability variable jackpot game, so it is used in the third modification described above. It is possible to increase the winning rate of the battle presentation (execution rate of the battle winning presentation) more than the configuration, and to make the player interested in the presentation result.

In addition, in the fourth modification, when a jackpot is won during the first short time period, a constant fluctuation time (30 seconds) is selected regardless of the jackpot type, but this is limited. If the jackpot type in which the pseudo-battle performance is executed is won, the variation time is longer than that in the case of winning the other jackpot category, that is, the variation time is longer by the performance period of the pseudo-battle performance (for example, 50 seconds). can be selected. As a result, the period until the simulated battle performance is executed can be set to a fixed period, so that the judgment of the jackpot type won this time before the simulated battle performance is executed is suppressed. can be done.

On the other hand, during the first short period of time (during the battle production), if the short-time jackpot is won, the first battle victory production is executed during the jackpot fluctuation, and the pseudo-variable production is executed in the same way as the above-mentioned variable jackpot. do. Then, in the second battle performance (battle performance during the jackpot game, or pseudo-battle performance), a battle performance that continues from the end of the big win game until the end condition is satisfied is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first short period of time, it is possible to execute one battle victory production, so the winning rate of the battle production (the execution ratio of the battle victory production ) can be further enhanced, and the player can be made interested in the effect result. In addition, since the battle victory effect can be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of times the jackpot is won during the battle effect, the effect can be provided without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, the contents of the pseudo probability variable production will be explained. In the fourth modification, when the variable probability state is set in the same manner as the third embodiment and the third modification described above, the variable probability effect in which the character 811 runs on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. . During the pseudo probability variable production, the production (concept including the same production) including at least a part of the production modes executed when the probability variable state is set is executed, and during the production period It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation performance that makes the player think that the special figure variation is being executed a plurality of times.

As a result, it is difficult for the player to discriminate between the pseudo probability variation performance executed in a partial period of one special figure variation (jackpot variation) and the probability variation performance performed over a plurality of special figure variations. can do.

Next, with reference to Drawing 142, the contents of table 202de2 for probability variation and time saving are explained as a variation pattern table used in this 4th modification. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variation/time reduction table 202de2. This probability variation/time reduction table 202de2 differs from the above-described probability variation/time reduction table 202e2 (see FIG. 19) in that the table to be referred to is different based on the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and each of the variation type counter CS1 The difference is that the types of fluctuation patterns defined corresponding to the values are different, and the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100 to 71", that is, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times (first time short period), If the judgment result is a hit (big hit, small hit), regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the time-saving A big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected, and if the hit/fail judgment result is out, the fluctuation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1, it is defined to select a time-saving A-out variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds.

On the other hand, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "70 to 1", that is, the period (second time short period) after the number of special figure fluctuations has passed 30 times since the time saving state is set, and the success or failure determination result is hit ( In the case of a jackpot or a small hit), the time-saving B jackpot variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if the result of the success/failure determination is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " In the range of "0 to 179", the time reduction B deviation variation pattern 1 with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and in the case of the range of "180 to 198", the time reduction B deviation variation pattern 2 with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected. is defined as

In the fourth modification, by using the above-described probability variable / time saving table 202de2, a short period of time when the battle production is executed (first short period of time) and a short period of time when the battle production is not executed (second short period of time) , so that different fluctuation times can be selected. During the first time short period, when the special lottery is lost, a variation time shorter than the second time short period is selected, and when the special lottery is a win, the variation is longer than the second time short period. Since it is configured so that the time is selected, the degree of advantage in the reduced working hours state does not differ significantly between the first reduced working hours and the second reduced working hours.

In addition, in the fourth modification, if a small win is won during the first time period and the conditions for ending the battle production are satisfied, the battle victory production is performed once in the same manner as the production executed when the big win is won. After that, the simulated probability variable performance is executed, and the performance of losing the battle in the simulated battle performance to be executed after that is executed during the small winning variation. As a result, the battle presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. In this case, as the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is longer than when winning the other jackpot type, that is, the fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) that is longer for the period until the effect result of the pseudo battle effect is displayed. It is better to configure so that you can select

Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small win is won during the first short period of time and the end condition of the battle production is satisfied, the period from the end of the small winning game to the end of the first short period of time The variation time of the special figure variation executed in the second time period is configured to be selected based on the data table referred to during the second time period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable time corresponding to various effects during the battle effect from being selected even though the battle effect has ended.

As described above, in the third modified example and the fourth modified example, when the jackpot is won, the time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable state that is more advantageous than the time saving state can be set. A performance for notifying that the time saving state disadvantageous to the player is set, out of the probability variable state and the time saving state, is executed after the time saving state is set and a predetermined end condition is established. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the time saving state and the probability variable state based on the small hit winning.

In addition, in the time-saving state that is set when you win the time-saving jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is slightly shorter than the normal state (same concept) (for example, 5 to 60 seconds). It is configured to be easily selected, and when a small win is won in the time saving state, the data table to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the special figure variation is switched to provide a short variation time (for example, 0.5 to 0.5). 5 seconds) may be easily selected. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal design is similar to the fluctuation time of the special figure described above, and the shorter fluctuation time is likely to be selected after winning a small hit during the time saving state than when the time saving state is set. It is better to configure it so that

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the time saving state has been set based on winning the small win, and the number of remaining time saving times at the time of winning the small win can be seen. Since it becomes the number of times of time saving, a player can be made to play the game by which various times of time saving are set. In such a case, by using the technique of the third modified example described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more comfortable game.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a type of game machine that has a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated, the aspect of the chance meter CM is updated so as to have the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can also be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature group A> (sets whether or not to overlap button effects)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, wherein the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priorities and an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to cause the effect execution means to execute the effects corresponding to the plurality of the mode information stored in the same order of priority. A gaming machine A1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which various effects are executed as suggestive effects at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestive effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, by executing an operation effect that causes the player to operate a predetermined operation means as a suggestive effect, a player-participating suggestive effect is executed. There are amusement machines that enhance interest. However, since some players lose their motivation to play the game by executing many suggestive effects, the effect satisfying a plurality of players is executed only by executing the suggestive effects according to the predetermined rules. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest in the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the mode information for indicating the mode of performance of the performance executed by the performance executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of mode information having the same priority order, and the execution effect setting means executes an effect for the plurality of mode information stored in the same order of priority. It is decided whether to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably set whether or not to perform duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each piece of mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so as to enable overlapping execution, and when the performance is actually executed, the mode of the performance to be executed is varied according to the setting contents of the execution performance setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the performance setting timing at which the performance mode is set and the performance execution timing at which the performance based on the performance mode set is greatly different, the execution performance setting means at the performance execution timing. There is an effect that an effect corresponding to the setting contents of can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine A1, the mode information storage means transfers the mode information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area when a predetermined transfer condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is a machine for storing data.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, mode information already stored in a specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when a transfer condition is satisfied. As a result, the performance mode to be executed can be changed depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the performance mode setting means sets the performance modes having the same priority order, an order determination means capable of determining the order in which the performance modes are set; and erasing means for erasing the mode information stored in the storage area, wherein the erasing means deletes the number of the performance modes for which the same priority order is set by the performance setting means. when the number of storage areas is set larger than the number of the storage areas corresponding to the priority order of , the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is deleted in order from the oldest order based on the determination result of the order determination means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the number of performance modes set with the same priority order is set more than the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority order, the set The performance modes are erased in order from the oldest one. Therefore, since it is possible to easily execute the performance corresponding to the performance mode set most recently, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that does not cause a sense of incongruity, thereby improving the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, using the configuration of the gaming machine A1, if it is set to execute only the effect corresponding to the mode information stored in one storage area for the same priority, the most recent It is preferable that mode information corresponding to the set performance mode is stored in one storage area, and other mode information is deleted by the erasing means.

In the game machine A1 or A3, the effect executing means stores the first mode information in a predetermined first storage area among the plurality of storage areas of the mode information storage means, and stores the first mode information in the specific first storage area. A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that when specific second mode information different from the first mode information is stored in a second storage area different from the above, a special performance mode effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas is stored in a predetermined combination, the special effect mode effect is executed. Thus, in addition to the process of storing the mode information in the storage area by the mode information storage means, the process of storing the effect mode that has already been set and the process of establishing the execution conditions for the effect of the special effect mode are performed. , can have a dual role. In addition, since it is possible to assign a role for executing a special effect mode effect even to mode information with a low priority order for which the corresponding effect is difficult to be executed, the stored mode information can be effectively utilized. can. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be executed efficiently.

Any one of the game machines A1 to A4 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the effect execution means. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to execute an operation performance using an operation means that the player can operate, so that the player is interested in the performance to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to have a game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A5, the effect mode setting means can set an operation effect mode in which an operation effective period for validly determining the determination result of the operation determining means is set as the effect mode, and the effect is executed. The means stores first mode information corresponding to the operation presentation mode as the first mode information in the first storage area, and stores second mode information corresponding to the operation presentation mode as the second mode information. A gaming machine 6 characterized by executing the special effect mode when stored in the second storage area.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, a special performance can be executed in a situation where a plurality of operation performance modes are executed, so that the player is interested in the performance to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the game machine A6, the effect executing means includes the operation effective period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the first mode information, and the operation valid period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the second mode information. When the operation effective period overlaps, the effect of the special effect mode is executed, and in the effect of the special effect mode, the effect in which the operation effect mode is set is executed. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect when the operation effect is set redundantly. In addition, when the operation effective period is set in duplicate, since the special performance mode performance can be executed as the operation performance, the performance of the special performance mode is executed while continuing the performance of operating the operating means. be able to. Therefore, since the effect of the special effect mode can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature group B> (Change the area to store the button effect according to the setting trigger)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information for indicating in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities, and the effect mode setting means has at least It has a predetermined first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the mode information storage means is established when the presentation mode is set by the presentation mode setting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that ranges of the plurality of storage areas for storing the mode information are varied according to the setting conditions set therein.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed in which various effects are executed as suggestive effects at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestive effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, there is also a game machine configured to execute more suggestive effects so that suggestive effects can be set at various occasions. However, there is a problem that a large number of suggestive effects set at various occasions are executed, resulting in a complicated effect as a whole, which reduces the player's desire to play the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game capable of improving the interest in the game by suppressing the decrease in motivation for the game due to the effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the first setting condition or the second setting condition is established, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is set. Mode information for indicating is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities by the mode information storage means. Then, it is possible to change the range in which the mode information is stored among the plurality of storage areas according to the setting condition that is established when the presentation mode is set. As a result, it is possible to set a limit on the order of priority according to the setting conditions of the performance mode, so that regularity can be imparted to the performance executed based on each performance mode set under a plurality of conditions. . Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of a complicated performance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in desire to play due to the performance to be executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priority orders, and the plurality of modes stored in the plurality of the same priority orders in the effect executing means. The game machine B2 is characterized by having execution performance setting means for setting whether or not to execute the performance corresponding to the information.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, mode information for indicating the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of mode information having the same priority order, and the execution effect setting means executes an effect for the plurality of mode information stored in the same order of priority. It is decided whether to By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably set whether or not to perform duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each piece of mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so as to enable overlapping execution, and when the performance is actually executed, the mode of the performance to be executed is varied according to the setting contents of the execution performance setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the performance setting timing at which the performance mode is set and the performance execution timing at which the performance based on the performance mode set is greatly different, the execution performance setting means at the performance execution timing. There is an effect that an effect corresponding to the setting contents of can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine B2, the mode information storage means transfers the mode information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area when a predetermined transfer condition is satisfied. A game machine B3 characterized by being a machine for storing.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, mode information already stored in a specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when a transfer condition is satisfied. As a result, the performance mode to be executed can be changed depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various performances can be provided to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

<Feature group C> (Premium effect for low priority effects)
An effect execution means for executing an effect for a predetermined period determined in advance based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing, in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, mode information for indicating the mode of presentation set by The performance mode can be set so as to overlap, and has a performance end means for ending the performance being executed before the prescribed period elapses when a prescribed end condition is established. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various suggestive effects at various timings. However, it has been proposed to execute a suggestive effect with a higher priority when execution timings of suggestive effects overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, suggestive effects are executed according to a predetermined priority order. For example, by setting a high priority to a suggestive effect with a high effect, a suggestive effect with a low effect is executed. This can solve the problem that the suggestive performance with high performance effect is not executed and the amusement of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestive effects to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestive effects with low priority, and the executed suggestive effects become monotonous. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects.

According to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the mode information for indicating the set effect mode is given different priorities by the mode information storage means. Stored in multiple storage areas. Then, when the termination condition is established during execution of the performance, the performance is terminated by the performance termination means before a predetermined period elapses. As a result, the performance execution period can be varied depending on whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the performance based on the mode information with the lower priority among the mode information set in the overlapping periods can be easily executed. . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The game machine C1 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means is a predetermined value. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the end condition is established when the determination result is the result of .

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the termination condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means by the player, so that the player can select the period during which the effect is executed. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to vary the amount of the effect to be executed according to the player's willingness to participate in the effect, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result. , wherein the effect mode setting means includes a first effect mode that is likely to be set at least when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and a second effect mode that is more difficult to set than the first effect mode. and the mode information storage means stores first mode information for indicating the first presentation mode and second mode information for indicating the second presentation mode. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the data is stored in a storage area having a lower priority than the storage area.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the priority order of the first performance mode, which is easily set when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result for executing the privilege game, is set to be lower than the second performance mode, which is difficult to be set. be done. Thus, the effect corresponding to the second effect mode is more likely to be executed when the end condition is established and the effect period of the effect being executed is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the effect being executed can be expected to end early, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Feature D group> (associating effects with different priorities)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority order, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. mode information storage means for storing mode information for indicating in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, wherein the effect execution means corresponds to one priority among the plurality of storage areas When the first mode information stored in the first storage area satisfies a predetermined performance condition, the second mode stored in the second storage area corresponding to the other priority lower than the one priority. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it also executes an effect corresponding to the information in association with it.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various suggestive effects at various timings. However, it has been proposed to execute a suggestive effect with a higher priority when execution timings of suggestive effects overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, suggestive effects are executed according to a predetermined priority order. For example, by setting a high priority to a suggestive effect with a high effect, a suggestive effect with a low effect is executed. This can solve the problem that the suggestive performance with high performance effect is not executed and the amusement of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestive effects to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestive effects with low priority, and the executed suggestive effects become monotonous. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects.

According to the game machine D1, an effect corresponding to the mode information stored in the plurality of storage areas with different priorities by the mode information storage means is executed by the effect execution means based on the priority order. Furthermore, when the first mode information stored in the first storage area corresponding to one priority satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than the one priority is stored in the second storage area. An effect corresponding to the stored second mode information is associated and executed. As a result, an effect with a low priority can be executed in association with an effect with a high priority. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D1 has an effect period setting means capable of setting a period during which the effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect period setting means executes the first effect corresponding to the first mode information. and a second effect period during which the second effect corresponding to the second mode information is executed are set differently.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, each performance period is set so that the first performance period during which the first performance is executed and the second performance period during which the second performance is executed do not overlap. is set by the effect period setting means, it is possible to reliably notify the player of a plurality of effects to be executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine D2, a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result. The effect mode setting means has at least the first effect that is likely to be set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and the second effect that is less likely to be set than the first effect. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result for executing a privilege game, the first effect which is likely to be set and the second effect which is difficult to be set can be associated and executed. Furthermore, the second effect is a low priority effect that is executed alone. As a result, when the second performance is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the current execution of the second performance is related to the first performance, and a sense of expectation for the execution of the privilege game. can increase Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that the effect period setting means sets the second effect period earlier than the first effect period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second presentation period is set before the first presentation period, so the second presentation is executed before the first presentation. It will be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed before the second effect and the expectation of the player at the time when the second effect is executed to be spoiled. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is continuously executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the effect period setting means is configured to execute the second effect in association with the first effect and to execute the second effect without being associated with the first effect. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the period for which the second effect period is set is different between when the second effect period is set.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the current second production is executed in association with the first production based on the period during which the second production is executed. Since it is possible to predict whether or not it is, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature group E> (special effect when switching the target of the main variation effect)
A first determination means for executing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination means different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. A second determination means for executing determination, a first effect execution means for causing a display means to execute a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means for a predetermined period, and a determination result of the second determination means. a second effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a second effect for a predetermined period of time; an effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means; An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second effect, and an effect switching means for switching the first effect being executed to the second effect when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The game machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state in which the switching condition can be satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there are game machines that enhance the effect of suggestive effects by executing various effects at various timings as suggestive effects, and in such a game machine, suggestive effects are set at different timings based on different triggers. However, when another suggestive effect is executed while one suggestive effect is being executed, the one suggestive effect being executed is forcibly terminated and the other suggestive effect is executed. There is a game machine that has a game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestive effect is being executed, another suggestive effect can be executed, so the effect is that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. be. However, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestive effect regardless of the effect situation of the one suggestive effect being executed. However, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect causes the predetermined process change mode to end in the middle. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the switching condition is satisfied, the effect switching means switches the first effect being executed to the second effect. A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied. Thus, the performance mode of the first performance is set to the special performance mode, and the performance of the special performance mode is executed when switching to the second performance, so that various suggestive performances can be executed without confusing the player. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a related effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect as the special effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect is set as the special effect mode. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved without confusing the player.

The game machine E2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect execution means and the first effect execution means. The second effect execution means is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and the effect mode setting means performs the operation effect as the second effect. is set, the game machine E3 sets an effect mode corresponding to the operation effect as the special effect mode of the first effect.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect mode setting means is a first effect mode that is likely to be set as the effect mode of the first effect when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result. and a second effect mode that is less likely to be set than the first effect mode, and the second effect mode is set as a special effect mode of the first effect. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, the effect mode of the first effect being executed can be set to a effect mode in which the player is less interested. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the switching of the first effect to the second effect.

<Feature F group> (Continues to execute the variable promotion effect after the jackpot ends)
determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and setting after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played. The machine has at least a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as a result of the effect during execution of the privilege game, and the notification effect execution means is , the game machine F1 is characterized in that, when the privilege game in which the first game state is set after the privilege game ends, the notification effect is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. .

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. After the end of the privilege game, the game state can be set to either an advantageous game state in which winning is likely to occur or a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to win, and during the privilege game, after the end of the privilege game. It has been proposed to enable execution of a suggestion effect for suggesting the game state to be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). With such a game machine, it is possible to experience the pleasure of obtaining a privilege during the privilege game and the pleasure of predicting the game state to be set at the same time, thereby improving the amusement of the game. rice field. However, if it can be determined that the game state set after the end of the privilege game is a disadvantageous game state by the suggestive effect executed during the privilege game, the willingness to play after the end of the privilege game is reduced. I had a problem. In addition, the rate at which the advantageous game state is set is predetermined depending on the type of gaming machine. In the presentation, it is difficult to execute the presentation suggesting that an advantageous game state is set, and the suggestion presentation itself causes a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the notification effect executed by the notification effect execution means during execution of the privilege game is set to the first game state, a predetermined end condition is established after the privilege game is completed. will run until Thus, the privilege game in which the first game state is set after the privilege game ends and the second game state is set after the privilege game ends during the first game state until the end condition is satisfied. is executed, it is possible to set a notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect. Thus, compared with the case where the notification performance is executed only during the privilege game, it is possible to increase the setting ratio of the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the performance result of the notification performance. Therefore, it is possible to execute a notification effect that gives the player a sense of anticipation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine F1, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminations of the discrimination means, and a measurement discrimination means for discriminating whether the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number; is established when it is determined by the measuring and determining means that the number of times of determination after the first game state is set reaches the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the termination condition is satisfied based on the number of determinations by the determination means. can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, and a game is played by the privilege game. special privilege game execution means capable of executing a special privilege game capable of imparting a special privilege different from a privilege that can be imparted to a person; and variable means capable of changing to a second state, wherein the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed in a state where the first game state is set. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, the end condition is established when the special privilege game in which the variable means is varied is executed. can make you think it was established. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the period until the termination condition is satisfied is a privilege game, and it is possible to execute the notification effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the notification effect executing means is provided when the special game executing means executes the special game in which the first game state is set before the end condition is satisfied. is a game machine F4 characterized in that the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, during the execution of the notification effect, the setting of the second game state cannot be notified to the privilege game. As long as the winning is won, the notification performance can be continuously executed, so that as the performance result of the notification performance, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the notification performance indicating that the second game state is not set. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect result of the notification effect can relatively increase the ratio of the notification result indicating that the second game state is set.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period, and the special game is executed by the special game executing means. special period setting means capable of setting a special period to be executed, remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the special period determined by the remaining period determining means special period notification means capable of notifying remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the period, wherein the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the remaining period of the special period is notified after the end condition is satisfied and the notification performance is finished, the remaining period indicated by the remaining special period information can be varied according to the timing when the end condition is satisfied. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the length of the special period set when the first game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Features G group> (Time-saving rush effect with small winnings during time-saving state)
determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means for a predetermined period of time; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the stop display of the identification information in a specific display mode, and setting after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished. a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played; and an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect. and an execution means, wherein, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the effect execution means executes the first game from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the first notification condition. When the second game state is set based on the fact that one performance is executed and the first notification condition is established, the second game state is less likely to be executed than the case where the first game state is set. A game machine G1 characterized by executing 2 effects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. After the end of the privilege game, either a first game state which is more advantageous than the normal state or a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state can be set for a predetermined period. It has been proposed that a suggestive effect for suggesting a game state to be set after the end of the bonus game can be executed during the game (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200589). In such a gaming machine, when the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game, the player continues to play the game for a predetermined period of time with regret that the second game state was not set. There is a problem that the desire to play after the end of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, even if the first game state is set, until the first notification condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the first game state has been set, so that the privilege game ends. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play later from being lowered. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, period setting means for setting a period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means, , wherein the second effect includes a notification mode for notifying the remaining period of the first game state at least when the first notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is notified, the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first game state is set, that is, the period set by the period setting means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period of time. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that more types of periods are set by the period setting means than the number of types actually set as the period of the first game state. There is an effect that a game can be provided.

In the game machine G1 or G2, it is possible to execute a special game capable of imparting a privilege different from the privilege game to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a special display mode different from the specific display mode. said special game execution means, and when said special game is executed in a state where said first effect is being executed by said suggestive effect execution means, said first notification condition is satisfied. Characteristic game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the first notification condition is satisfied when the special game is executed, so the timing at which the first notification condition is satisfied is determined by the determination result of the determination means. can be different. Therefore, since the timing at which the second effect is executed can be set irregularly, an effect that is difficult for the player to predict can be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G3, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is changed to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the first state. Having ball entry means, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, or when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, the predetermined opening condition can be established. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, when a privilege game or a special game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state. When the 1 notification condition is established, it can be made to think that the second performance is executed based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, since the remaining period notified by the second effect can be thought to be the period (initial value) set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the effect executing means executes, as the first effect, a effect using at least a part of the effect mode of the privilege game effect executed during the privilege game. A game machine G5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can be made to think that the player is in the privilege game during the period until the first notification condition is established, the timing at which the first game state is set can be made difficult to understand, thereby making the game interesting. has the effect of being able to improve In the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine G2, by making the timing at which the first game state is set difficult to understand, the player can easily understand how long the first game state has been set this time. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G5, a remaining period condition determining means for determining whether the remaining period of the first game state at the time when the first notification condition is established satisfies a predetermined remaining period condition; remaining period correction means for executing a predetermined correction process for the remaining period when the period condition determining means determines that the remaining period condition is not satisfied; The game machine G6 is characterized in that the notification mode included in the second effect is executed in place of the corrected remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period corrected by the remaining period correcting means.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, when the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied does not satisfy the remaining period condition, the remaining period The remaining period of time is corrected by the period correcting means, and a corrected remaining period of time information mode indicating the corrected remaining period of time is executed as a second effect. Thereby, when the value indicating the remaining period of the first game state is an incomplete value, the player can be notified of the corrected value after being corrected to an appropriate value. Specifically, for example, when the period of the first gaming state is set based on the number of special figure fluctuations, the value of the remaining period (number of remaining special figure fluctuations) at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied , when the last digit is not "0" or "5" (for example, "81"), the correction process is executed to correct the value of the remaining period to be "0" or "5" (for example, , "80"), and informs the player of the corrected value. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of a sharp value, so that the player can easily think that the timing when the second performance is executed is the timing when the first game state is set. has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises: a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination when a first discrimination condition is satisfied; a first effect executing means for causing a display means to execute a first effect for a predetermined period; an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect to be executed by the first effect executing means; and a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means is configured to perform the second determination. A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state in which the determination result can be a specific determination result.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the acquisition information for establishing the second determination condition is set at least based on the acquisition information so that the second determination condition is established. storage means capable of storing until the second determination condition is satisfied; The effect mode setting means sets the special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific preliminary determination result.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, comprising operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. and a second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period of time, and the effect mode setting means also includes the effect mode of the second effect. The first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The effect mode setting means sets an effect mode corresponding to the operation effect as a special effect mode of the first effect when the operation effect is set as the second effect.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the determination result of the first determining means as the effect mode of the first effect. and a second effect mode that is less likely to be set than the first effect mode, and the second effect mode can be set as a special effect mode of the first effect. It sets the mode.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means. A first effect executing means for causing the display means to execute for a predetermined period, and an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect to be executed by the first effect executing means are different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means specifies the determination result of the second determination means. A special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed in a state that can result in the determination result of (1).
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a storage means capable of storing acquired information for satisfying the second determination condition at least until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information, and stored in the storage means. pre-determination means capable of determining the acquired information until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information, and The special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed in the case of a specific preliminary determination result.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means. a second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined period of time; the effect mode setting means can also set the effect mode of the second effect; The effect execution means is capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and the effect mode setting means is configured to set the operation effect as the second effect. When set, the effect mode corresponding to the operation effect is set as the special effect mode of the first effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect mode setting means sets, as the effect mode of the first effect, a first effect mode that is likely to be set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result, and A second effect mode, which is difficult to set, can be set, and the second effect mode is set as a special effect mode of the first effect.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
S306 determination means
S2404 privilege game executing means
S2512 Game state setting means

Claims (4)

a first determination means for performing a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied;
a first effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means for a predetermined period;
an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means;
a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied;
The effect mode setting means sets a special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed in a state where the determination result of the second determination means can be a specific determination result. game machine. a storage means capable of storing acquired information for satisfying the second determination condition at least until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information;
pre-determining means capable of determining the acquired information stored in the storage means until the second determination condition is satisfied based on the acquired information;
The effect mode setting means sets the special effect mode as the effect mode of the first effect to be executed when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific preliminary determination result. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein an operation means that can be operated by a player;
an operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
a second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period;
The effect mode setting means can also set the effect mode of the second effect,
The first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are capable of executing at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the determination result of the operation determination means,
The effect mode setting means is characterized in that, when the operation effect is set as the second effect, the effect mode corresponding to the operation effect is set as the special effect mode of the first effect. The game machine according to claim 2. The effect mode setting means sets, as the effect mode of the first effect, a first effect mode that is likely to be set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result, and a setting more than the first effect mode. It is possible to set a second production mode that is difficult to be performed,
4. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein said second effect mode is set as a special effect mode of said first effect.

Images